Honda 2013 Accord Coupe Owners Manual

Honda-2013-Accord-Coupe-Owners-Manual-106986 honda-2013-accord-coupe-owners-manual-106986

Owners manual Pdf 3L1313OM 2013 Honda Accord Owners manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

2015-10-23

: Honda Honda-2013-Honda-Accord-Coupe-Owners-Manual-816761 honda-2013-honda-accord-coupe-owners-manual-816761 honda pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 554 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Contents

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the

vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find

descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your

particular model.

Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)

represent features and equipment that are available on some, but

not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these

features.

This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and

Canada.

The information and specifications included in this publication were

in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.

reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications

or design at any time without notice and without incurring any

obligation.

2Safe Driving P. 25

For Safe Driving P. 26 Seat Belts P. 30 Airbags P.37

2Instrument Panel P. 65

Indicators P.66 Gauges and Displays P. 79

2Controls P. 83

Setting the Clock P. 84 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 86

Opening and Closing the Moonroof

P. 107

Adjusting the Seats P. 125

2Features P. 147

Audio System P.148 Audio System Basic Operation P. 154, P. 177, P. 210

Customized Features P. 273 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver

P. 311

2Driving P. 391

Before Driving P. 392 Towing a Trailer P.397

Refueling P. 446 Fuel Economy P. 448

2Maintenance P. 451

Before Performing Maintenance P. 452 Maintenance Minder

P. 455

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 483

Climate Control System Maintenance P. 497

2Handling the Unexpected P. 503

Tools P. 504 If a Tire Goes Flat P.505

Overheating P. 518 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P.520

2Information P. 529

Specifications P.530 Identification Numbers P. 534

Emissions Testing P. 537 Warranty Coverages P.539

QRG Quick Reference Guide

Index Index

Home Book Table of Contents

TOC Chapter Table of Contents

Navigation Key

Online Reference Owner's Manual

2013 Accord Coupe

00X31-T3L-6000

* Not available on all models

Contents

Child Safety P. 50 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 62 Safety Labels P. 63

Opening and Closing the Trunk P.97 Security System P. 101 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 104

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P.108 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 123

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P.133 Climate Control System P.142

Audio Error Messages P. 263 General Information on the Audio System P. 269

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 313, P. 350 Compass

P. 388

When Driving P.401 Braking P.439 Parking Your Vehicle P. 443

Accessories and Modifications P. 449

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 459 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 475

Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 485 Battery P. 494 Remote Transmitter Care P. 495

Cleaning P. 498

Engine Does Not Start P. 511 Jump Starting P.514 Shift Lever Does Not Move P.517

Fuses P. 524 Emergency Towing P.527

Devices that Emit Radio Waves P.535 Reporting Safety Defects P.536

Authorized Manuals P.541 Customer Service Information P.542

Quick Reference Guide

P. 2

Safe Driving

P. 25

Instrument Panel

P. 65

Controls

P. 83

Features

P. 147

Driving

P. 391

Maintenance

P. 451

Handling the Unexpected

P. 503

Information

P. 529

Index

P. 546

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

QRG Quick Reference Guide Index Index

Home Book Table of Contents

TOC Chapter Table of Contents

Navigation Key

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index

*1: Models with the sma rt entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

❙System Indicators

(P 66)

❙Gauges

(P 79)

❙Information Display

(P 80)

❙Navigation System

() See Navigation System Manual

❙Audio System

(P 154)

❙ENGINE START/STOP Button

(P 109)

❙Rear Window Defogger

(P 119)

❙Seat Heater Switches

(P 141)

❙Ignition Switch

(P 108)

❙ECON Button

(P 420)

❙Heated Mirror Button

(P 119)

❙Climate Control System

(P 142)

❙ (Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) System OFF) Button

(P 432)

❙Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Button

(P 429)

❙TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Button

(P 435)

❙Hazard Warning Button

❙Audio with Touch Screen

(P 178)

❙Audio/Information Screen

(P 181)

* Not available on all models

(P 155) (P 213)

Home

QRG

Index

(P 177) (P 210)

(P 211)

❙(+ / (- / / Buttons

(P 153)

❙SOURCE Button

(P 153)

❙Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System

Voice Control Buttons

(P 313)

❙Navigation System Voice Control Buttons

(P 219)

() See Navigation System Manual

❙Steering Wheel Adjustments

(P 122)

❙Cruise Control Buttons

(P 421)

❙Wipers/Washers

(P 117)

❙Paddle Shifter (Shift up)

(P 411)

❙Brightness Control

(P 118)

❙ (Select/Reset) Knob

(P 80)

❙Horn (Press an area around .)

❙ (Display) Button

(P 155)

❙Paddle Shifter (Shift down)

(P 411)

❙LaneWatch

TM*

(P 433)

❙Fog Lights

(P 115)

❙Headlights/Turn Signals

(P 113)

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

* Not available on all models

(P 415)

(P 181) (P 213)

(P 415)

(P 350)

Visual Index

❙Door Mirror Controls

(P 124)

❙Passenger's Front Airbag

(P 40)

❙Parking Brake

(P 439)

❙Glove Box

(P 135)

❙Rearview Mirror

(P 123)

❙Hood Release Handle

(P 461)

❙Power Door Lock Master Switch

(P 96)

❙Power Window Switches

(P 104)

❙Interior Fuse Box

(P 525)

❙Driver's Front Airbag

(P 40)

❙Trunk Main Switch

(P 99)

❙Fuel Fill Door Release Handle

(P 447)

❙Trunk Release

(P 97)

❙Shift Lever

Automatic Transmission (CVT)

(P 409)

Automatic Transmission

(P 413)

Manual Transmission

(P 417)

❙USB Port

(P 149)

❙Auxiliary Input Jack

(P 150)

❙Accessory Power Socket

(P 138)

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

* Not available on all models

❙Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat

(P 59)

❙Sun Visors

❙Vanity Mirrors

❙Map Lights

(P 134)

❙Front Seat

(P 125)

❙LATCH to Secure a Child Seat

(P 55)

❙Side Curtain Airbags

(P 46)

❙Grab Handle

❙Ceiling Light

(P 133)

❙Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat)

(P 57)

❙Rear Seat

(P 132)

❙Accessory Power

Socket

(P 138)

❙Sunglasses Holder

(P 140)

❙Moonroof Switch

(P 107)

❙Seat Belts

(P 30)

❙Side Airbags

(P 44)

❙Coat Hook

(P 139)

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

*Not available on all models

Visual Index

❙Maintenance Under the Hood

(P 459)

❙Windshield Wipers

(P 117)

❙Tires

(P 485)

❙Door Lock/Unlock Control

(P 89)

❙Power Door Mirrors

(P 124)

❙Headlights

(P 113)

❙How to Refuel

(P 447)

❙High-Mount Brake Light

(P 482)

❙Emergency Trunk Release Lever

(P 100)

❙Opening/Closing the Trunk

(P 97)

❙Parking Lights

(P 480)

❙Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights

(P 479)

❙Fog Lights

(P 478)

❙Multi-View Rear Camera

(P 444)

❙Back-Up Lights

(P 481)

❙Rear Camera

(P 445)

❙Trunk Release Button

(P 98)

❙Brake/Taillights

(P 481)

❙Rear Side Marker Lights

(P 481)

❙Rear Turn Signal Lights

(P 481)

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

(P 483)

(P 475)

(P 479)

(P 480)

(P 478)

(P 505)

*Not available on all models

Eco Assist System

(P 420)

Ambient Meter

●Changes color to reflect your driving

style.

Green: Fuel efficient driving

Light green: Moderate acceleration/

deceleration

White: Aggressive acceleration/

deceleration

●The ambient meter color changes in

accordance with your brake or

accelerator pedal operation.

ECON Button

(P 420)

Helps maximize fuel economy.

ECON Mode Indicator

(P 75)

Comes on when the ECON button is

pressed.

Ambient Meter

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

(P 25)

Airbags

(P 37)

●Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and

your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.

Child Safety

(P 50)

●All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.

●Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.

●Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.

Exhaust Gas Hazard

(P 62)

●Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon

monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon

monoxide gas can accumulate.

Before Driving Checklist

(P 29)

●Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,

steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.

Seat Belts

(P 30)

●Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well

back in the seat.

●Check that your passengers are wearing

their seat belts correctly.

Fasten your lap belt as

low as possible.

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

Instrument Panel

(P 65)

Canada

U.S.

Low Fuel Indicator

Anti-lock Brake

System (ABS)

Indicator

Parking Brake

and Brake System

Indicator (Red)

Canada

U.S.

Washer Level

Indicator

System Indicators

Malfunction

Indicator Lamp

Low Oil Pressure

Indicator

Charging System

Indicator

Vehicle Stability

Assist (VSA®) System

Indicator

VSA® OFF Indicator

Low Tire Pressure/

TPMS Indicator

Electric Power

Steering (EPS) System

Indicator

Lights Reminders

Lights On Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Fog Light Indicator

Immobilizer System

Indicator

Seat Belt Reminder

Indicator

System Indicators

CRUISE CONTROL

Indicator

CRUISE MAIN

Indicator

Tachometer

Speedometer

Fuel Gauge

Security System

Alarm Indicator

Shift Lever

Position

Indicator

Gauges

(P 79)

/Information Display

(P 80)

System Indicators

(P 66)

Turn Signal and

Hazard Warning

Indicators

System Indicators

Temperature Gauge

M (7-speed manual shift mode)

Indicator/Shift Indicator

Maintenance Minder

Indicator

Smart Entry System

Indicator

Starter System

Indicator

ECON mode

Indicator

Forward Collision

Warning (

FCW

) Indicator

Lane Departure Warning

(

LDW

) Indicator

Light Control

Indicator

Door and Trunk

Open Indicator

Brake System

Indicator (Amber)

Supplemental

Restraint System

Indicator

Canada

U.S.

Automatic transmission (CVT)

models

M (Sequential shift mode)

Indicator/Gear position

Indicator

Automatic transmission models

*Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

(P 83)

Clock

(P 84)

Enter the Clock Adjustment screen.

2Setting the Clock (P 84)

Rotate to change hour, then

press .

Rotate to change minute, then

press .

The navigation system receives signals from

GPS satellites, updating the clock

automatically.

Models without navigation system

Models with navigation system

ENGINE START/STOP

Button

(P 109)

Press the button to change the vehicle’s

power mode.

Turn Signals

(P 113)

Turn Signal Control Lever

Right

Left

Lights

(P 113)

Wipers and Washers

(P 117)

Light Control Switches

Low Beam

High Beam

Flashing

Wiper/Washer Control Lever

Adjustment Ring

: Long Delay

: Short Delay

MIST

OFF

INT: Low speed with intermittent

LO: Low speed wipe

HI: High speed wipe

Pull toward

you to spray

washer fluid.

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

*Not available on all models

Steering Wheel

(P 122)

●To adjust, pull the adjustment lever

towards you, adjust to the desired

position, then lock the lever back in place.

Unlocking the Doors

from the Inside

(P 94)

●Pull either door inner handle to unlock

and open it at the same time.

●Unlocking and opening the driver’s door

from the inner handle unlocks the

passenger’s door.

Trunk

(P 97)

●To unlock and open the trunk:

•Pull the trunk release.

•Press the trunk release button on the remote

transmitter or the smart entry remote.

•Press the trunk release button

on the

trunk lid.

Power Door Mirrors

(P 124)

●With the ignition switch in ON (w

, move

the selector switch to L or R.

●Push the appropriate edge of the

adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.

Trunk Release

Selector Switch

Adjustment Switch

Power Windows

(P 104)

●With the ignition switch in ON (w

, open

and close the power windows.

●If the power window lock button is in the

off position, the passenger's window can

be opened and closed with its own

switch.

●If the power window lock button is in the

on position (indicator is on), the

passenger's window switch is disabled.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an

ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Power Window Lock Button

Window

Switch

Indicator

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

*Not available on all models

Climate Control System

(P 142)

●Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.

●Press the button to turn the system on or off.

●Press the button to defrost the windshield.

The climate control system is voice operable. (P 219)

Models with navigation system

Driver’s Side

Temperature Control

Buttons

(Rear Window Defogger/Heated Mirror

)

Button

(Windshield Defroster) Button

SYNC (Synchronized) Button

Air flows from floor and windshield

defroster vents.

Air flows from floor vents.

Air flows from floor and dashboard

vents.

Air flows from dashboard vents.

AUTO Button

(On/Off) Button

(Recirculation) Button

MODE Control Button

/ (Fan Control) Buttons A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

Passenger’s Side Temperature Control Buttons

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

*Not available on all models

Features

(P 147)

Audio Remote Controls

(P 153)

●(+ / (- Button

Press and release to adjust the volume up/

down.

●SOURCE Button

Press and release to change the audio

mode: FM/AM/CD/XM®

/HDD

/USB/iPod®/

Bluetooth/Pandora®

/Aha

TM*

/AUX.

● / Button

Radio:Press and release to change the

preset station.

Press and hold to select the next or

previous strong station.

CD/HDD

/USB device:

Press and release to skip to the

beginning of the next song or

return to the beginning of the

current song.

Press and hold to change a folder.

(+ / (- / / Button

SOURCE

Button

Audio System

(P 154)

Models with one display

Audio/Information

Screen

BACK Button

FM/AM Button

(Skip/Seek)

Button

Selector Knob

Button

VOL/

(Volume/Power)

Knob

CD Button

AUX Button

CD Slot

(CD Eject)

Button

Preset Buttons

(1-6)

SETTINGS Button

(Skip/Seek)

Button

PHONE Button

MENU Button

DISP Button

*Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

(P 177) (P 210)

*1: Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source selected.

CD Slot

(CD Eject) Button

BACK Button

Selector Knob

(Tune Down) Icon

(Skip/Seek) Icon

(P 177)

Models with two displays

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

Button

Source

VOL/ (Volume/Power)

Knob

(Skip/Seek) Icon

Presets

Phone

Clock/Screen

DISP Button

(Tune Up) Icon

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

*1: Icons that appear on the scr een vary by the source selected.

CD Slot

(CD Eject) Button

MENU Button

Interface Dial/ENTER Button

(Skip/Seek) Icon

(P 210)

Models with navigation system

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

Button

Source

VOL (Volume) Knob

(Skip/Seek) Icon

Presets

(Tune Up) Icon

(Power) Button

(Tune Down) Icon

INFO Button

AUDIO Button

SETTINGS Button

BACK Button

NAV Button

PHONE Button

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

Driving

(P 391)

M Indicator

Shift Indicator

Manual Transmission

(P 417)

Automatic Transmission (CVT)

(P 409)

●Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.

●Shifting

Park

Turn off or start the engine.

Transmission is locked.

Neutral

Transmission is not locked.

Drive (S)

●Better acceleration.

●Increased engine braking.

●Going up or down hills.

●7-speed manual shift

mode can be used.

Depress the brake pedal

and press the release button

to move out of (P.

Press the release button to

move the shift lever.

Move the shift lever without

pressing the release button.

Reverse

Used when reversing.

Drive

●Normal driving.

●7-speed mode can be used

temporarily.

Shift Down (-

Paddle Shifter

Shift Up (+

Paddle Shifter

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode

(P 411)

●Allows you to manually shift

the transmission up or down

without removing your hands

from the steering wheel.

When the shift lever is in (S

●Pulling a paddle shifter

changes the mode from

automatic transmission (CVT) to

7-speed manual shift mode.

●The M indicator and the

selected speed number are

displayed in the shift indicator.

When the shift lever is in (D

●Pulling a paddle shifter

temporarily changes the mode

from automatic transmission

(CVT) to 7-speed manual shift

mode. The selected speed

number is displayed in the shift

indicator.

Shift Lever

Release

Button

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

Automatic Transmission

(P 413)

●Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.

●Shifting

Park

Turn off or start the engine.

Transmission is locked.

Neutral

Transmission is not locked.

Drive (S)

Sequential shift mode can be used.

Depress the brake pedal

and press the release button

to move out of (P.

Press the release button to

move the shift lever.

Move the shift lever without

pressing the release button.

Reverse

Used when reversing.

Drive

Normal driving. D-paddle shift

mode can be used

Shift Lever

Release

Button

M Indicator

Gear

Position

Indicator

Shift Down (-

Paddle Shifter

Shift Up (+

Paddle Shifter

Paddle Shifters

(P 415)

●Paddle shifters allow you to shift gears much like a manual

transmission (1st through 6th). This is useful for engine braking.

●D-paddle shift mode: The

transmission will shift back to

automatic mode once the system

detects that the vehicle is cruising.

●Sequential shift mode: Holds the

selected gear, and the M indicator

comes on.

●The selected gear position is

shown in the instrument panel.

Selected Gear

Number

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

VSA® OFF Button

(P 432)

●The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system

helps stabilize the vehicle during

cornering, and helps maintain traction

while accelerating on loose or slippery

road surfaces.

●VSA® comes on automatically every time

you start the engine.

●To turn VSA® on or off, press and hold

the button until you hear a beep.

Cruise Control

(P 421)

●Cruise control allows you to maintain a

set speed without keeping your foot on

the accelerator pedal.

●To use cruise control, press the CRUISE

button, then press the –/SET button once

you have achieved the desired speed

(above 25 mph or 40 km/h).

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS)

(P 435)

●Detects a change in tire conditions and

overall dimensions due to decrease in tire

pressures.

●TPMS is turned on automatically every

time you start the engine.

●A calibration procedure must be

performed when certain conditions arise.

Refueling

(P 446)

Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number 87 or

higher required

Fuel tank capacity: 17.2 US gal (65 L)

Push the fuel fill door

release handle.

Turn the fuel fill cap

slowly to remove the

cap.

Place the cap in the

holder on the fuel fill

door.

After refueling, screw

the cap back on until it

clicks at least once.

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

(P 451)

Under the Hood

(P 459)

●Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer

fluid. Add when necessary.

●Check brake fluid and clutch

fluid.

●Check the battery regularly.

Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the

dashboard.

Locate the hood latch lever, pull the lever up, and lift up

the hood.

When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly

locked in place.

Lights

(P 475)

●Inspect all lights regularly.

Wiper Blades

(P 483)

●Replace blades if they leave streaks

across the windshield.

Tires

(P 485)

●Inspect tires and wheels regularly.

●Check tire pressures regularly.

●Install snow tires for winter

driving.

*Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

(P 503)

Flat Tire

(P 505)

●Park in a safe location and replace the

flat tire with the compact spare tire in the

trunk.

Indicators Come On

(P 520)

●Identify the indicator and consult the

owner's manual.

Engine Won't Start

(P 511)

●If the battery is dead, jump start using a

booster battery.

Blown Fuse

(P 524)

●Check for a blown fuse if an electrical

device does not operate.

Overheating

(P 518)

●Park in a safe location. If you do not see

steam under the hood, open the hood,

and let the engine cool down.

Emergency Towing

(P 527)

●Call a professional towing service if you

need to tow your vehicle.

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

What to Do If

*1:

Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

The ignition switch does

not turn from (0 to (q

Why?

●

The steering wheel may be locked.

●

Try to turn the steering wheel left and right

while turning the ignition key

●

Move the steering wheel left and right while

pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button

the same time.

The ignition switch does

not turn from (q to (0

and I cannot remove the

key. Why?

The shift lever should be moved to (P.

Why does the brake pedal

pulsate slightly when

applying the brakes?

This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a

problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never

pump the brake pedal.

*Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

Why do the doors lock

after I unlocked the doors

using a remote

transmitter?

If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are

relocked automatically for security.

Why does the beeper

sound when I open the

driver's door?

The beeper sounds when:

●

The key is left in the ignition switch

●

The power mode

is in ACCESSORY.

●

The exterior lights are left on.

Why does the beeper

sound when I start driving?

The beeper sounds when:

●

Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.

●

The parking brake lever is not fully released.

Why do I hear a screeching

sound when I apply the

brake pedal?

The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle

inspected by a dealer.

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

*Not available on all models

California Proposition 65 Warning

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).

The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s

systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related

to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of

time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is

designed to record such data as:

•How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

•Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were

buckled/fastened;

•How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator

and/or brake pedal; and,

•How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the

circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data

are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation

occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving

conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and

crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law

enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash

investigation.

WARNING: This product contains or emits

chemicals known to the state of California to cause

cancer and birth defects or other reproductive

harm.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,

and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the

vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that

have the special equipment, can read the information if they have

access to the vehicle or the EDR.

The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by

anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the

vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record

information about powertrain performance. The data can be used

to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians

diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with

data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains

confidential.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act

The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this

vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may

apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/

As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded

by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid

damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

NOTICE

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

A Few Words About Safety

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And

operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have

provided operating procedures and other information on labels and

in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that

could hurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the

hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You

must use your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,

including:

●Safety Labels - on the vehicle.

●Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol

and

one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.

These signal words mean:

●Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.

●Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.

●Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information - please

read it carefully.

3DANGER

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if

you don't follow instructions.

3WARNING

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if

you don't follow instructions.

3CAUTION

You CAN be HURT if you don't follow

instructions.

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving

Important Safety Precautions ............. 26

Your Vehicle's Safety Features............ 28

Seat Belts

About Your Seat Belts........................ 30

Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 33

Seat Belt Inspection............................ 36

Airbags

Airbag System Components............... 37

Types of Airbags ................................ 40

Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 40

Side Airbags....................................... 44

Side Curtain Airbags.......................... 46

Airbag System Indicators.................... 47

Airbag Care....................................... 49

Child Safety

Protecting Child Passengers ............... 50

Safety of Infants and Small Children .......52

Safety of Larger Children ................... 60

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 62

Safety Labels

Label Locations.................................. 63

Home

QRG

Index

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

For Safe Driving

The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them

properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the

most important.

Important Safety Precautions

■Always wear your seat belt

A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to

supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped

with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and

wear them properly.

■Restrain all children

Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the

front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger

children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the

belt properly without a booster seat.

■Be aware of airbag hazards

While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants

who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,

and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and

warnings in this manual.

■Don't drink and drive

Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to

changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.

So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.

1Important Safety Precautions

Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use

of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the

driver while driving.

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions

■Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely

Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying

close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.

Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to

divert some attention away from driving.

■Control your speed

Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher

the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.

Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum

speed posted.

■Keep your vehicle in safe condition

Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.

To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition

frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features

Your Vehicle's Safety Features

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and

your passengers.

1Your Vehicle's Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that

work together to help protect you and your

passengers during a crash.

Some features do not require any action on your part.

These include a strong steel framework that forms a

safety cage around the passenger compartment,

front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering

column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat

belts in a sufficient crash.

However, you and your passengers cannot take full

advantage of these features unless you remain seated

in the correct position and always wear your seat

belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to

injuries if they are not used properly.

Safety Cage

Crush Zones

Seats and Seat-Backs

Head Restraints

Collapsible Steering Column

Seat Belts

Front Airbags

Side Curtain Airbags

Door Locks

Side Airbags

Seat Belt Tensioners

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features

For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items

each time before you drive.

•After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure both doors are closed and locked.

Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider

from unexpectedly opening a door.

2Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 94

•Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are

adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the

vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a

crash.

2Adjusting the Seats P. 125

•Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective

when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller

persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.

2Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 128

•Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any

passengers are properly belted as well.

2Fastening a Seat Belt P. 33

•Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child's age, height

and weight.

2Child Safety P. 50

■Safety CheckList

1Safety CheckList

If the door and trunk open indicator is on, a door

and/or the trunk is not completely closed. Close both

doors and the trunk tightly until the indicator goes

off.

2Door and Trunk Open Indicator P. 70

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

Seat Belts

About Your Seat Belts

Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you

connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety

features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the

vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat

belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full

advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.

In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:

-frontal impacts

-side impacts

-rear impacts

-rollovers

■Lap/shoulder seat belts

All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency

locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping

some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to

restrain your body. The rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with

child seats.

2Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 57

1About Your Seat Belts

Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every

crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your

risk of serious injury.

Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories

require you to wear seat belts.

WARNING

Not wearing a seat belt properly increases

the chance of serious injury or death in a

crash, even though your vehicle has

airbags.

Be sure you and your passengers always

wear seat belts and wear them properly.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

Continued

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

■Proper use of seat belts

Follow these guidelines for proper use:

•All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position

for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduces the effectiveness of

the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

•Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or

behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.

•Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very

seriously injured in a crash.

•Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort

or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability

and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If

the ignition switch is turned to ON (w

before the driver's seat belt is fastened, a

beeper will sound and the indicator will blink.

If the driver does not fasten the belt before

the beeper stops, the indicator will remain on.

The beeper will also periodically sound and

the indicator will blink while driving until the

driver's and front passenger’s seat belts are

fastened.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

■Seat Belt Reminder

1About Your Seat Belts

If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends

the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If

this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the

seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.

Then refasten the belt.

1Seat Belt Reminder

The indicator will also come on if a front passenger

does not fasten their seat belt within 6 seconds after

the ignition switch is turned to ON (w

When no one is sitting in the front passenger's seat,

or a child or small adult is riding there, the indicator

will not come on.

This is because the weight sensors in the seat cannot

detect their presence.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.

The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to-

severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to

inflate the front airbags.

■Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.

If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come

on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and

thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not

offer protection in a subsequent crash.

During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the

tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Continued

Fastening a Seat Belt

After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well

back in the seat:

2Adjusting the Seats P. 125

1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.

2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then

tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is

secure.

uMake sure that the belt is not twisted or

caught on anything.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat

belt or one that does not appear to be working

correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working

properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.

Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.

Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or

retractor mechanism.

Pull out slowly.

Correct

Seated

Posture.

Latch

Plate

Buckle

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as

possible across your hips, then pull up on

the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part

fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic

bones take the force of a crash and reduces

the chance of internal injuries.

4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to

remove any slack, then check that the belt

rests across the center of your chest and

over your shoulder. This spreads the forces

of a crash over the strongest bones in your

upper body.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then

guide the belt by hand until it has retracted

completely.

When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of

the way and will not get caught by closing the door.

WARNING

Improperly positioning the seat belts can

cause serious injury or death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts are properly

positioned before driving.

Lap belt

as low as

possible

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when

driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the

belt as low as possible across the hips.

■Advice for Pregnant Women

1Advice for Pregnant Women

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is

okay for you to drive.

To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your

unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front

airbag:

•When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far

back as possible while allowing full control of the

vehicle.

•When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust

the seat as far back as possible.

Wear the shoulder belt

across the chest avoiding

the abdomen.

Wear the lap part of the

belt as low as possible

across the hips.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection

Seat Belt Inspection

Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:

•Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.

•Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily.

uIf a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only

use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make

sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.

Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper

protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.

A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of

protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after

any collision.

1Seat Belt Inspection

WARNING

Not checking or maintaining seat belts can

result in serious injury or death if the seat

belts do not work properly when needed.

Check your seat belts regularly and have

any problem corrected as soon as possible.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

Continued

Airbags

Airbag System Components

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

The front, front side, and side curtain

airbags are deployed according to the

direction and severity of impact. Both side

curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover.

The airbag system includes:

Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

front airbags. The driver's airbag is stored

in the center of the steering wheel; the

front passenger's airbag is stored in the

dashboard. Both are marked SRS

AIRBAG.

Two side airbags, one for the driver and

one for a front passenger. The airbags are

stored in the outer edges of the seat-

backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

Two side curtain airbags, one for each

side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored

in the ceiling, above the side windows.

The front and rear pillars are marked

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.

An electronic control unit that continually

monitors and records information about

the sensors, the airbag activators, the

seat belt tensioners, and driver and front

passenger seat belt use when the ignition

switch is in ON (w

Automatic front seat belt tensioners. The

driver's and front passenger's seat belts

incorporate sensors that detect whether

or not they are fastened.

A driver's seat position sensor. If the seat

is too far forward, the airbag will inflate

with less force.

Weight sensors in the front passenger's

seat. The front passenger's airbag will be

turned off if the weight on the seat is 65

lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant

or small child).

Impact sensors that can detect a

moderate-to-severe front or side

collision.

An indicator on the dashboard that alerts

you that the front passenger's front

airbag has been turned off.

An indicator on the instrument panel that

alerts you to a possible problem with your

airbag system or seat belt tensioners.

Safing Sensor

A rollover sensor that detects whether

the vehicle is about to roll over.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP

button instead of an ignition switch.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with

tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,

and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing

their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.

What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as

far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the

vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as

possible.

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that

can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags

deploy.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.

Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp

object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.

Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the

covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags

or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

■Important facts about your airbags

1Important facts about your airbags

Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,

airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.

When driving, keep hands and arms out of the

deployment path of the front airbag by holding each

side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over

the airbag cover.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags

Types of Airbags

Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:

•Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats.

•Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's seat-backs.

•Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.

Each is discussed in the following pages.

Front Airbags (SRS)

The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect

the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to

supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary

restraint system.

The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and

in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

■Housing Locations

1Types of Airbags

The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch

is in ON (w

After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see what

looks like smoke. Although the powder is not

harmful, people with respiratory problems may

experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs,

get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

1Front Airbags (SRS)

Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags

(SRS)

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiple-

threshold front airbags (SRS).

During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or

both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate

at different rates, depending on the severity of the

crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/

or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to

supplement the seat belts to help reduce the

likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal

crashes.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

Continued

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.

When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control

unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.

A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a

vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

While your seat belt restrains your torso, the

front airbag provides supplemental protection

for your head and chest.

The front airbags deflate immediately so that

they won't interfere with the driver's visibility

or the ability to steer or operate other

controls.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not

aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

■Operation

■How the Front Airbags Work

1How the Front Airbags Work

Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags

normally inflate within a split second of each other, it

is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can

happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,

or threshold, that determines whether or not the

airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will

provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental

protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■When front airbags should not deploy

Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and

help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur

during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.

Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration

causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side

airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the

severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which

can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.

Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear

impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed

to deploy in such collisions.

Rollovers: Seat belts and, in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags

and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags

could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a

rollover.

■When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage

Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the

vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.

Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object

that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is

underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.

■When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage

appears severe

Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of

visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some

collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags

would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they

had deployed.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag

related injuries to smaller occupants.

The driver's advanced front airbag system

includes a seat position sensor.

If the seat is too far forward, the airbag

inflates with less force, regardless of the

severity of the impact.

The passenger's advanced front airbag system

has weight sensors.

Although we recommend against carrying an

infant or small child in front, if the sensors

detect the weight of a child (up to about 65

lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically

turn off the passenger's front airbag.

■Advanced Airbags

1Advanced Airbags

If there is a problem with the driver's seat position

sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag

will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the

driver's seating position.

For both advanced front airbags to work properly:

•Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.

•Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.

•Make sure any objects are positioned properly on

the floor. Improperly positioned objects can

interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.

•All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat

belts properly.

•Do not place any cover over the passenger side

dashboard.

Make sure the floor mat behind the front passenger’s

seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor. An improperly

placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag

sensors.

2Floor Mats P. 499

Driver’s

Seat

Position

Sensor

Passenger’s

Seat

Weight

Sensors

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Side Airbags

The side airbags help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front passenger

during a moderate-to-severe side impact.

The side airbags are housed in the outside

edge of the driver's and passenger's seat-

backs.

Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

When the sensors detect a moderate-to-

severe side impact, the control unit signals the

side airbag on the impact side to immediately

inflate.

■Housing Locations

1Side Airbags

Make sure you and your front seat passenger always

sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can

prevent the airbag from deploying properly and

increases your risk of serious injury.

Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.

They can interfere with the proper operation of the

airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.

If the impact is on the passenger side, the airbag

deploys even if there is no passenger in the passenger

seat.

Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers

without consulting a dealer.

Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back

covers can prevent your side airbags from properly

deploying during a side impact.

Housing

Location

■Operation

When

inflated

Side

Airbag

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

■When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage

Because the airbag systems senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side

of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there

may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough

impact to deploy the airbag.

■When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears

severe

It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in

apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards

the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts

absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have

been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

Side Curtain Airbags

The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer

seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags

equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and

complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly

rollover crashes.

The side curtain airbags are located in the

ceiling above the side windows on both sides

of the vehicle.

The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy

in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side

impact.

■Housing Locations

1Side Curtain Airbags

If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is

about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side

curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt

tensioners.

If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the

passenger’s side curtain airbag will inflate even if

there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from the side curtain

airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts

properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.

Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof

pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation

of the side curtain airbags.

Side Curtain Airbag Storage

■Operation

Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

Continued

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

■When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision

One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal

collision.

In this case, the side curtain airbags will deploy slightly after the front airbags.

Airbag System Indicators

If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on.

■When the ignition switch is turned to

ON (w

The indicator comes on for a few seconds,

then goes off. This tells you the system is

working properly.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the

system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don't, your airbags and seat

belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.

■SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator

1SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator

WARNING

Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in

serious injury or death if the airbag systems

or tensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as

soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts

you to a possible problem.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

■When the passenger airbag off

indicator comes on

The indicator comes on to alert you that the

passenger's front airbag has been turned off.

This occurs when the front passenger’s weight

sensors detect 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the

weight of an infant or small child, on the seat.

Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.

2Child Safety P. 50

Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.

If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger's front airbag will not deploy and

the indicator will not come on.

■Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and

no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult

riding there, something may be interfering with the

weight sensors. Such as:

•An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back

pocket.

•A child seat or other object pressing against the

rear of the seat-back.

•A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of

the front passenger's seat.

•The front seat or seat-back is forced back against

an object on the seat or floor behind it.

•An object placed under the front passenger's seat.

If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle

checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and

goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is

near the airbag cutoff threshold.

U.S. Canada

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care

Airbag Care

You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any

airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle

inspected by a dealer in the following situations:

■When the airbags have deployed

If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.

Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be

replaced.

■When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision

Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s

seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt

tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.

■Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer

This would likely disable the driver's seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the

passenger's seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate

a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American

Honda Automobile Customer Service at 800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles,

Honda Canada Customer Relations at 888-9-HONDA-9.

1Airbag Care

We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag

system components, including the airbag, tensioners,

sensors, and control unit.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

Child Safety

Protecting Child Passengers

Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are

either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the

number one cause of death of children age 12 and under.

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province

and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride

in a vehicle.

Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:

•An inflating front or side airbag can injure

or kill a child sitting in the front seat.

•A child in the front seat is more likely to

interfere with the driver's ability to safely

control the vehicle.

•Statistics show that children of all sizes and

ages are safer when they are properly

restrained in a rear seat.

1Protecting Child Passengers

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration and Transport Canada recommend

that all children age 12 and under be properly

restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/

territories have laws restricting where children may

ride.

WARNING

Children who are unrestrained or

improperly restrained can be seriously

injured or killed in a crash.

Any child too small for a seat belt should be

properly restrained in a child seat. A larger

child should be properly restrained with a

seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers

•Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an

approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt

portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.

•Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the

event of a collision.

•Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would

likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.

•Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very

seriously injured in a crash.

•Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.

•Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when

the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate

vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.

1Protecting Child Passengers

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle

and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

To remind you of the passenger's front airbag

hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning

labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the

front visors. Please read and follow the instructions

on these labels.

2Safety Labels P. 63

WARNING

Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or

wrap one around their neck can result in

serious injury or death.

Instruct children not to play with any seat

belt and make sure any unused seat belt a

child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,

and locked.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safety of Infants and Small Children

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the

infant reaches the seat maker's weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is

at least one year old.

■Positioning a rear-facing child seat

Child seats must be placed and secured in a

rear seating position.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front

passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back

in the desired position.

It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front airbag

system.

2Airbags P. 37

If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front

passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.

Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

■Protecting Infants

1Protecting Infants

Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a

forward facing position.

Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s

instructions before installation.

WARNING

Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front

seat can result in serious injury or death

during a crash.

Always place a rear-facing child seat in the

rear seat, not the front.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

Continued

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child

seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured

forward-facing child seat.

■Forward-facing child seat placement

We strongly recommend placing a forward-

facing child seat in a rear seating position.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with

advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A

rear seat is the safest place for a child.

■Protecting Smaller Children

1Protecting Smaller Children

Educate yourself about the laws and regulations

regarding child seat use where you are driving, and

follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat

up to age two, if the child’s height and weight are

appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

WARNING

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the

front seat can result in serious injury or

death if the front airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child

seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far

back as possible, and properly restrain the

child.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).

Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both

are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be

installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat

manufacturer's use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual.

Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible

child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.

This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured

with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat

manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat

once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual

for proper installation instructions.

■Important consideration when selecting a child seat

Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:

•The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.

•The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.

•The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

■Selecting a Child Seat

1Selecting a Child Seat

Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is

simple.

LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed

to simplify the installation process and reduce the

likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Continued

A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats.

A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of

connectors.

1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.

2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then

attach the child seat to the lower anchors

according to the instructions that came

with the child seat.

uWhen installing the child seat, make sure

that the lower anchors are not

obstructed by the seat belt or any other

object.

■Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

Marks

Rigid Type

Lower Anchors

Flexible Type

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

3. Open the tether anchor cover behind the

head restraint.

4. Raise the head restraint to its highest

position, then route the tether strap

between the head restraint legs, and secure

the tether strap hook onto the anchor.

5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the

child seat maker.

6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by

rocking it forward and back and side to

side; little movement should be felt.

7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child

can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor

is activated, and the belt is fully retracted

and locked.

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

For your child's safety, when using a child seat

installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the

seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat

that is not properly secured will not adequately

protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the

child or other vehicle occupants.

Anchor

Tether Strap

Hook

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

Continued

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.

2. Route the seat belt through the child seat

according to the seat maker's instructions,

and insert the latch plate into the buckle.

uInsert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all

the way out until it stops. This activates the

lockable retractor.

4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into

the retractor, then try to pull it out to make

sure the retractor is locked.

uIf you are able to pull the shoulder belt

out, the lockable retractor is not

activated. Pull the seat belt all the way

out, and repeat steps 2 – 4.

5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near

the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack

from the lap part of the belt.

uWhen doing this, place your weight on

the child seat and push it into the vehicle

seat.

■Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

A child seat that is not properly secured will not

adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause

injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by

rocking it forward and back and side to

side; little movement should be felt.

7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child

can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor

is activated, and the belt is fully retracted

and locked.

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle

and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

A tether anchorage point is provided behind

each rear seating position. A child seat that is

installed with a seat belt and comes with a

tether can use the tether for additional

security.

1. Locate the appropriate tether anchorage

point and lift the cover.

2. Raise the head restraint to its highest

position, then route the tether strap

through the head restraint legs.

2. Remove the head restraint.

2Removing and Reinstalling the Head

Restraints P. 129

3. Secure the tether strap hook onto the

anchor.

uMake sure the strap is not twisted.

4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the

child seat manufacturer.

5. Reinstall the head restraint.

uMake sure to adjust the head restraint in

its highest position.

2Removing and Reinstalling the Head

Restraints P. 129

■Adding Security with a Tether

1Adding Security with a Tether

Since a tether can provide additional security to the

lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend

using a tether whenever one is available.

Tether Anchorage Points

Cover

Anchor

Outer Position Tether Strap

Hook

Anchor

Center Position Tether Strap

Hook

Anchor

Rear outer seating positions

Rear center seating position

All positions

Rear center seating position

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Safety of Larger Children

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind

of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who

must sit in front.

When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/

shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the

following questions.

■Checklist

•Do the child's knees bend comfortably over

the edge of the seat?

•Does the shoulder belt cross between the

child's neck and arm?

•Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as

possible, touching the child's thighs?

•Will the child be able to stay seated like this

for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder

seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a

booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

■Protecting Larger Children

■Checking Seat Belt Fit

1Safety of Larger Children

WARNING

Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in

front can result in injury or death if the

passenger's front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must ride in front, move the

vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,

have the child sit up properly and wear the

seat belt properly, using a booster seat if

needed.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used

properly, position the child in a booster seat in

a rear seating position. For the child's safety,

check that the child meets the booster seat

manufacturer's recommendations.

Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever

have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:

•Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information

in this manual.

•Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.

•Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.

•Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the

seat.

■Monitoring child passengers

We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more

mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up

properly.

■Booster Seats

1Booster Seats

When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the

instructions that came with it, and install the seat

accordingly.

There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a

booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat

belt correctly.

Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and

territories require children to use a booster seat until

they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60

lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or

province, or territory where you intend to drive.

■Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Carbon Monoxide Gas

The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,

odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon

monoxide gas will not get into the interior.

■Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever

•The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.

•The exhaust system may have been damaged.

•The vehicle is raised for an oil change.

When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into

the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open,

open both windows and set the climate control system as shown below.

1. Select the fresh air mode.

2. Select the mode.

3. Set the fan speed to high.

4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.

Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked

vehicle with the engine running.

1Carbon Monoxide Gas

An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up

with carbon monoxide gas.

Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.

Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the

garage immediately after starting the engine.

WARNING

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.

Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and

even kill you.

Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that

expose you to carbon monoxide.

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

Safety Labels

Label Locations

These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels

carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer

for a replacement.

Sun Visor

U.S. models Canadian models

Radiator Cap

Doorjambs

U.S. models

U.S. models only

Dashboard

Canadian models

2013 Accord Coupe

Safe Driving

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

2013 Accord Coupe

Home

QRG

Index

Instrument Panel

This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

Indicators ............................................ 66

Information Display Warning and

Information Messages...................... 77

Gauges and Displays

Gauges.............................................. 79

Information Display............................ 80

2013 Accord Coupe

Home

QRG

Index

Instrument Panel

Indicators

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Parking Brake

and Brake

System Indicator

(Red)

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the

ignition switch to ON (w

, then goes off.

●

Comes on when the parking brake is applied, and

goes off when it is released.

●

Comes on when the brake fluid level is low.

●

Comes on if there is a problem with the brake

system.

●

The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if

you drive with the parking brake not fully

released.

●

Comes on while driving - Make sure the

parking brake is released. Check the brake fluid

level.

2What to do when the indicator comes on

P. 522

●

Comes on along with the ABS indicator -

Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

2If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes

On P. 522

Brake System

Indicator

(Amber)

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the

ignition switch to ON (w

, then goes off.

●

Comes on if there is a problem with the brake

override system.

●

Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle

checked by a dealer.

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Low Oil Pressure

Indicator

●

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to

ON (w

, and goes off when the engine starts.

●

Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.

●

Comes on while driving - Immediately stop

in a safe place.

2If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes

On P. 520

Malfunction

Indicator Lamp

●

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to

ON (w

, and goes off either when the engine

starts or after several seconds if the engine is not

started. If “readiness codes” have not been set, it

blinks five times before it goes off.

●

Comes on if there is a problem with the emissions

control system.

●

Blinks when a misfire in the engine's cylinders is

detected.

●

Readiness codes are part of the on board

diagnostics for the emissions control systems.

2Testing of Readiness Codes P. 537

●

Comes on while driving - Have the vehicle

checked by a dealer.

●

Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place

where there are no flammable objects. Stop

the engine for 10 minutes or more, and wait

for it to cool down. Then, take the vehicle to a

dealer.

2If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes

On or Blinks P. 521

Charging System

Indicator

●

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to

ON (w

, and goes off when the engine starts.

●

Comes on when the battery is not charging.

●

Comes on while driving - Turn off the

climate control system and rear defogger in

order to reduce electricity consumption.

2If the Charging System Indicator Comes

On P. 520

2013 Accord Coupe

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Instrument Panel

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Shift Lever

Position

Indicator

●

Indicates in which position your shift lever is. 2Shifting P. 409

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

M (7-speed

manual shift

mode) Indicator/

Shift Indicator

●

Comes on when 7-speed manual shift mode is

applied. 27-Speed Manual Shift Mode P. 411

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

M (Sequential

shift mode)

Indicator/Gear

Position

Indicator

●

Comes on when manual sequential shift mode is

applied.

2Sequential Shift Mode P. 415

Automatic transmission (CVT) models

Automatic transmission models

2013 Accord Coupe

*Not available on all models

P. 413

Instrument Panel

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Transmission

Indicator

●

Blinks if the transmission system has a problem.

●

Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts

and acceleration and have the vehicle checked

by a dealer immediately.

Seat Belt

Reminder

Indicator

●

Comes on and the beeper sounds if you are not

wearing a seat belt when you turn the ignition

switch to ON (w

●

If the front passenger is not wearing a seat belt,

the indicator comes on about six seconds later.

●

Blinks while driving if either you or the front

passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The

beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at regular

intervals.

●

The beeper stops and the indicator goes off

when you and the front passenger fasten their

seat belts.

●

Stays on after you or the front passenger

has fastened the seat belt - A detection

error may have occurred in the sensor. Have

the vehicle checked by a dealer.

2Seat Belt Reminder P. 31

Low Fuel

Indicator

●

Comes on when the fuel reserve is running low

(approximately 2.6 U.S. gal./9.7 Liter left).

●

Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel gauge.

●

Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as

possible.

●

Blinks - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

ABS (Anti-lock

Brake System)

Indicator

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the

ignition switch to ON (w

, then goes off.

●

If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem

with the ABS.

●

Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle

checked by a dealer. With this indicator on,

your vehicle still has normal braking ability but

no anti-lock function.

2ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 441

2013 Accord Coupe

Instrument Panel

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

*Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Supplemental

Restraint System

Indicator

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the

ignition switch to ON (w

, then goes off.

●

Comes on if a problem with any of the following

is detected:

-Supplemental restraint system

-Side airbag system

-Side curtain airbag system

-Seat belt tensioner

●

Stays on constantly or does not come on at

all - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

VSA® (Vehicle

Stability Assist)

System Indicator

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the

ignition switch to ON (w

, then goes off.

●

Blinks when VSA® is active.

●

Comes on if there is a problem with the VSA®

system or hill start assist system.

●

Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle

checked by a dealer.

2VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) System

P. 431

VSA® (Vehicle

Stability Assist)

OFF Indicator

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the

ignition switch to ON (w

, then goes off.

●

Comes on when you deactivate VSA®.

2VSA® On and Off P. 432

Door and Trunk

Open Indicator

●

Comes on for a few seconds if you turn the

ignition switch to ON (w

, then goes off.

●

Comes on if either door or the trunk is not

completely closed.

●

The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if

either door or the trunk is opened while driving.

●

Goes off when both doors and the trunk are

closed.

2013 Accord Coupe

Instrument Panel

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

EPS (Electric

Power Steering)

System Indicator

●

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to

ON (w

, and goes off when the engine starts.

●

Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS

(Electric Power Steering) System.

●

Stays on constantly or does not come on at

all - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

2If the EPS System Indicator Comes On

P. 522

Low Tire

Pressure/TPMS

Indicator

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the

ignition switch to ON (w

●

May come on briefly if the ignition switch is

turned to ON (w

and the vehicle is not moved

within 45 seconds, to indicate the calibration

process is not yet complete.

●

Comes on and stays on when:

-One or more tires’ pressures are determined to

be significantly low.

-The system has not been calibrated.

●

Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe

place, check tire pressures, and inflate the

tire(s) if necessary.

●

Stays on after the tires are inflated to the

recommended pressures - The system needs

to be calibrated.

2TPMS Calibration P. 435

●

Blinks for about one minute, and then stays on if

there is a problem with the TPMS, or when a

compact spare tire is temporarily installed.

●

Blinks and remains on - Have the vehicle

checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is fitted with

a compact spare, get your regular tire repaired

or replaced and put back on your vehicle as

soon as you can.

Turn Signal and

Hazard Warning

Indicators

●

The turn signal indicators blink when you operate

the turn signal lever.

●

If you press the hazard warning button, both

indicators and all turn signals blink at the same

time.

●

Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A turn

signal light bulb has blown. Change the bulb

immediately.

2Replacing Light Bulbs P. 479

2013 Accord Coupe

Instrument Panel

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

P. 481

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

High Beam

Indicator

●

Comes on when the high beam headlights are on. —

Lights On

Indicator

●

Comes on whenever the light switch is on, or in

AUTO when the exterior lights are on.

●

If you remove the key from the ignition switch

while the exterior lights are on, a chime sounds

when the driver's door is opened.

Fog Light

Indicator

●

Comes on when the fog lights are on. —

Immobilizer

System Indicator

●

Comes on briefly when you turn the ignition

switch to ON (w

, then goes off.

●

Comes on if the immobilizer system cannot

recognize the key information.

●

Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Turn the

ignition switch to LOCK (0

, pull the key out,

and then insert the key and turn it to ON (w

again.

●

Repeatedly blinks - The system may be

malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by a

dealer.

●

Do not attempt to alter this system or add

other devices to it. Electrical problems can

occur.

Security System

Alarm Indicator

●

Blinks when the security system alarm has been

set. 2Security System Alarm P. 101

Indicator

2013 Accord Coupe

Instrument Panel

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

*Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Forward

Collision

Warning

(FCW)

Indicator

●

Comes on for a few seconds

when you change the power

mode to ON, then goes off.

●

Comes on when you have

customized FCW to turn off.

●

Comes on if there is a problem

with the FCW system.

●

Stays on constantly without FCW off - Have the vehicle

checked by a dealer.

●

Blinks when the system detects

a likely collision with a vehicle

in front of you. The beeper

sounds.

●

Blinks while driving - Take appropriate action to prevent

a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.). —

●

Comes on when the FCW

system shuts itself off.

●

Stays on - The temperature inside the FCW system is too high.

The system activates when the temperature inside the system

cools down.

2Automatic shutoff P. 426

●

Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud,

etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft

cloth.

●

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator and

message come back on after you cleaned the area around

the camera.

2Automatic shutoff P. 426

2Automatic shutoff P. 426 —

2013 Accord Coupe

Instrument Panel

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Lane Departure

Warning (LDW)

Indicator

●

Comes on for a few seconds when

you change the power mode to ON,

then goes off.

●

Comes on if there is a problem with

the LDW system.

●

Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle

checked by a dealer.

●

Blinks when your vehicle is too close

to the lane lines. The beeper sounds.

●

Blinks while driving - Take

appropriate action to keep your vehicle

within the lane lines.

—

●

Comes on when the LDW system

shuts itself off.

●

Stays on - The temperature inside the

LDW camera is too high.

The system activates when the

temperature inside the camera cools

down.

2LDW Camera P. 429

●

Stays on - The area around the camera

is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your

vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off

with a soft cloth.

●

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if

the indicator and message come back

on after you cleaned the area around

the camera.

2LDW Camera P. 429

2013 Accord Coupe

Instrument Panel

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

ECON Mode

Indicator

●

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to

ON (w

, and goes off when the engine starts.

●

Comes on when you press the ECON button.

2ECON Button P. 420

CRUISE MAIN

Indicator

●

Comes on when you press the CRUISE button. 2Cruise Control P. 421

CRUISE

CONTROL

Indicator

●

Comes on if you have set a speed for cruise

control. 2Cruise Control P. 421

Washer Level

Indicator

●

Comes on when the washer fluid gets low.

●

Refill the washer fluid.

2Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 474

Maintenance

Minder Indicator

●

Comes on when the scheduled maintenance is

due soon. 2Maintenance Minder

P. 455

Smart Entry

System

Indicator

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you change

the power mode to ON.

●

Comes on as soon as a problem is detected in the

smart entry system or push button starting

system.

●

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

2013 Accord Coupe

*Not available on all models

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Instrument Panel

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Starter System

Indicator

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you set the

power mode to ON, then goes off.

●

Comes on if the starting system has a problem.

●

As a temporary measure, press and hold the

ENGINE START/STOP button for 15 seconds

while pressing the brake pedal and manually

start the engine. Have the vehicle checked by a

dealer.

Light Control

Indicator

●

Comes on if there is a problem with the automatic

lighting control system or low beam headlights

●

Comes on while driving - Turn the lights on

manually and have the vehicle checked by a

dealer.

U.S.

Canada

2013 Accord Coupe

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

*Not available on all models

Instrument Panel

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages

Continued

Information Display Warning and Information Messages

The following messages appear only on the information display.

Message Condition Explanation

●

Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not

installed. 2Check Fuel Cap Message P. 521

●

Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on

the battery.

●

Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a

dealer.

2013 Accord Coupe

Instrument Panel

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

●

Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP button

to turn the engine off without the shift lever in (P.

●

Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice after

moving the shift lever to (P.

●

Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY. —

●

Appears when the steering wheel is locked.

●

Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing

the ENGINE START/STOP button at the same time.

●

Appears when you close the door with the power mode

in ON without the smart entry remote inside the vehicle.

●

Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote back

inside the vehicle and close the door.

●

Appears when the smart entry remote’s battery

becomes weak.

●

Replace the battery as soon as possible.

2Replacing the Button Battery P. 495

Models with smart entry system

2013 Accord Coupe

Instrument Panel

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

Gauges and Displays

Gauges

Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators.

They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w

Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).

Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.

Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.

Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.

■Speedometer

■Tachometer

■Fuel Gauge

■Temperature Gauge

1Fuel Gauge

NOTICE

You should refuel when the reading approaches .

Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,

damaging the catalytic converter.

The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from

the fuel gauge reading.

1Temperature Gauge

NOTICE

Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the

upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull

safely to the side of the road and allow engine

temperature to return to normal.

2Overheating P. 518

2013 Accord Coupe

Instrument Panel

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

uuGauges and Displays uInformation Display

Information Display

The information display shows the odometer, trip meter, engine oil life and

maintenance service item codes, and other gauges.

Press the (Select/Reset) knob to change the display.

■Switching the Display

1Switching the Display

Each time you press the knob, the information

display changes as follows:

Some of the items on the information display also

appear on the audio/information screen. They also

change along with the information display changes

while the fuel consumption is shown.

Instant Fuel Economy,

Odometer, Trip Meter A,

Outside Temperature

Instant Fuel Economy,

Range, Trip Meter A,

Outside Temperature

Engine Oil Life

Instant Fuel Economy, Average

Fuel Economy A, Trip Meter A,

Outside Temperature

Instant Fuel Economy, Average

Fuel Economy B, Trip Meter B,

Outside Temperature

Select/Reset

Knob

2013 Accord Coupe

Instrument Panel

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

Continued

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display

Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has

accumulated.

Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last

reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

■Resetting a trip meter

To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the knob. The trip meter is

reset to 0.0.

Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100

km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the

average fuel economy is also reset.

Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).

Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance Minder

2Maintenance Minder

P. 455

■Odometer

■Trip Meter

■Average Fuel Economy

■Instant Fuel Economy

■Engine Oil Life

1Trip Meter

Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by

pressing the knob.

1Average Fuel Economy

You can change when to reset the average fuel

economy.

2Customized Features P. 273

2013 Accord Coupe

Instrument Panel

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuGauges and Displays uInformation Display

Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

■Adjusting the outside temperature indicator

Adjust the temperature reading up to ± 5°F or ± 3°C if the temperature reading

seems incorrect.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w

2. Press and hold the (Select/Reset) knob for 10 seconds or more while the

outside temperature is shown on the information display.

uThe information display goes into temperature adjustment mode. The display

starts showing from -5°F to +5°F (U.S.) or -3°C to +3°C (Canada).

3. Release the knob when the right adjustment amount is shown.

uThe adjustment is complete.

Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is

estimated from the fuel economy of your trips in the past.

■Outside Temperature

■Range

1Outside Temperature

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.

Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can

affect the temperature reading when your vehicle

speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).

It may take several minutes for the display to be

updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.

1Adjusting the outside temperature indicator

Adjust the temperature reading up to ± 5°F or ± 3°C.

2013 Accord Coupe

Instrument Panel

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Controls

This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Setting the Clock ................................ 84

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Key Types and Functions .................... 86

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal

Strength

......................................88

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Inside ............................................... 94

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ............ 96

Opening and Closing the Trunk......... 97

Security System

Immobilizer System .......................... 101

Security System Alarm...................... 101

Opening and Closing the Windows..... 104

Opening and Closing the Moonroof

.. 107

Operating the Switches Around the

Steering Wheel

Ignition Switch

............................... 108

ENGINE START/STOP Button

........... 109

Ignition Switch and Power Mode

Comparison ................................... 112

Turn Signals..................................... 113

Light Switches.................................. 113

Fog Lights

...................................... 115

Daytime Running Lights ................... 116

Wipers and Washers ........................ 117

Brightness Control ........................... 118

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror

Button ........................................... 119

Driving Position Memory System

.... 120

Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 122

Adjusting the Mirrors

Interior Rearview Mirror................... 123

Power Door Mirrors ......................... 124

Adjusting the Seats .......................... 125

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience

Items ................................................ 133

Climate Control System

Using Automatic Climate Control .... 142

Synchronized Mode ......................... 144

Automatic Climate Control Sensors... 145

2013 Accord Coupe

Home

QRG

Index

*Not available on all models

Controls

Setting the Clock

Clock

You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch is in ON (w

■Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

1. Press and hold the DISP button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Clock,

then Clock Adjustment.

3. Rotate to change hour, then press .

4. Rotate to change minute, then press .

■Adjusting the Time

1Clock

The clock is automatically updated through the

navigation system, so the time does not need to be

adjusted.

These indications are used to show how to operate

the selector knob.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

You can customize the clock display to show the 12

hour clock or 24 hour clock.

2Customized Features P. 273

You can turn the clock display on and off.

2Customized Features P. 273

Models with navigation system

Models without navigation system

Models with one display

Models with two displays

All models

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

uuSetting the ClockuClock

■Using the SETTINGS button

1. Press and hold the CLOCK (SETTINGS)

button until the clock display blinks.

2. Press Preset (4 (Hour) or (5 (Minute) to

adjust the time.

3. Press the CLOCK button again to set the

time.

■Using the audio with touch screen

1. Select .

2. Select Clock.

3. Adjust the hours and minutes by selecting

4. Select 12H or 24H.

5. Press Set to set the time.

1Using the SETTINGS button

To set the time to the nearest hour: Press and hold

the CLOCK button until the clock display blinks, then

press the (6 (Reset) button.

Depending on the displayed time, the clock sets

forward or backward.

Example:

1:06 will reset to 1:00

1:53 will reset to 2:00

Models with one display

CLOCK (SETTINGS)

Button

(6 (Reset) Button

(4 (Hour) Button

(5 (Minute) Button

Models with two displays

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Key Types and Functions

This vehicle comes with the following key:

Use the keys to start and stop the engine, to

lock and unlock the doors and to open the

trunk. You can also use the remote

transmitter or smart entry system

to lock and

unlock the doors and to open the trunk.

There is a panic button in the remote

transmitter.

■Smart entry remote

The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the

doors when the smart entry remote battery

becomes weak and the power door lock/

unlock operation is disabled.

To remove the built-in key, pull it out while

sliding the release knob. To reinstall the built-

in key, push the built-in key into the smart

entry remote until it clicks.

■Master Keys

1Key Types and Functions

All the keys have an immobilizer system. The

immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle

theft.

2Immobilizer System P. 101

The keys contain precision electronics.

Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to

the electronics:

•Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in

locations with high temperature or high humidity.

•Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.

•Keep the keys away from liquids.

•Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the

battery.

If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine

may not start, and the remote transmitter may not

work.

If the keys do not work properly, have them

inspected by a dealer.

Master Key

Smart Entry

Remote

Built-in Key

Release Knob

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions

Can be used to start and stop the engine, and

lock and unlock driver's door.

Contains a number that you will need if you

purchase a replacement key.

■Valet Key

1Valet Key

When you need to leave a key with a third party,

leave the valet key.

Gray

■Key Number Tag

1Key Number Tag

Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a

safe place outside of your vehicle.

If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a

dealer.

If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,

contact a dealer.

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength

The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/

unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or to start the engine.

In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or starting

the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:

•Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.

•You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications

equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.

•A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote.

1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength

Communication between the smart entry remote and

the vehicle consumes the smart entry remote’s

battery.

Battery life is about two years, but this varies

depending on regularity of use.

The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry

remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing

it near electrical appliances such as televisions and

personal computers.

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Continued

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■Locking the doors

Press the lock button.

Once:

uSome exterior lights flash, both doors

lock, and the security system sets.

Twice (within five seconds after the first

push):

uThe beeper sounds and verifies the

security system is set.

■Using the Remote Transmitter

1Using the Remote Transmitter

If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of

unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,

the doors will automatically relock.

You can change the relock timer setting.

2Customized Features P. 273

If the interior light switch is in the door activated

position, the interior lights come on when you press

the unlock button.

No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30

seconds.

Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off

immediately.

2Interior Lights P. 133

The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so

the operating range may vary depending on the

surroundings.

The remote transmitter will not work when the key is

in the ignition switch.

You can lock or unlock doors using the remote

transmitter or smart entry system only when the

power mode in VEHICLE OFF.

The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is

open.

Models without smart entry system

Models with smart entry system

All models

LED

Unlock Button

Lock Button

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■Unlocking the doors

Press the unlock button.

Once:

uSome exterior lights flash twice, and the driver's door unlocks.

Twice:

uThe passenger’s door unlocks.

1Using the Remote Transmitter

If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is

probably low.

If the LED does not come on when you press a

button, the battery is dead.

2Replacing the Button Battery P. 495

You can customize the door unlock mode setting.

2Customized Features P. 273

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

Continued

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

When you carry the smart entry remote, you

can lock/unlock the doors and open the trunk.

You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius

of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door

handle. You can open the trunk within about

32 inches (80 cm) radius from the trunk

release button.

■Locking the doors and the trunk

Press the door lock button on either door.

uSome exterior lights flash; the beeper

sounds; both doors and the trunk lock;

and the security system sets.

■Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System

Door Lock Button

1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System

•Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle

when you get out. Carry it with you.

•A person who is not carrying the smart entry

remote can lock/unlock the doors if a person who

is carrying it is within range.

•The door may be unlocked if the door handle is

covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if

the smart entry remote is within range.

•If you grip either door handle wearing gloves, the

door sensor may be slow to respond or may not

respond by unlocking the doors.

•You cannot unlock the door by gripping the handle

after two seconds of locking it.

•The door might not open if you pull it immediately

after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle

again and confirm that the door is unlocked before

pulling the handle.

If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is

probably low.

If the LED does not come on when you press a

button, the battery is dead.

2Replacing the Button Battery P. 495

You can customize the door lock mode and keyless

lock acknowledgement setting.

2Customized Features P. 273

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■Unlocking the doors and the trunk

Grab the driver’s door handle:

uThe driver’s door unlocks.

uSome exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds twice.

Grab the passenger’s door handle:

uBoth doors and the trunk unlock.

uSome exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds twice.

Press the trunk release button:

uThe trunk unlocks and opens.

2Using the Trunk Release Button

P. 98

Trunk Release Button

1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System

•Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may

not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the smart

entry remote if it is above or below the outside

handle.

•The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too

close to the door and door glass.

If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of

unlocking the vehicle, the doors will automatically

relock.

The light flash, beep and unlock settings can be

customized.

2Customized Features P. 273

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Fully insert the key and turn it.

■Locking the driver's door

Push the lock tab forward

or push the

master door lock switch in the lock direction

, and close the door.

■Locking the passenger's door

Push the lock tab forward and close the door.

■Lockout prevention system

The doors cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch

, or the smart entry

remote is inside the vehicle.

■Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

When you lock the driver's door with a key, the

passenger’s door locks at the same time. When

unlocking, the driver's door unlocks first. Turn the

key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the

passenger’s door.

You can customize the door unlock mode setting.

2Customized Features P. 273

Lock

Unlock

■Locking a Door Without Using a Key

1Locking a Door Without Using a Key

When you lock the driver's door, the passenger’s

door locks at the same time.

Make sure you have the key in your hand before

locking the door to prevent it from being locked in

the vehicle.

2013 Accord Coupe

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

■Locking a door

Push the lock tab forward.

■Unlocking a door

Pull the lock tab rearward.

■Using the Lock Tab

1Using the Lock Tab

When you lock the door using the lock tab on the

driver's door, the passenger’s door locks at the same

time.

When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the

driver's door, only the driver's door will unlock.

To Unlock

Lock Tab

To Lock

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

Continued

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Pull the inner handle.

uThe door unlocks and opens in one

motion.

Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks both doors.

To avoid both doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock,

then lock again before opening the door.

uThis setting works for one time only. If you do not want both doors to be

unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to Off using

the audio/information screen.

■Unlocking Using the Inner Handle

1Unlocking Using the Inner Handle

The inner handles are designed to allow front seat

occupants to open the door in one motion. However

this feature requires that front seat occupants never

pull an inner handle while the vehicle is in motion.

Inner Handle

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking

Press the master door lock switch in as shown

to lock or unlock both doors.

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

Your vehicle locks and unlocks both doors automatically when a certain condition is

met.

■Drive lock mode

Both doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

■Driver’s door open mode

Both doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened.

■Using the Master Door Lock Switch

1Using the Master Door Lock Switch

When you lock/unlock the driver's door using the

master lock switch, the passenger’s door locks/

unlocks at the same time.

To Unlock

Master Door

Lock Switch

To Lock

■Auto Door Locking

■Auto Door Unlocking

1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

You can turn off or change to another auto door

locking/unlocking setting using the audio/

information screen.

2Customized Features P. 273

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

Continued

Opening and Closing the Trunk

Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk

■Opening the trunk

Open the trunk all the way.

uIf it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.

■Closing the trunk

Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to:

uAvoid possible damage.

uPrevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.

2Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 62

Using the Trunk Opener

Pulling the trunk release to the lower left of

the driver's seat unlocks and opens the trunk.

Trunk

Release

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Trunk Release Button

■Locking the trunk opener

You can lock the trunk release with the master

key

or the built-in key

Using the Trunk Release Button

Press the release button on the trunk lid after

the doors are unlocked.

Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the

trunk if you carry the smart entry remote.

uThe beeper will sound.

1Locking the trunk opener

If you need to give the key to someone else, give

them the valet key.

Models without smart entry system

1Using the Trunk Release Button

•Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle

when you get out. Carry it with you.

•A person who is not carrying the smart entry

remote can unlock the trunk if a person who is

carrying it is within range.

•Do not leave the smart entry remote inside the

trunk and close the lid. The beeper sounds and the

trunk cannot be closed.

•Do not carry the smart entry remote near the trunk

lid when closing it.

•Do not place the smart entry remote around the

rear seat when closing the trunk.

Trunk Release Button

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*Not available on all models

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Remote Transmitter

Using the Remote Transmitter

Press the trunk release button for

approximately one second to unlock and open

the trunk.

Trunk Main Switch

The trunk main switch disables the trunk

release button on the remote transmitter and

the trunk release button on the trunk lid to

protect luggage in the trunk.

1. Make sure the rear seat-back is not folded

down.

2. Turn off the trunk main switch in the glove

box.

3. Lock the glove box.

4. Lock the trunk release.

2Using the Trunk Opener P. 97

Trunk Button

1Trunk Main Switch

If you need to give the key to someone else, remove

the built-in key from the smart entry remote by

sliding the release knob, and give the remote as a

valet key.

OFF

Main Switch

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*Not available on all models

100

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuEmergency Trunk Opener

Emergency Trunk Opener

The trunk release lever allows you to open the

trunk from inside for your safety.

Slide the release lever in the direction of the

arrow.

1Emergency Trunk Opener

Parents should decide if their children should be

shown how to use this feature.

Lever

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

101

Continued

Security System

Immobilizer System

The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from

starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic

signals to verify the key.

Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch or

pressing the ENGINE START STOP button:

•Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch or the

ENGINE START STOP button.

•Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.

•Do not bring a key from another vehicle's immobilizer system near the ignition

switch.

Security System Alarm

The security system alarm activates when the doors, trunk, or hood are opened

without the key, remote transmitter, or smart entry system.

■When the security system alarm activates

The horn sounds intermittently and all of the exterior lights flash.

■To deactivate the security system alarm

Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter or smart entry remote. The

system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.

1Immobilizer System

NOTICE

Leaving the ignition key in the vehicle can result in

theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.

Always take the ignition key with you whenever you

leave the vehicle unattended.

Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.

Doing so may damage the system and make your

vehicle inoperable.

1Security System Alarm

The security alarm continues for a maximum of two

minutes until the security system deactivates.

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

102

■Setting the security system alarm

The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have

been met:

•The ignition switch is in LOCK (0

, and the key has been removed from the

ignition switch.

•The hood and trunk are closed.

•Both doors are locked from outside with the key, the remote transmitter, or smart

entry system.

■When the security system alarm sets

The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the

blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system is set.

■To cancel the security system alarm

The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the key,

remote transmitter, smart entry system or the ignition switch is turned to ON (w

The security system indicator goes off at the same time.

1Security System Alarm

Do not set the security system alarm when someone

is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can

accidentally activate when:

•Unlocking the door with the lock tab.

•Opening the trunk with the trunk release or the

emergency trunk opener.

If the battery goes dead after you have set the

security system alarm, the security alarm may go off

once the battery is recharged or replaced.

If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by

unlocking a door using the key or remote transmitter.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add another

device to it.

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

103

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

■The panic button on the remote

transmitter

If you press the panic button for

approximately one second, the following will

occur for about 30 seconds:

•The horn sounds.

•Some exterior lights flash.

■Canceling panic mode

Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w

■Panic Mode

Panic Button

2013 Accord Coupe

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

104

Opening and Closing the Windows

Opening/Closing the Power Windows

The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON

, using the switches on the doors. The driver's side switches can be used to

open and close both windows.

The power window lock button on the driver's side must be switched off (not

pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the passenger’s window from the

passenger's side.

When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you

can only operate the driver's window. Turn the power window lock button on when

children are in the vehicle.

■Automatic operation

To open: Push the switch down firmly.

To close: Pull the switch up firmly.

The window opens or closes completely. To

stop the window at any time, push or pull the

switch briefly.

■Manual operation

To open: Push the switch down lightly.

To close: Pull the switch up lightly.

Release the switch when the window reaches

the desired position.

■Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function

1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

The power windows can be operated for up to 10

minutes after you turn the ignition switch to LOCK

Opening either door cancels this function.

Auto Reverse

If a power window senses resistance when closing

automatically, it will stop closing and reverse

direction.

The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled

when you continuously pull up the switch.

The auto reverse function stops sensing when the

window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.

WARNING

Closing a power window on someone's

hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers are away from

the windows before closing them.

Off

Power Window

Lock Button

Indicator

Driver’s

Window

Switch

Passenger’s

Window Switch

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

105

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

Continued

To open: Push the switch down.

To close: Pull the switch up.

Release the switch when the window reaches

the desired position.

To open: Press the unlock button twice

within 10 seconds and hold it down for the

second time. If the windows stop midway,

repeat the procedure.

■

Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function

Open

■

Opening Windows and Moonroof with the Remote

Unlock

Button

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*Not available on all models

106

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the

key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to

the central position, turn the key in the unlock

direction and hold it there.

To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.

Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the

central position, turn the key in the lock

direction and hold it there.

Release the key to stop the windows/

moonroof at the desired position. If you want

further adjustment, repeat the same

operation.

■

Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof with the Key

Open

2013 Accord Coupe

*Not available on all models

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

107

Opening and Closing the Moonroof

You can only operate the moonroof when the ignition switch is in ON (w

. Use the

switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.

■Automatic operation

To open: Pull the switch back firmly, then

release.

To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then

release.

The moonroof will automatically open or close

all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,

touch the switch briefly.

■Manual operation

To open: Pull the switch back, and hold it

until the desired position is reached.

To close: Push the switch forward, and hold it

until the desired position is reached.

■Tilting the moonroof up

To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof

switch.

To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then

release.

■Opening/Closing the Moonroof

1Opening/Closing the Moonroof

NOTICE

Opening the moonroof in below freezing

temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice

can damage the moonroof panel or motor.

The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10

minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.

Opening either door cancels this function.

When resistance is detected, the auto reverse

function causes the moonroof to change directions,

then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the

moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully

closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,

are clear of the moonroof.

WARNING

Opening or closing the moonroof on

someone's hands or fingers can cause

serious injury.

Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of

the moonroof before opening or closing it.

Open

Close Tilt

2013 Accord Coupe

*Not available on all models

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

108

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel

Ignition Switch

1Ignition Switch

You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is

in (P.

If you open the driver's door when the key is in LOCK

(0 or ACCESSORY (q, a warning buzzer will sound

to remind you to take the key out.

If the key won't turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY

(q, turn the key while moving the steering wheel left

and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing

the key to turn.

WARNING

Removing the key from the ignition switch

while driving locks the steering. This can

cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Remove the key from the ignition switch

only when parked.

Manual transmission models

Automatic transmission (CVT) models

All models

LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this

position.

(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and

other accessories in this position.

(w ON: This is the position when driving.

(e START: This position is for starting the engine.

The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of

the key.

2013 Accord Coupe

*Not available on all models

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

109

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel uENGINE START/STOP Button

Continued

ENGINE START/STOP Button

■Changing the Power Mode

1ENGINE START/STOP Button

ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range

You can start the engine when the smart entry

remote is inside the vehicle.

The engine may also run if the smart entry remote is

close to the door or window, even if it is outside the

vehicle.

ON mode:

Indicator in the button is off, if the engine is running.

If the smart entry remote battery is weak, the beeper

sounds.

2If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

P. 512

Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON

when you get out.

Operating Range

Automatic Transmission Manual Transmission

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)

Indicator in the button is off.

The steering wheel is locked. The

power to all electrical

components is turned off.

Press the button without the shift

lever in (P.

Shift to (P then press the button.

Press the button.

Without pressing

the clutch pedal

Without pressing

the brake pedal

ACCESSORY

Indicator in the button is on.

Indicator in the button blinks

(from ON to ACCESSORY).

Operate the audio system and

other accessories in this position.

Indicator in the button is on.

All electrical components can be

used.

Indicator Indicator

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*Not available on all models

110

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button

If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the shift lever in (P

and the

power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid the battery drain.

When in this mode:

The steering wheel does not lock.

You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry

system.

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

*1:

Automatic

transmission/CVT

models

■Automatic Power Off

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*Not available on all models

111

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel uENGINE START/STOP Button

If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning

buzzer sounds.

Warning buzzers may sound from inside or/

and outside the vehicle to remind you that the

smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the

buzzer continues even after the remote is put

back inside, place it to be within its

operational range.

■When the power mode is in ON

If the smart entry remote is taken out of the

vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed,

warning buzzers sound from both inside and

outside the vehicle. A warning message on

the information display notifies the driver

inside that the remote is out.

■When the power mode is in

ACCESSORY

If the smart entry remote is taken out of the

vehicle, and both doors are closed, a warning

buzzer sounds from outside the vehicle.

■Power Mode Reminder

■Smart Entry Remote Reminder

1Smart Entry Remote Reminder

When the smart entry remote is within the system’s

operational range, and the driver’s door is closed, the

warning function cancels.

If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle

after the engine has been started, you can no longer

change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or

restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is

in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE

START/STOP button.

Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle

through a window does not activate the warning

buzzer.

Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard

or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer

to go off. Under some other conditions that can

prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the

warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is

within the system’s operational range.

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*Not available on all models

112

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluIgnition Switch and Power Mode Comparison

Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison

Ignition Switch

Position

LOCK (0)

(with/without

the key)

ACCESSORY (I) ON (II) START (III)

Without Smart Entry

System

●

Engine is turned off and

power is shut down.

●

The steering wheel is

locked.

●

No electrical

components can be

used.

●

Engine is turned off.

●

Some electrical

components such as the

audio system and the

accessory power socket

can be operated.

●

Normal key position

while driving.

●

All electrical components

can be used.

●

Use this position to start

the engine.

●

The ignition switch

returns to the ON (II)

position when you

release the key.

Power Mode VEHICLE OFF

(LOCK)

ACCESSORY ON START

With Smart Entry

System and ENGINE

START/ STOP

Button

Indicator-Off

●

Engine is turned off and

power is shut down.

●

The steering wheel is

locked.

●

No electrical

components can be

used.

Indicator-On or blinking

●

Engine is turned off.

●

Some electrical

components such as the

audio system and the

accessory power socket

can be operated.

Indicator-

On (engine is turned off)

Off (engine is running)

●

All electrical components

can be used.

Indicator-Off

●

The mode automatically

returns to ON after the

engine starts.

Indicator is: On Off

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

113

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel uTurn Signals

Continued

Turn Signals

The turn signals can be used when the ignition

switch is in ON (w

■One-touch turn signal

When you lightly push up or down and release

the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals

and turn signal indicator blink three times.

This feature can be used when signaling for a

lane change.

Light Switches

Rotating the light switch turns the lights on

and off, regardless of the position of the

ignition switch

■High beams

Push the lever forward until you hear a click.

■Low beams

When in high beams, pull the lever back to

return to low beams.

■Flashing the high beams

Pull the lever back, and release it.

Right Turn

Left Turn

■Manual Operation

1Light Switches

If you remove the key from the ignition switch while

the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s

door is opened.

When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the

instrument panel will be on.

2Lights On Indicator P. 72

If you sense that the level of the headlights is

abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off

because it will cause the battery to discharge.

High Beams

Flashing the high beams

Low Beams

Turns on parking, side marker,

tail, and rear license plate lights

Turns on headlights, parking, side

marker, tail, and rear license plate

lights

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

114

Automatic lighting control can be used when

the ignition switch is in ON (w

When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the

headlights and other exterior lights will switch

on and off automatically depending on the

ambient brightness.

uYou can change the auto light sensitivity

setting.

2Customized Features P. 273

■Automatic Lighting Control

1Automatic Lighting Control

We recommend that you turn on the lights manually

when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas

such as long tunnels or parking facilities.

The light sensor is in the location shown below.

Do not cover this light sensor with anything;

otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not

work properly.

Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:

Setting The exterior lights come on

when the ambient light is at

MAX

HIGH

MID

LOW

MIN

Light Sensor

Bright

Dark

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

115

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights

The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within

a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.

The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.

The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off

within 15 seconds after you remove the key

and close the driver's door.

uYou can change the headlight auto off timer setting.

2Customized Features P. 273

If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0

with the headlight switch on, but do

not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the switch

is in the AUTO position).

The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver's door. If you unlock

the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the

driver's door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.

Fog Lights

When the low beam headlights are on, turn

the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.

■Headlight Integration with Wiper

■Automatic Lighting Off Feature

1Headlight Integration with Wiper

This feature activates while the headlights are off in

AUTO.

The instrument panel brightness does not change

when the headlights come on.

At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting

control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of

the number of wiper sweeps.

1Fog Lights

When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the

instrument panel will be on.

They go off when the headlights turn off, or when

the daytime running lights are on.

2Fog Light Indicator

P. 72

Fog Light Switch

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

*Not available on all models

116

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights

Daytime Running Lights

The high beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following

conditions have been met:

The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have

been met:

•The power mode is ON.

•The headlight switch is off, or in .

•The parking brake is released.

•The ignition switch is in ON (w

•The headlight switch is off.

•The parking brake is released.

The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition switch

or setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.

The high beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight

switch is turned on.

Models with bulb type parking lights

Models with LED type parking/daytime running lights

Models with LED low beam headlights

Models with halogen low beam headlights

Models with bulb type parking lights

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

117

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

Wipers and Washers

The windshield wipers and washers can be

used when the ignition switch is in ON (w

■MIST

The wipers run at high speed until you release

the lever.

■Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI)

Change the wiper switch setting according to

the amount of rain.

■Adjusting the delay

Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper

delay.

■Washer

Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.

When you release the lever, the wipers make

two or three more sweeps before stopping.

1Wipers and Washers

NOTICE

Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.

The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber

blades will get damaged.

NOTICE

In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the

windshield, becoming stuck.

Operating the wipers in this condition may damage

the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the

windshield, then turn the wipers on.

If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are

operating intermittently, the length of the wipe

interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the

wipers make a single sweep.

When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s shortest

delay setting ( ) and the

setting become the same.

Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.

The pump may get damaged.

The wiper motor is equipped with a breaker that may

stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an

overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a

few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.

If the wipers stop operating due to any obstacle such as

the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place.

Rotate the wiper switch to

OFF

, and turn the ignition

switch to ACCESSORY

or LOCK

, then remove

the obstacle.

Intermittent Time

Adjustment Ring

MIST

INT: Low speed with

intermittent

OFF

LO: Low speed wipe

HI: High speed wipe

Pull to

use

washer.

Long delay

Short delay

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

118

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control

Brightness Control

When the parking lights are turned on and the

ignition switch is in ON (w

, you can use the

brightness control knob to adjust instrument

panel brightness.

Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.

Dim: Turn the knob to the left.

You will hear the beeper when the brightness

reaches minimum or maximum. The

information display will return to its original

state several seconds after you adjust the

brightness.

■Brightness level indicator

The brightness level is shown on the

information display while you are adjusting it.

1Brightness Control

Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on

whether the exterior lights are on or off. The

instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are

on.

Pressing the (Select/Reset) knob switches the

display.

If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness

display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels

the reduced instrument panel brightness when the

parking lights are on.

The brightness can be set differently for when the

exterior lights are on, and when they are off.

Control Knob

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

119

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror

Button

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror

Button

Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window

and mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w

The rear defogger and heated door mirrors

automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes

depending on the outside temperature.

However, if the outside temperature is 32°F

(0°C) or below, they do not automatically

switch off.

1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror

Button

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be

careful not to damage the heating wires.

It is critical to wipe the window from side to side

along the defogger heating wires.

This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off

when the window has been defogged.

Also, do not use the system for a long period when

the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery,

making it difficult to start the engine.

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

*Not available on all models

120

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System

Driving Position Memory System

You can store two driver’s seat positions with the driving position memory system.

When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote, the seat adjusts

automatically to one of the two preset positions.

•DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1.

•DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.

1Driving Position Memory System

Using the audio/information screen, you can disable

the automatic seat adjustment function.

2Customized Features P. 273

DRIVER 1 DRIVER 2

2013 Accord Coupe

*Not available on all models

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

121

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel uDriving Position Memory System

1. Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the

driver’s seat to the desired position.

2. Press the SET button.

uYou will hear a beep, and the memory

button indicator light will blink.

3. Press and hold memory button (1 or (2

within five seconds of pressing the SET

button.

uOnce the seat position has been

memorized, the indicator light on the

button you pressed stays on.

1. Move the shift lever to (P.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Press a memory button ((1 or (2).

uYou will hear a beep, and the indicator

light will blink.

The seat will automatically move to the

memorized position. When it has finished

moving, you will hear a beep, and the

indicator light stays on.

■Storing a Position in Memory

1Storing a Position in Memory

After you press the SET button, the storing operation

will be canceled when:

•You do not press the memory button within five

seconds.

•You readjust the seat position before the double-

beep.

•You set the power mode to any position except

ON.

Memory

Button 1

Memory

Button 2

SET Button

■Recalling the Stored Position

1Recalling the Stored Position

The seat will stop moving if you:

•Press the SET button, or a memory button ((1 or

(2).

•Adjust the seat position.

•

Shift into any position except (P.

•

Release the parking brake.

Automatic transmission/CVT models

Manual transmission models

Memory

Button 1

Memory

Button 2

Automatic transmission/CVT models

All models

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*Not available on all models

122

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel

Adjusting the Steering Wheel

The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you

can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.

1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up.

uThe steering wheel adjustment lever is

under the steering column.

2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and

in or out.

uMake sure you can see the instrument

panel gauges and indicators.

3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever

down to lock the steering wheel in position.

uAfter adjusting the position, make sure

you have securely locked the steering

wheel in place by trying to move it up,

down, in, and out.

1Adjusting the Steering Wheel

Make any steering wheel adjustments before you

start driving.

WARNING

Adjusting the steering wheel position while

driving may cause you to lose control of the

vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel only when the

vehicle is stopped.

To adjust

To lock

Lever

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

123

Adjusting the Mirrors

Interior Rearview Mirror

Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving

position.

Flip the tab to switch the position.

The night position will help to reduce the glare

from headlights behind you when driving

after dark.

When driving after dark, the automatic

dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare

from headlights behind you. Press the auto

button to turn this function on and off. When

activated, the auto indicator comes on.

■Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions

1Adjusting the Mirrors

Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and

adjusted for best visibility.

Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.

2Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 125

Tab

Daytime

Position

Night Position

Down

■Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

The auto dimming function cancels when the shift

position is in (R.

Sensor

Auto Button

Indicator

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*Not available on all models

124

uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors

Power Door Mirrors

You can adjust the door mirrors when the

ignition switch is in ON (w

■Mirror position adjustment

L/R selector switch: Select the left or right

mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the

switch to the center position.

Mirror position adjustment switch: Press

the switch left, right, up, or down to move the

mirror.

The driver side door mirror has outer and inner

segments.

The outer segment is slightly curved to provide

a wider angle view than a standard flat mirror.

This wider view may help you check areas that

are not visible using a standard door mirror.

Selector Switch

Adjustment Switch

■Expanded View Driver's Mirror

1Expanded View Driver's Mirror

Objects visible in the outer segment of the driver side

door mirror appear smaller than objects in the rest of

the mirror. But in fact, they are closer than they

appear.

Do not rely on your mirrors. Always look to the side

and behind your vehicle before changing lanes.

Inner Segment

Outer Segment

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

125

Continued

Adjusting the Seats

Adjusting the Seat Positions

Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible

while allowing you to maintain full control of

the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,

well back in the seat and be able to

adequately press the pedals without leaning

forward, and grip the steering wheel

comfortably. The passenger's seat should be

adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far

back from the front airbag in the dashboard

as possible.

■Adjusting the driver’s power seat

1Adjusting the Seats

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow

at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the

steering wheel and the chest.

Always make seat adjustments before driving.

WARNING

Sitting too close to a front airbag can result

in serious injury or death if the front

airbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from the front

airbags as possible while maintaining

control of the vehicle.

Move back.

Allow sufficient

space.

Horizontal Position

Adjustment

Height Adjustment

Seat-back Angle

Adjustment

Lumbar Support

Adjustment

2013 Accord Coupe

*Not available on all models

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

126

■Adjusting the front manual seat(s)

1Adjusting the front manual seat(s)

Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and

forth to make sure it is locked in position.

Horizontal Position

Adjustment

Pull up on the bar to move the

seat, then release the bar.

Height Adjustment

(Driver side only)

Pull up or push down the lever

to raise or lower the seat.

Seat-back Angle

Adjustment

Pull up the lever to

change the angle.

Driver’s seat is shown.

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

Continued

127

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable,

upright position, leaving ample space

between your chest and the airbag cover in

the center of the steering wheel.

The front seat passenger should also adjust

their seat-back to a comfortable, upright

position.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the

occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the

chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a

seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

■Adjusting the Seat-Backs

1Adjusting the Seat-Backs

Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the

seat-back and your back.

Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag

operation.

If you cannot get far enough away from the steering

wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend

that you investigate whether some type of adaptive

equipment may help.

WARNING

Reclining the seat-back too far can result in

serious injury or death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,

and sit well back in the seat.

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

128

Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints

in all seating positions.

Head restraints are most effective for

protection against whiplash and other rear-

impact crash injuries when the center of the

back of the occupant's head rests against the

center of the restraint. The tops of the

occupant's ears should be level with the

center height of the restraint.

■Adjusting the front head restraint positions

To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward.

To lower the head restraint: Push it down

while pressing the release button.

■Adjusting the Head Restraints

1Adjusting the Head Restraints

For a head restraint system to work properly:

•Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or

from the restraint legs.

•Do not place any object between an occupant and

the seat-back.

•Install each restraint in its proper location.

WARNING

Improperly positioning head restraints

reduces their effectiveness and increases

the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.

Make sure head restraints are in place and

positioned properly before driving.

Position head in the center

of the head restraint.

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

Continued

129

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

A passenger sitting in the center back seating

position should adjust the height of their head

restraint to an appropriate position before the

vehicle begins moving.

To raise the head restraint:

Pull it upward.

To lower the head restraint:

Push it down while pressing the release

button.

Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.

To remove a head restraint:

Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the

restraint up and out.

To reinstall a head restraint:

Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height

while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked

in position.

■Changing the Rear Center Seat Head Restraint Positions

■Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

To remove the rear outer headrestraints, fold down

the seat-back first.

2Folding Down the Rear Seat P. 132

WARNING

Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the

head restraints can result in severe injury

during a crash.

Always replace the head restraints before

driving.

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

130

After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their

seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their

seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is

off.

Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if

an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or

sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly

increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or

fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an

inflating front airbag.

■Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

WARNING

Sitting improperly or out of position can

result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back in the seat,

with your feet on the floor.

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

131

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

Pulling up the fold-down lever tilts the seat-

back forward.

Pulling up on the seat-back angle adjustment

lever tilts the seat-back forward.

Pulling up on the seat-back angle adjustment

lever, or pushing down the front passenger

seat-back release lever tilts the seat-back

forward.

You can also use these levers to move the seat

forward.

■Rear Seat Access

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

When you enter the rear seat, be careful not to trip

over the front seat belt.

If necessary, move the seat forward after tilting the

seat-back forward.

Fold-down

Lever

Driver side

Models with driver’s power seat

Seat-back Angle

Adjustment Lever

Models with driver’s manual seat

Seat-back Angle

Adjustment Lever

Release Lever

Passenger side

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

132

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

Rear Seats

1. Remove the center shoulder belt from the

guide.

2. Pull the release lever in the trunk to release

the lock.

3. Fold the seat-back down.

If the rear head restraints get caught on the

front seat-backs, remove the head restraints.

2Removing and Reinstalling the Head

Restraints P. 129

■Folding Down the Rear Seat

1Folding Down the Rear Seat

The rear seat-back can be folded down to

accommodate bulkier items in the trunk.

Never drive with the seat-back folded down and the

trunk lid open.

2Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 62

To lock the seat-back upright, push it backwards until

it locks.

When returning a seat-back to its original position,

push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder

belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the

center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the guide.

Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press

against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the

weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work

improperly.

2Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 48

Also make sure all items in the trunk or items

extending through the opening into the rear

seat is properly secured. Loose items can fly

forward if you have to brake hard.

The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they

do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold

down.

Guide

Center

Shoulder Belt

Release

Lever

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

133

Continued

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items

Interior Lights

■ON

The interior lights come on regardless of

whether the doors are open or closed.

■Door activated

The interior lights come on in the following

situations:

•When either of the doors are opened.

•You unlock the driver's door.

•You remove the key from the ignition

switch.

•When the power mode is set to VEHICLE

OFF (LOCK).

■OFF

The interior lights remain off regardless of

whether the doors are open or closed.

■Interior Light Switches

1Interior Light Switches

In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out

and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed.

The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following

situations:

•When you unlock the driver's door but do not open it.

•When you remove the key from the ignition switch

but do not open a door.

•When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF

(LOCK) but do not open a door.

You can change the interior lights dimming time.

2Customized Features P. 273

The interior lights go off immediately in the following

situations:

•When you lock the driver's door.

•When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w

•When you close the driver's door with the key in

the ignition switch.

•When you close the driver's door in ACCESSORY

mode.

If you leave either door open without the key in the

ignition switch

, the interior lights go off after about

15 minutes.

Models without smart entry system

Models with smart entry system

Models without smart entry system

Models with smart entry system

Door Activated Position

Off

Door Activated

Position On

Off

Models without smart entry system

Models with smart entry system

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE

START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights

134

The map lights can be turned on and off by

pressing the lenses.

■Map Lights

1Map Lights

When the ceiling light switch is in the door activated

position and either door is open, the map light will

not go off when you press the lens.

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

135

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Continued

Interior Convenience Items

Pull the handle to open the glove box.

You can lock the glove box with the master

key or the built-in key.

Pull the handle to open the console

compartment.

■Glove Box

1Glove Box

WARNING

An open glove box can cause serious injury

to your passenger in a crash, even if the

passenger is wearing the seat belt.

Always keep the glove box closed while

driving.

Glove Box

Handle

To Lock

■Console Compartment

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

136

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Pull the handle to open the pocket.

■Center Pocket

Handle

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*Not available on all models

Continued

137

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■Front seat beverage holders

■Rear seat beverage holders

■Beverage Holders

1Beverage Holders

NOTICE

Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and

electrical components in the interior.

Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.

Hot liquid can scald you.

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

138

The accessory power sockets can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY

(q or ON (w

■Accessory power socket (console panel)

Open the cover to use it.

■Accessory power socket (console

compartment)

Open the console lid and the cover to use it.

■Accessory Power Sockets

1Accessory Power Sockets

NOTICE

Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter

element.

This can overheat the power socket.

The accessory power socket is designed to supply

power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 180

watts or less (15 amps).

To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket

with the engine running.

When both sockets are being used, the combined

power rating of the accessories should not exceed

180 watts (15 amps).

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Continued

139

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

There are coat hooks behind the center pillar

on both sides. Pull them down to use them.

The cargo hooks in the trunk can be used to

install a net for securing items.

■Coat Hooks

1Coat Hooks

The coat hooks are not designed for large or heavy

items.

■Cargo Hooks

1Cargo Hooks

Heavy objects may damage the hook.

Make sure any items put on this hook weigh less than

6.6 lbs (3 kg).

Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk,

placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far

forward as possible.

2Maximum Load Limit P. 395

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

140

To open the sunglasses holder, push and

release the indent. To close, push it again until

it latches.

You can store eyeglasses and other small

items in this holder.

■Sunglasses Holder

1Sunglasses Holder

Keep the holder closed while driving except when

accessing stored items.

Push

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

141

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

The ignition switch must be in ON (w

to use

the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats

faster than the LO setting.

While in HI, the heater cycles on and off.

uThe appropriate indicator will be on

while the seat heater is on. Briefly press

the switch on the opposite side to turn

the heater off. The indicator will be off.

When a comfortable temperature is

reached, select LO to keep the seat

warm.

■Seat Heaters

1Seat Heaters

Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the

engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may

be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and

does not automatically turn off.

WARNING

Heat induced burns are possible when

using seat heaters.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense

temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,

lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or

with sensitive skin should not use seat

heaters.

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

*Not available on all models

142

Climate Control System

Using Automatic Climate Control

The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.

The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that will as quickly as

possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference.

Use the system when the engine is running.

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side control

buttons.

3. Press the (On/Off) button to cancel.

■Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes

Press the (recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on

environmental conditions.

Recirculation Mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior

through

the system.

Fresh Air Mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in

fresh air mode in normal situations.

1Using Automatic Climate Control

If any buttons are pressed while using the climate

control system in auto, the function of the button

that was pressed will take priority.

The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions

unrelated to the button that was pressed will be

controlled automatically.

To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the

fan may not start immediately when the AUTO

button is pressed.

If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down

more rapidly by partially opening the windows,

turning the system on auto, and setting the

temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to

recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.

When you set the temperature to the lower or upper

limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.

Pressing the button switches the climate

control system between on and off. When turned on,

the system returns to your last selection.

Floor and

defroster

vents

Floor ventsDashboard and floor

vents

Dashboard vents

AUTO Button

Driver’s Side

Temperature

Control Buttons

(Recirculation) Button

/ (Fan Control) Buttons

A/C (Air Conditioning)

Button

Passenger’s Side

Temperature

Control Buttons

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

143

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

Pressing the button turns the air

conditioning system on and automatically

switches the system to fresh air mode.

Press the button again to turn off, the

system returns to the previous settings.

■To rapidly defrost the windows

1. Press the button.

2. Press the button.

■Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

For your safety, make sure you have a clear view

through all the windows before driving.

Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower

limit.

When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the

windshield may fog up.

If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that

the air hits the side windows.

1To rapidly defrost the windows

After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air

mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,

the windows may fog up from humidity. This

impedes visibility.

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

144

uuClimate Control SystemuSynchronized Mode

Synchronized Mode

You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger

side in synchronized mode.

1. Press the SYNC button.

uThe system will switch to the synchronized mode.

2. Adjust the temperature using driver’s side temperature control buttons.

Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.

1Synchronized Mode

When you press the button, the system changes

to synchronized mode.

When the system is in dual mode, the driver side

temperature and the passenger side temperature can

be set separately.

The system adjusts each temperature based on the

information of the sunlight sensor and the sun

position updated by the navigation system’s GPS.

Models with navigation system

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

145

uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors

Automatic Climate Control Sensors

The automatic climate control system is

equipped with a sunlight sensor and an

interior temperature sensor. Do not cover or

spill any liquid on them.

Sunlight Sensor

Temperature

Sensor

2013 Accord Coupe

Controls

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

146

2013 Accord Coupe

Home

QRG

Index

147

Features

This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System

USB Port .......................................... 149

Auxiliary Input Jack .......................... 150

Audio System Theft Protection

....... 151

Region Setting .................................152

Audio Remote Controls.................... 153

Audio System Basic Operation ...... 154

Audio/Information Screen ................ 155

Display Setup ................................... 160

Playing AM/FM Radio.......................161

Playing a CD .................................... 164

Playing an iPod®............................... 167

Playing Internet Radio ...................... 170

Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 172

Playing Bluetooth® Audio.................175

Models with one display

Audio System Basic Operation ...... 177

Audio with Touch Screen ................. 178

Audio/Information Screen ................ 181

Display Setup................................... 187

Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 188

Playing XM® Radio

......................... 192

Playing a CD .................................... 195

Playing an iPod®............................... 198

Playing Internet Radio ...................... 202

Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 205

Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 208

Audio System Basic Operation ...... 210

Audio with Touch Screen ................. 211

Audio/Information Screen ................ 213

Models with two displays

Models with navigation system

Display Setup................................... 218

Voice Control Operation .................. 219

Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 227

Playing XM® Radio........................... 231

Playing a CD .................................... 234

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio.....237

Playing an iPod®.............................. 247

Playing Internet Radio ...................... 255

Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 258

Playing Bluetooth® Audio ................ 261

Audio Error Messages ...................... 263

General Information on the Audio System

.....269

Customized Features........................ 273

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver

.. 311

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..... 313, 350

Compass

.......................................... 388

2013 Accord Coupe

Home

QRG

Index

*Not available on all models

148

Features

Audio System

About Your Audio System

See the Navigation System Manual for information on the navigation system.

The audio system features AM/FM radio and the XM® Radio service

. It can also play

audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, Hard Disc Drive (HDD) audio

, USB flash drives,

and iPod®, iPhone® and Bluetooth® devices.

You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the

icons on the touchscreen interface

1About Your Audio System

XM® Radio is available on a subscription basis only.

For more information on XM® Radio, contact a

dealer.

2General Information on the Audio System

P. 269

XM® Radio is available in the United States and

Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.

XM® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio, Inc.

Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not

supported.

iPod® and iPhone® are registered trademarks owned

by Apple Inc.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of

handheld electronic devices while operating a

vehicle.

Models with navigation system

Remote Controls

iPod®

USB Flash

Drive

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*Not available on all models

149

uuAudio SystemuUSB Port

USB Port

Install the iPod® dock connector or the USB

flash drive to the USB port.

1USB Port

•Do not leave the iPod® or USB flash drive in the

vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may

damage it.

•We recommend using an extension cable with the

USB port.

•Do not connect the iPod® or USB flash drive using a

hub.

•Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard

disk drive, as the device or your files may be

damaged.

•We recommend backing up your data before using

the device in your vehicle.

•Displayed messages may vary depending on the

device model and software version.

If the audio system does not recognize the iPod®, try

reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To

reboot, follow the manufacturer's instructions

provided with the iPod® or visit www.apple.com/

ipod.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

150

uuAudio SystemuAuxiliary Input Jack

Auxiliary Input Jack

Use the jack to connect standard audio devices.

Use the jack to connect standard audio

devices.

1. Open the AUX cover.

2. Connect a standard audio device to the

input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo

miniplug.

uThe audio system automatically switches

to the AUX mode.

1Auxiliary Input Jack

You can return to the AUX mode by pressing the

AUX button.

You can return to the AUX mode by selecting

Change Source on the Audio menu screen or

Source on the touchscreen.

You cannot use the auxiliary input jack if you replace

the audio system.

Models with one display

Models with two displays

Models with navigation system

Models with one display

Models with two

displays

Models with

navigation system

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

151

uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection

Audio System Theft Protection

The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as

when the battery is disconnected or goes dead.

■Reactivating the audio system

1. Set the power mode to ON, and turn on the audio system.

uIf you set the power mode to ACCESSORY, you will be requested to enter the

audio security code. See step 3.

2. Press and hold the power button again for more than two seconds.

uThe audio system is reactivated when the system’s control unit recognizes that

the system is in your vehicle.

If the control unit fails to recognize, Enter PIN Code appears on the audio/

information screen.

3. Enter the audio security code using the touch screen. If you enter an incorrect

digit, continue to the last digit, then try again. If you do not enter code correctly

after 10 tries, leave the system for one hour before trying again, or visit a dealer

to have the system reset.

1Audio System Theft Protection

Find the audio system's security code and serial

number label in your owner’s manual kit.

We recommend that you write down the serial

number in this owner’s manual.

Do not store the label in your vehicle. If you lose the

label, you must first retrieve the serial number, and

then obtain the code.

You can find out about your serial number and

security code from a dealer.

You can register the security code at Owner Link

(owners.honda.com.), and find information on how

to retrieve the serial number and obtain the code at

radio-navicode.honda.com.

U.S. models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

Home

QRG

Index

*Not available on all models

152

uuAudio SystemuRegion Setting

Region Setting

The audio system’s region setting will be lost when the battery is disconnected or

goes dead.

If the Region Select screen appears, you need to set the region for the audio

system. Follow the steps below:

1. Press to select OK.

2. Rotate to select the region you live in, then press .

3. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes,

then press .

Models with two displays

1Region Setting

The region setting is required only when the battery

power is temporarily disconnected. It is set to your

vehicle’s region type by the factory.

You cannot change the setting once you have

completed the setting procedure. Contact a dealer if

you selected an incorrect region.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

153

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Audio Remote Controls

Allows you to operate the audio system while driving.

SOURCE Button

Cycles through the audio modes as follows:

FM AM XM

CD HDD

USB iPod®

Bluetooth® Audio Pandora®

Aha

TM*

AUX

(+ (- (Volume) Buttons

Press (+: Increases the volume.

Press (-: Decreases the volume.

Buttons

•When listening to the radio

Press : Selects the next preset radio station.

Press : Selects the previous preset radio station.

Press and hold : Selects the next strong station.

Press and hold : Selects the previous strong station.

•When listening to a CD, HDD

, iPod®, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio

Press : Skips to the next song.

Press : Goes back to the beginning of the current or previous song.

•When listening to a CD, HDD

or USB flash drive

Press and hold : Skips to the next folder.

Press and hold : Goes back to the previous folder.

•When listening to Pandora®

Press : Skips to the next song.

Press and hold : Selects the next station.

Press and hold : Selects the previous station.

1Audio Remote Controls

The CD mode appears only when a CD is loaded.

Button

SOURCE Button

Button

(+ Button

(- Button

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

*Not available on all models

154

Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or

ON (w

Use the selector knob or MENU button to

access some audio functions.

Press to switch between the normal and

extended display for some functions.

Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll

through the available choices. Press to set

your selection.

MENU button: Press to select any mode.

The available mode includes Change Source,

Station List, Save Preset, Radio Text,

Music Search, and play modes. Play modes

can be also selected from Scan, Random/

Repeat, and so on.

BACK button: Press to go back to the

previous display.

button: Press to change the audio/

information screen brightness.

Press once and make an adjustment.

uEach time you press , the mode

switches between the daytime mode,

nighttime mode and OFF mode.

Models with one display

1Audio System Basic Operation

These indications are used to show how to operate

the selector knob.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

Audio Menu Items

2Station List P. 162

2Radio text P. 163

2Music Search P. 165

P. 168

P. 173

2Scan P. 166

P. 174

2Random/Repeat P. 166

P. 169

P. 174

Button Selector Knob

MENU ButtonBACK Button

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Home

155

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Continued

Audio/Information Screen

Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various

setup options.

Press the (display) button to change the display.

■Switching the Display

(Display) Button Audio

Trip Computer

(Current Drive)

Clock/Wallpaper

Trip Computer

(History of Trip A)

Audio/Information Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

156

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■Audio

Shows the current audio information.

■Trip computer (Current Drive)

Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well

as the average fuel economy from your last trip.

■Trip computer (History of Trip A)

Shows the range, average fuel economy and distance traveled for the current trip,

as well as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three

driving cycles.

Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The

history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.

■Clock/Wallpaper

Shows a clock screen or an image you import.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

157

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

■Import wallpaper

You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash

drive.

1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB

port.

2USB Port P. 149

2. Press the SETTINGS button.

3. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Clock,

Clock/Wallpaper Type, then

Wallpaper.

4. Rotate to select Add New Wallpaper,

then press .

uThe preview of the imported data is

displayed.

5. Rotate to select a desired picture.

uThe preview is displayed on the left side

on the screen.

6. Press to save the data.

uThe confirmation message will appear.

Then the display will return to the

wallpaper list.

■Wallpaper Setup

1Wallpaper Setup

•When importing wallpaper files, the image must be

in the USB flash drive’s root directory.

Images in a folder cannot be imported.

•The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.

•The file format of the image that can be imported

is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).

•The individual file size limit is 2 MB.

•The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If

the image size is less than 420 × 234 pixels, the

image is displayed in the middle of the screen with

the extra area appearing in black.

•Up to 255 files can be selected.

•If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,

the No files detected message appears.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

158

■Select wallpaper

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Clock, Clock/Wallpaper Type, then

Wallpaper.

uThe screen changes to the wallpaper list.

3. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper, then press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

4. Rotate to select Set, then press .

■Delete wallpaper

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Clock, Clock/Wallpaper Type, then

Wallpaper.

uThe screen changes to the wallpaper list.

3. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

4. Rotate to select Delete, then press .

uThe confirmation message will appear.

5. Rotate to select OK, then press to delete completely.

1Wallpaper Setup

From the pop-up menu, rotate to select Preview

and press to see a preview at full-size screen.

To go back to the previous screen, press to select

OK, or press the BACK button.

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be

previewed.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

159

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Audio Settings, then

press .

3. Rotate to select Sound, then press .

Rotate to scroll through the following

choices:

1Adjusting the Sound

The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.

SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle

speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As

you slow down, audio volume decreases.

Selector Knob

SETTINGS Button

Speed-sensitive

Volume

Compensation

Bass

Treble

Fader

Balance

SVC

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

160

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup

You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Display.

3. Rotate to select Brightness, then press

4. Rotate to adjust the setting.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Other.

3. Rotate to select Background Color,

then press .

4. Rotate to select the setting you want,

then press .

■Changing the Screen Brightness

1Changing the Screen Brightness

You can change the Contrast and Black level

settings in the same manner.

■Changing the Screen’s Color Theme

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

161

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Continued

Playing AM/FM Radio

Audio/Information Screen

FM/AM Button

Press to select a band.

Preset Buttons (1-6)

To store a station:

Tune to the selected station.

Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep.

To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.

Seek/Skip Buttons

Press and to search up and

down the selected band for a

station with a strong signal.

MENU Button

Press to display the menu items.

Selector Knob

Turn to tune the radio frequency.

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Power/volume)

Knob

Press to turn the audio system

on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

BACK Button

Press to go back to the

previous display or cancel a

setting.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

162

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

■To find an RDS station from Station List

1. Press while listening to an FM station.

2. Rotate to select the station, then press .

■Manual update

Updates your available station list at any time.

1. Press while listening to an FM station.

2. Rotate to select Refresh, then press .

■Radio Data System (RDS)

1Playing AM/FM Radio

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating

stereo FM broadcasts.

Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

Switching the Audio Mode

Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.

2Audio Remote Controls P. 153

You can also switch the mode by pressing the MENU

button and selecting Change Source on the MENU

screen.

You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into

the preset button memory. FM1 and FM2 let you

store 6 stations each.

1Radio Data System (RDS)

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS

automatically turns on, and the frequency display

changes to the station name. However, when the

signals of that station become weak, the display

changes from the station name to the frequency.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

163

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■Radio text

Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .

■Scan

Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Scan, then press .

To turn off scan, press to select Stop, or press the BACK button.

1Radio text

The text indicator comes on when you received a text

message. The indicator stays on until you read the

message.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

164

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Playing a CD

Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or

AAC

format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes ® are playable on this unit.

Audio/Information Screen

CD Button

Press to play a CD.

Seek/Skip Buttons

Press or to change tracks

(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).

Press and hold to move rapidly

within a track/file.

MENU Button

Press to display the menu items.

Selector Knob

Turn to change tracks/folders.

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Power/volume)

Knob

Press to turn the audio system

on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

BACK Button

Press to go back to the

previous display or cancel a

setting.

CD Slot

Insert a CD about halfway into the

CD slot.

(CD Eject) Button

Press to eject a CD.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

165

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Music Search, then

press .

3. Rotate to select a folder.

4. Press to change the display to a list of

files in that folder.

5. Rotate to select a file, then press .

■How to Select a File from the Music Search List

(MP3/WMA/AAC)

1Playing a CD

NOTICE

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can

cause the CD to jam in the unit.

WMA files protected by digital rights management

(DRM) cannot be played.

The audio system displays Unplayable File, then

skips to the next file.

Text data appears on the display under the following

circumstances:

•When you select a new folder, file, or track.

•When you change the audio mode to CD.

•When you insert a CD.

If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,

the system reloads the CD automatically after several

seconds.

File Selection

Folder Selection

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

166

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/

Repeat, then press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

Scan

Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second

sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.

Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all

tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,

WMA, or AAC).

Random/Repeat

Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in

the current folder.

Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.

Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files

in the current folder in random order.

Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random

order.

Random/Repeat

selected.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

167

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Continued

Playing an iPod®

Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB Port, then press the AUX

button.

2USB Port P. 149

Audio/Information Screen

AUX Button

Press to select iPod® (if connected).

Seek/Skip Buttons

Press or to change songs.

Press and hold to move rapidly

within a song.

MENU Button

Press to display the menu items.

Selector Knob

Turn to change songs.

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Power/volume)

Knob

Press to turn the audio system

on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

BACK Button

Press to go back to the

previous display or cancel a

setting.

Album Art

USB Indicator

Appears when an iPod® is

connected.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

168

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Music Search, then

press .

3. Rotate to select a menu.

4. Press to display the items on that menu.

5. Rotate to select an item, then press .

■How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

1Playing an iPod®

Available operating functions vary on models or

versions. Some functions may not be available on the

vehicle's audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 265

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

169

uuAudio System Basic Operationu

You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Shuffle/Repeat, then

press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

Repeat Song: Repeats the current file.

Shuffle Album: Plays all available albums in a

selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,

or composers) in random order.

Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a

selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,

or composers) in random order.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

170

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

Playing Internet Radio

Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.

You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port.

Make sure the audio setting is correct for the connection type.

2USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority

P. 292

Press the AUX button to select Pandora mode.

U.S. models

Compatible phones only

1Playing Internet Radio

Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade

dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of

Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora

is currently available exclusively in the United States.

iPhone

Audio/Information Screen

AUX Button

Press to select Pandora®.

Skip Button

Press to skip a song.

MENU Button

Press to display the menu items.

Selector Knob

Turn to switch to another station.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

Album Art

USB Indicator

Appears when a phone is

connected.

Rating Icon

Preset Button (1)

Press to switch the mode between

pause and resume.

Preset Button (2)

Press to select Like.

Preset Button (3)

Press to select Dislike.

Preset Button (4)

Press to select Bookmark Track.

Preset Button (5)

Press to select Bookmark Artist.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

*Not available on all models

171

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio

system. The available items are:

•Like

•Dislike

•Station List

•Change Source

•Bookmark Track

•Bookmark Artist

•Play/Pause

■Operating a menu item

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select an item, then press .

■Pandora® Menu

1Playing Internet Radio

To find out if your phone is compatible with this

feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

(888) 528-7876.

Pandora® is a personalized Internet radio service that

selects music based on an artist, song, or genre a user

enters, and streams what is likely to be of interest.

To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app

must first be installed on your phone. Visit

www.pandora.com. for more information.

If you cannot operate Pandora

through the audio system,

it may be streaming through

Bluetooth

Audio. Make sure

Pandora

mode on your audio system is selected.

1Pandora® Menu

Available operating functions vary on software

versions. Some functions may not be available on the

vehicle's audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2Pandora® P. 266

There are restrictions on the number of songs you

can skip or dislike in a given hour.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

172

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,

WMA or AAC

format.

Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the AUX button.

2USB Port P. 149

Audio/Information Screen

AUX Button

Press to select USB flash drive

(if connected).

Seek/Skip Buttons

Press or to change files.

Press and hold to move rapidly

within a file.

MENU Button

Press to display the menu items.

Selector Knob

Turn to change folders.

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Power/volume)

Knob

Press to turn the audio system

on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

BACK Button

Press to go back to the

previous display.

USB Indicator

Appears when a USB flash drive is

connected.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes ® are playable on this unit.

Continued

173

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Music Search, then

press .

3. Rotate to select a folder.

4. Press to change the display to a list of

files in that folder.

5. Rotate to select a file, then press .

■How to Select a File from the Music Search List

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

Use the recommended USB flash drives.

2General Information on the Audio System

P. 269

Files in WMA format protected by digital rights

management (DRM) are not played.

The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then

skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 265

File Selection

Folder Selection

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

174

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/

Repeat, then press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

Scan

Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the

first file in each of the main folders.

Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files

in the current folder.

Random/Repeat

Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.

Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.

Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder

in random order.

Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.

Random/Repeat

selected.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

175

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Continued

Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible

phone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

2Phone Setup P. 321

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming

audio capabilities are compatible with the system.

For a list of compatible phones:

•U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

1-888-528-7876.

•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call

In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data

device functions while driving.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,

there will be a delay before the system begins to play.

MENU Button

Press to display

the menu items.

AUX Button

Press to select

Bluetooth® Audio.

Skip Buttons

Press or

to change files.

Bluetooth Indicator

Appears when your

phone is connected

to HFL.

VOL/

(Power/volume)

Knob

Press to turn the

audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the

volume.

Audio/

Information

Screen

Preset Button (1)

Press to resume

playing a file.

Preset Button (2)

Press to pause a

playing file.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

1-888-528-7876.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

176

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and

connected to HFL.

2. Press the AUX button.

If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-

compatible phone, which is not compatible

for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be

connected.

■To pause or resume a file

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Play or Pause, then press .

Press the (pick-up) button on the steering

wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio

is playing.

2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 313

Press the (hang-up/back) button to end

the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio.

■To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your

phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating

instructions.

The pause function may not be available on some

phones.

If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input

jack, you may need to press the AUX button

repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing

from your phone.

■Switching to HFL

1Switching to HFL

If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the

pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.

Button

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

177

Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.

Use the selector knob, DISP and BACK

buttons to access some audio functions.

Press to switch between the normal and

extended display for some functions.

Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll

through the available choices. Press to set

your selection.

Also press to select any mode. The available

mode includes Change Source, Station List,

Save Preset, Radio Text, Music Search, and

play modes. Play modes can be also selected

from Scan, Random/Repeat, and so on.

BACK button: Press to go back to the

previous display.

button: Press to change the audio/

information screen brightness.

Press once and make an adjustment.

uEach time you press , the mode

switches between the daytime mode,

nighttime mode and OFF mode.

Models with two displays

1Audio System Basic Operation

These indications are used to show how to operate

the selector knob.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

Audio Menu Items

2Station List P. 190

2Save Preset P. 189

P. 194

2Radio text P. 191

2Music Search P. 196

P. 200

P. 206

2Scan P. 197

P. 207

2Random/Repeat P. 197

P. 201

P. 207

Button

Selector Knob

DISP (SETTINGS) Button

BACK Button

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

178

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

Use the touch screen to operate the audio system.

Select Source, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.

Select More to display the menu items.

■Selecting an Audio Source

1Audio with Touch Screen

Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source

selected.

Select to go back to the previous screen.

Use the / / / icons to turn the page.

■Displaying the Menu Items

Select Source.

Source List Icons

Select More.Menu Items

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

179

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

Select to adjust the clock and screen settings.

■Changing the Clock settings

2Setting the Clock P. 84

■Changing the Screen settings

1. Select Screen Settings.

2. Use (+, (- or others to adjust the setting.

■Changing the Clock/Screen Settings

1Changing the Clock/Screen Settings

The followings are adjustable screen settings:

•Brightness

•Contrast

•Black Level

•Display

Changes between the daytime or nighttime

modes.

•Beep

Mutes a beep that sounds every time you touch the

screen.

•Keyboard

Changes the on-screen keyboard from the

alphabetical order to the qwerty type.

•Blackout

Sets the screen black out timing.

Select .

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

180

1. Select More, then Sound Settings.

2. Use (+, (- or others to adjust the setting.

Select to switch to the phone operation screen.

2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 313

■Adjusting the Sound

1Adjusting the Sound

Select Off, Low, Mid or High for the SVC setting.

2Adjusting the Sound P. 186

■Displaying the Phone Operation Screen

1Displaying the Phone Operation Screen

The phone operation screen is available when a

phone is paired to HFL.

Select .

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

181

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Continued

Audio/Information Screen

Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various

setup options.

Press the (display) button to change the display.

■Switching the Display

Using the button

(Display) Button Audio

Trip Computer

(Current Drive)

Clock/Wallpaper

Trip Computer

(History of Trip A)

Audio/Information Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

182

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Press the DISP button to go to the Function Change screen.

Rotate to select Audio, Phone, Info or Setting and press .

■Audio

Shows the current audio information.

■Phone

Shows the HFL information. 2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 313

■Setting

Enters the customizing menu screen. 2Customized Features P. 273

Using the DISP button

Function Change Screen

DISP Button

Selector Knob

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

183

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Continued

■Info

Shows the Trip Computer or Clock/Wallpaper information.

Press , rotate to select an item, then press .

■Trip computer (Current Drive)

Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well

as the average fuel economy from your last trip.

■Trip computer (History of Trip A)

Shows the range, average fuel economy and distance traveled for the current trip,

as well as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three

driving cycles.

Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The

history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.

■Deleting the history manually

1. Press on the History of Trip A screen.

2. Rotate to select Delete History, then press .

3. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes,

then press .

■Clock/Wallpaper

Shows a clock screen or an image you import.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

184

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

■Import wallpaper

You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash

drive.

1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB

port.

2USB Port P. 149

2. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the

Settings screen.

3. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Clock,

Clock/Wallpaper Type, then

Wallpaper.

4. Rotate to select Add New, then press .

uThe picture name is displayed on the list.

5. Rotate to select a desired picture.

uThe preview is displayed on the left side

on the screen.

6. Press to save the data.

uThe confirmation message will appear.

Then the display will return to the

wallpaper list.

■Wallpaper Setup

1Wallpaper Setup

•When importing wallpaper files, the image must be

in the USB flash drive’s root directory.

Images in a folder cannot be imported.

•The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.

•The file format of the image that can be imported

is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).

•The individual file size limit is 2 MB.

•The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If

the image size is less than 420 × 234 pixels, the

image is displayed in the middle of the screen with

the extra area appearing in black.

•Up to 255 files can be selected.

•If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,

the No files detected message appears.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

185

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■Select wallpaper

1. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the Settings screen.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then Wallpaper.

uThe screen changes to the wallpaper list.

3. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper.

uThe preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.

4. Press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

5. Rotate to select Set, then press .

uThe display will return to the wallpaper list.

■Delete wallpaper

1. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the Settings screen.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then Wallpaper.

uThe screen changes to the wallpaper list.

3. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete.

uThe preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.

4. Press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

5. Rotate to select Delete, then press .

uThe confirmation message will appear.

6. Rotate to select OK, then press to delete completely.

uThe display will return to the wallpaper list.

1Wallpaper Setup

From the pop-up menu, rotate to select Preview

and press to see a preview at full-size screen.

To go back to the previous screen, press to select

OK, or press the BACK button.

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be

previewed.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

186

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound

1. Press and hold the DISP button.

2. Rotate to select Audio Settings, then

press .

3. Rotate to select Sound, then press .

Rotate to scroll through the following

choices:

1Adjusting the Sound

The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.

SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle

speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As

you slow down, audio volume decreases.

Selector Knob

DISP (SETTINGS) Button

BACK Button

Speed-sensitive

Volume

Compensation

Subwoofer

Bass

Treble

Fader

Balance

SUBW

SVC

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

187

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup

You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

1. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the

Settings screen.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Display.

3. Rotate to select Brightness, then

4. Rotate to adjust the setting.

1. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the

Settings screen.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Other.

3. Rotate to select Background Color,

then press .

4. Rotate to select the setting you want,

then press .

■Changing the Screen Brightness

1Changing the Screen Brightness

You can change the Contrast and Black Level

settings in the same manner.

■Changing the Screen’s Color Theme

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

188

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Playing AM/FM Radio

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

Tune Up/Down Icons

Select or to tune the radio

frequency.

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous

display.

Selector Knob

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Source

Select to change a band or change

an audio source.

To listen to a stored channel,

select 1-6 (AM) or 1-12 (FM).

Presets

Select to store a station.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to search up and

down the selected band for a

station with a strong signal.

Select to display the menu items.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

189

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

To store a station:

1. Tune to the selected station.

2. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen.

3. Rotate to select Save Preset, then press .

4. Rotate to select the preset number you want to store that station, then

2. Select More.

3. Select Save Preset.

4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.

■Preset Memory

1Playing AM/FM Radio

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating

stereo FM broadcasts.

Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

Switching the Audio Mode

Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.

2Audio Remote Controls P. 153

You can also switch the mode by pressing and

selecting Change Source on the Audio menu

screen.

You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into

the preset memory.

Selector Knob

Audio with Touch Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

190

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

■To find an RDS station from Station List

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen while listening to an FM station.

2. Rotate to select Station List, then press .

3. Rotate to select the station, then press .

■Manual update

Updates your available station list at any time.

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen while listening to an FM station.

2. Rotate to select Station List, then press .

3. Rotate to select UPDATE LIST, then press .

■Radio Data System (RDS)

1Radio Data System (RDS)

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS

automatically turns on, and the frequency display

changes to the station name. However, when the

signals of that station become weak, the display

changes from the station name to the frequency.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

191

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■Radio text

Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen.

2. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .

■Scan

Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen.

2. Rotate to select Scan, then press .

To turn off scan, press to select Cancel Scan, or press the BACK button.

1. Select More.

2. Select Scan.

To turn off scan, select Cancel Scan.

1Radio text

The text indicator comes on when you received a text

message. The indicator stays on until you read the

message.

Selector Knob

Audio with Touch Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

192

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio

Playing XM® Radio

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

Category Up/Down Icons

Select or to display and select

an XM® Radio category.

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous

display.

Selector Knob

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Source

Select to change an audio source.

To listen to a stored channel,

select 1-12.

Presets

Select to store a station.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to the previous

or next channel.

In channel mode, select and hold to

change the channel rapidly.

Select to display the menu items.

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

193

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio

1. Select the XM® mode.

2Audio Remote Controls P. 153

2Audio with Touch Screen P. 178

2. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen.

3. Rotate to select XM Tune Mode, then press .

4. Rotate to select Channel Mode or Category Mode, then press .

5. Rotate to select Channel List, then press .

6. Rotate to select a channel from a list, then press .

2. Select More.

3. Select Tune Mode.

4. Select CH Channel Mode or CAT Category Mode.

5. Select a channel using the , , , icons on the tune mode screen or the

preset numbers (1-12) on the preset mode screen.

■To Play the XM® Radio

1Playing XM® Radio

In the channel mode, all available channels are

selectable. In the category mode, you can select a

channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).

There may be instances when XM® Radio does not

broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This

does not indicate a problem with your audio system.

Selector Knob

Audio with Touch Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio

194

To store a station:

1. Tune to the selected station.

2. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen.

3. Rotate to select Save Preset, then press .

4. Rotate to select the preset number you want to store that station, then

2. Select More.

3. Select Save Preset.

4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.

■Preset Memory

1Playing XM® Radio

You can store 12 XM® stations into the preset

memory.

Selector Knob

Audio with Touch Screen

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

195

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Continued

Playing a CD

Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or

AAC

format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes® are playable on this unit.

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous

display.

Selector Knob

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to change tracks

(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).

Select and hold to move rapidly

within a track/file.

Select to display the menu items.

Folder Up/Down Icons

Select to skip to the next folder,

and to skip to the beginning of

the previous folder in MP3, WMA,

or AAC.

Source

Select to change an audio source.

CD Slot

Insert a CD about halfway into the

CD slot.

(CD Eject) Button

Press to eject a CD.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

196

1. Press . Rotate to select Music

Search, then press .

2. Rotate to select a folder.

3. Press to change the display to a list of

files in that folder.

4. Rotate to select a file, then press .

■How to Select a File from the Music Search List

(MP3/WMA/AAC)

1Playing a CD

NOTICE

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can

cause the CD to jam in the unit.

WMA files protected by digital rights management

(DRM) cannot be played.

The audio system displays Unplayable File, then

skips to the next file.

Text data appears on the display under the following

circumstances:

•When you select a new folder, file, or track.

•When you change the audio mode to CD.

•When you insert a CD.

If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,

the system reloads the CD automatically after several

seconds.

Folder Selection

File Selection

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

197

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu

screen.

2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/

Repeat, then press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.

3. Select a mode.

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu

screen.

2. Rotate to select the mode you want to

turn off, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

Scan

Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second

sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.

Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all

tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,

WMA, or AAC).

Random/Repeat

Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in

the current folder.

Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.

Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files

in the current folder in random order.

Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random

order.

Random/Repeat

is selected.

Selector Knob

Random/Repeat

is selected.

Audio with Touch Screen

Selector Knob

Audio with Touch Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

198

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Playing an iPod®

Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB port, then select the iPod

mode.

2USB Port P. 149

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous

display.

Selector Knob

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to change songs.

Select and hold to move rapidly

within a song.

Select to display the menu items.

Album Art Icon

Source

Select to change an audio source.

Album Bar

Select to search for an album.

Album Art

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

199

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

1. Select the album bar.

uThe image of the current album is displayed.

2. Select or icon to search for an album.

uWhen the album image you are looking for appears, select it to play.

■How to Select an Album

1How to Select an Album

You cannot select an album while the vehicle is

moving.

Select to go back to the previous screen.

Album AAA

Artist AAA

Select an album

image.

Select the

album bar.

Album Bar Album Image

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

200

1. Press . Rotate to select Music

Search, then press .

2. Rotate to select a menu.

3. Press to display the items on that menu.

4. Rotate to select an item, then press .

■How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

Available operating functions vary on models or

versions. Some functions may not be available on the

vehicle's audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 265

Folder Selection

File Selection

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

201

uuAudio System Basic Operationu

You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu

screen.

2. Rotate to select Shuffle/Repeat, then

press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select Shuffle/Repeat.

3. Select a mode.

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu

screen.

2. Rotate to select the mode you want

to turn off, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.

Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a

selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,

or composers) in random order.

Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a

selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,

or composers) in random order.

Selector Knob

Audio with Touch Screen

Selector Knob

Audio with Touch Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

202

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

Playing Internet Radio

Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.

You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port.

Make sure the audio setting is correct for the connection type.

2USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority

P. 292

Select Source to select Pandora or Aha mode.

U.S. models

Compatible phones only

1Playing Internet Radio

Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade

dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of

Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora

is currently available exclusively in the United States.

iPhone

Audio/Information Screen

Album Art

USB Indicator

Appears when a phone is

connected.

Rating Icon

Audio with Touch Screen

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous

display.

Selector Knob

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Skip Icon

Select to skip a song.

Select to display the menu items.

Station Up/Down Icons

Select to change a station.

Source

Select Pandora® or Aha

Like/Dislike Icons

Select to evaluate a song.

Play/Pause Icon

Select to resume or play a song.

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

203

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio

system. The available items are:

•Like

•Dislike

•Station List

•Change Source

•Bookmark Track

•Bookmark Artist

•Play/Pause

■Operating a menu item

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu

screen.

2. Rotate to select an item and press .

■Pandora® Menu

1Playing Internet Radio

To find out if your phone is compatible with this

feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

(888) 528-7876.

Pandora® is a personalized Internet radio service that

selects music based on an artist, song, or genre a user

enters, and streams what is likely to be of interest.

To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app

must first be installed on your phone. Visit

www.pandora.com. for more information.

If you cannot operate Pandora

through the audio system,

it may be streaming through

Bluetooth

Audio. Make sure

Pandora

mode on your audio system is selected.

1Pandora® Menu

Available operating functions vary on software

versions. Some functions may not be available on the

vehicle's audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2Pandora® P. 266

There are restrictions on the number of songs you

can skip or dislike in a given hour.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

204

You can operate some of the Aha

menu items from your vehicle’s audio system.

The available items are:

■Operating a menu item

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu

screen.

2. Rotate to select an item and press .

■Aha

•Like •15sec Back

•Play/Pause •30sec Skip

•Stations •View text

•Change Source •View list

•Dislike

1Aha

Aha

by Harman is a cloud-based service that

organizes your favorite web content into live radio

stations. You can access podcasts, internet radio,

location-based services, and audio updates from

social media sites.

Available operating functions vary on software

versions. Some functions may not be available on the

vehicle's audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2Aha

P. 268

The menu items vary depending on the station you

selected.

To use this service in your vehicle, the HondaLink app

must be installed on your phone. Visit

owners.honda.com/apps for more information.

You must have a previously set up Aha account prior

to using the service in your vehicle. Visit

www.aharadio.com for more information.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

205

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Continued

Playing a USB Flash Drive

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,

WMA or AAC

format.

Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.

2USB Port P. 149

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes ® are playable on this unit.

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

Selector Knob

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume. Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to change files.

Select and hold to move rapidly

within a file.

Select to display the menu items.

Source

Select to change an audio source.

USB Indicator

Appears when a USB flash drive

is connected.

Folder Up/Down Icons

Select to skip to the next folder,

and to skip to the beginning of

the previous folder.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

206

1. Press . Rotate to select Music

Search, then press .

2. Rotate to select a folder.

3. Press to change the display to a list of

files in that folder.

4. Rotate to select a file, then press .

■How to Select a File from the Music Search List

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

Use the recommended USB flash drives.

2General Information on the Audio System

P. 269

Files in WMA format protected by digital rights

management (DRM) are not played.

The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then

skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 265

Folder Selection

File Selection

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

207

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu

screen.

2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/

Repeat, then press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.

3. Select a mode.

1. Select More.

2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

Scan

Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the

first file in each of the main folders.

Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files

in the current folder.

Random/Repeat

Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.

Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.

Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder

in random order.

Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.

Random/Repeat

is selected.

Selector Knob

Random/Repeat

is selected.

Audio with Touch Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu

screen.

2. Rotate to select the mode you want

to turn off, then press .

Selector Knob

208

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible

phone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

2Phone Setup P. 321

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming

audio capabilities are compatible with the system.

For a list of compatible phones:

•U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

1-888-528-7876.

•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call

In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data

device functions while driving.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,

there will be a delay before the system begins to play.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to

change files.

Bluetooth Indicator

Appears when your

phone is connected

to HFL.

VOL/

(Volume/Power)

Knob

Press to turn the

audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the

volume.

Audio/

Information

Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

Play Icon

Pause Icon

BACK Button

Press to go back to

the previous display.

Select to display

the menu items.

Selector Knob

Press and turn to

select an item,

then press to set

your selection.

Source

Select to change

an audio source.

Folder Up/Down

Icons

Select or to

change folder.

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

1-888-528-7876.

209

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and

connected to HFL.

2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.

If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-

compatible phone, which is not compatible

for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be

connected.

■To pause or resume a file

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen.

2. Rotate to select Play or Pause, then press .

Select the play icon or pause icon.

Press the (pick-up) button on the steering

wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio

is playing.

2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 313

Press the (hang-up/back) button to end

the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio.

■To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your

phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating

instructions.

The pause function may not be available on some

phones.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing

from your phone.

■Switching to HFL

Selector knob

Audio with Touch Screen

1Switching to HFL

If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the

pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.

Button

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

210

Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.

Use the interface dial or MENU button to

access some audio functions.

Press to switch between the normal and

extended display for some functions.

Interface dial: Rotate left or right to scroll

through the available choices. Press to set

your selection. Move right, left, up or down to

select secondary menu.

MENU button: Press to select any mode. The

available mode includes Change Source,

Station List, Save Preset, Radio Text,

Music Search, and play modes. Play modes

can be also selected from Scan, Random/

Repeat, and so on.

BACK button: Press to go back to the

previous display.

button: Press to change the audio/

information screen brightness.

Press once and make an adjustment.

uEach time you press , the mode

switches between the daytime mode,

nighttime mode and off mode.

Models with navigation system

1Audio System Basic Operation

Voice Control System

The audio system is voice operable. See the

navigation system manual for details.

These indications are used to show how to operate

the interface dial.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

Move , , or to select secondary menu.

Audio Menu Items

2Station List P. 229

2Save Preset P. 228

P. 233

2Radio text P. 230

2Music Search P. 235

P. 239

P. 249

P. 259

2Scan P. 236

P. 240

P. 260

2Random/Repeat P. 236

P. 240

P. 250

P. 260

Interface Dial

MENU ButtonBACK Button

Button

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

211

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

Continued

Features

Audio with Touch Screen

Use the touch screen to operate the audio system.

Select Source, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.

Select More to display the menu items.

■Selecting an Audio Source

1Audio with Touch Screen

Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source

selected.

Select to go back to the previous screen.

Use the / / / icons to turn the page.

■Displaying the Menu Items

Select Source.

Source List Icons

Select More.Menu Items

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

212

1. Select More, then Sound Settings.

2. Use (+, (- or others to adjust the setting.

1. Select More, then Screen Settings.

2. Use (+, (- or others to adjust the setting.

■Adjusting the Sound

1Adjusting the Sound

Select Off, Low, Mid or High for the SVC setting.

2Adjusting the Sound P. 217

■Changing the Screen Settings

1Changing the Screen Settings

The followings are adjustable screen settings:

•Brightness

•Contrast

•Black Level

•Display

Changes between the daytime or nighttime

modes.

•Beep

Mutes a beep that sounds every time you touch the

screen.

•Keyboard

Changes the on-screen keyboard from the

alphabetical order to the qwerty type.

•Blackout

Sets the screen black out timing.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

213

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Continued

Audio/Information Screen

Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various

setup options.

Press the (display) button to change the display.

■Switching the Display

1Switching the Display

You can also use the AUDIO, NAV, PHONE and

INFO buttons to go to the corresponding display.

(Display) Button Audio

Info

Audio/Information Screen

Navigation

Phone

AUDIO ButtonNAV Button

PHONE Button INFO Button

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

214

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■Audio

Shows the current audio information.

■Navigation

Shows the navigation screen.

2Refer to the Navigation System Manual

■Phone

Shows the HFL information.

2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 350

■Info

Shows the Trip Computer or Clock/Wallpaper and other information. Rotate

to select an item, then press .

■Trip computer (Current Drive)

Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well

as the average fuel economy from your last trip.

■Trip computer (History of Trip A)

Shows the range, average fuel economy and distances traveled for the current trip, as well

as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three driving cycles.

Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The

history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.

■Deleting the history manually

1. Move on the History of Trip A screen to select Delete History, then press .

2. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes,

then press .

■Clock/Wallpaper

Shows a clock screen or an image you import.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

215

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

■Import wallpaper

You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash

drive.

1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB

port.

2USB Port P. 149

2. Press the SETTINGS button.

3. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Clock,

Clock/Wallpaper Type.

4. Move to select Wallpaper.

uThe screen will change to the wallpaper

list.

5. Move to select Add New, then press .

6. Rotate to select a desired picture.

uThe preview is displayed on the left side

on the screen.

7. Press , then move to select Start

Import.

uThe confirmation message will appear.

Then the display will return to the

wallpaper list.

■Wallpaper Setup

1Wallpaper Setup

•When importing wallpaper files, the image must be

in the USB flash drive’s root directory.

Images in a folder cannot be imported.

•The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.

•The file format of the image that can be imported

is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).

•The individual file size limit is 6 MB.

•The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If

the image size is less than 420 × 234 pixels, the

image is displayed in the middle of the screen with

the extra area appearing in black.

•Up to 255 files can be selected.

•If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,

the No files detected message appears.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

216

■Select wallpaper

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type.

3. Move to select Wallpaper.

uThe screen changes to the wallpaper list.

4. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper.

uThe preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.

5. Press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

6. Rotate to select Set, then press .

uThe display will return to the wallpaper list.

■Delete wallpaper

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type.

3. Move to select Wallpaper.

uThe screen changes to the wallpaper list.

4. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press .

uThe preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.

5. Press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

6. Rotate to select Delete, then press .

uThe confirmation message will appear.

7. Rotate to select Yes, then press to delete completely.

uThe display will return to the wallpaper list.

1Wallpaper Setup

From the pop-up menu, rotate to select Preview

and press to see a preview at full-size screen.

To go back to the previous screen, press to select

OK, or press the BACK button.

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be

previewed.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

217

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Audio Settings, then

press .

3. Rotate to select Sound, then press .

Rotate to scroll through the following

choices:

1Adjusting the Sound

The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.

SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle

speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As

you slow down, audio volume decreases.

SETTINGS Button

Speed-sensitive

Volume

Compensation

Subwoofer

Bass

Treble

Fader

Balance

SUBW

SVC

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

218

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup

You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

3. Rotate to select Brightness, then

4. Rotate to adjust the setting.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

3. Rotate to select Background Color,

then press .

4. Rotate to select the setting you want,

then press .

■Changing the Screen Brightness

1Changing the Screen Brightness

You can change the Contrast and Black Level

settings in the same manner.

■Changing the Screen’s Color Theme

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

219

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Continued

Voice Control Operation

Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation of most of

the navigation system functions.

The voice control system uses the (Talk) and (hang-up/back) buttons on the

steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.

To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the navigation voice control

system:

•Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are

using.

•Close the windows and moonroof.

•Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone

on the ceiling.

•Speak clearly in a clear, natural speaking voice without pausing between words.

•Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your

command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.

•Refer to the Voice Help feature.

2Refer to the navigation System Manual

■Voice Recognition

1Voice Control Operation

When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks

what you would like to do. Press and release the

button again to bypass this prompt and give a

command.

1Voice Recognition

The voice control system can only be used from the

driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes

noises from the front passenger’s side.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

220

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

The system accepts these commands on the

Voice Portal screen.

•Call Your contact name

•Call Phone Number

•Find nearest POI category name

•Go home

•Route menu

•Cancel route

The system accepts these commands on any

screen.

•Call by number

•Call by name

Contacts that are imported from your

phone to the vehicle are all made available

by voice. Voice Tags can also be recorded

for each of your Speed Dial entries.

■Voice Portal Commands

■Phone Commands

2Refer to the Navigation System Manual

The system accepts these commands on any

screen.

•Trip computer

•Traffic information

•Display clock

•Display wallpaper

■Navigation Commands

■Info Commands

When the (Talk) button is pressed,

available voice commands appear on the

screen.

For a complete list of commands, say “Voice

Help” after the beep.

■On Screen Commands

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

221

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Continued

The system accepts these commands on

most screens.

•Climate control automatic

•Climate control off

•Air conditioner on

•Air conditioner off

•Climate control defrost on

•Climate control defrost off

•Rear defrost on

•Rear defrost off

•Climate control fresh air

•Climate control recirculate

•Climate control vent

•Climate control bi-level

•Climate control floor

•Climate control floor and defrost

•Fan speed up

•Fan speed down

•Fan speed # (#: 1 to 7)

•Temperature # degrees (#: 57 to 87°F, 15

to 29°C)

•Driver temperature # degrees (#: 57 to

87°F, 15 to 29°C)

•Passenger temperature # degrees (#: 57

to 87°F, 15 to 29°C)

•Temperature up

•Temperature down

■Climate Control Commands

•Driver temperature up

•Driver temperature down

•Passenger temperature up

•Passenger temperature down

•Temperature max heat

•Temperature max cool

•Driver temperature max heat

•Driver temperature max cool

•Passenger temperature max heat

•Passenger temperature max cool

•Climate control sync on

•Climate control sync off

*1: These commands toggle the function on and off, so

your intended action.

The system accepts these commands on

most screens.

■Using Song By Voice

Song By Voice

is a feature that allows you

to select music from your Hard Disc Drive or

iPod® device using your voice.

To activate this mode, you must press the

(Talk) button on the Voice Portal screen

and say:“Music search.”

■Audio Commands

■

Song By Voice

commands

•Music search

•List album (specify album)

•List artist (specify artist)

•List composer (specify composer)

•List genre (specify genre)

•List playlist (specify playlist)

•Play album (specify album)

•Play artist (specify artist)

•Play composer (specify composer)

•Play genre (specify genre)

•Play playlist (specify playlist)

•Play song (specify song)

•What am I listening to?

•Who am I listening to?

•Who is this?

•What’s playing?

•Who’s playing?

•What album is this?

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

the command may not match

222

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■HDD commands

•Hard Disc Drive play

•Hard Disc Drive play track # (#: 1 to 30)

•Hard Disc Drive skip forward

•Hard Disc Drive skip back

•Hard Disc Drive album up

•Hard Disc Drive album down

•Hard Disc Drive track up

•Hard Disc Drive track down

•Hard Disc Drive playlist up

•Hard Disc Drive playlist down

•Hard Disc Drive track random

•Hard Disc Drive track repeat

•Hard Disc Drive track scan

•Hard Disc Drive normal play

•What am I listening to?

•Who am I listening to?

•Who is this?

•What’s playing?

•Who’s playing?

•What album is this?

*2: These commands are available only in the

corresponding playback mode. For example, “Artist”

commands are available only in “Artist” mode.

■Radio commands

•Audio on

•Audio off

•Radio on

•Radio off

•Radio select FM

•Radio select AM

•Radio tune to # FM

(#: frequency from 87.7 to 107.9)

•Radio tune to # AM

(#: frequency from 530 [five thirty] to

1710 [seventeen ten])

•Radio seek up

•Radio seek down

•Radio next station

•Radio preset # (#: 1 to 12)

•Radio FM preset # (#: 1 to 12)

•Radio AM preset # (#: 1 to 6)

•Radio scan

•Radio select XM

•XM channel #

(#: 0 to 255 [two fifty five])

•XM channel down

•XM category up

•XM category down

•XM preset # (#: 1 to 12)

•XM scan

•XM category mode

•XM channel mode

NOTE:

Radio volume levels cannot be controlled

using voice control.

■Disc commands

•Disc play

•Disc play track # (#: 1 to 30)

•Disc skip forward

•Disc skip back

•Disc track random

•Disc track repeat

•Disc track scan

•Disc folder up

•Disc folder down

•Disc folder random

•Disc folder repeat

•Disc folder scan

•Disc normal play

2013 Accord Coupe

*1: These commands toggle the function on and off, so

your intended action.

the command may not match

*1: These commands toggle the function on and off, so

your intended action.

the command may not match

*1: These commands toggle the function on and off, so

your intended action.

the command may not match

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

223

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Continued

■iPod® commands

•iPod play

•iPod play track # (#: 1 to 30)

•iPod skip forward

•iPod skip back

•iPod track shuffle

•iPod album shuffle

•iPod track repeat

•iPod normal play

•What am I listening to?

•Who am I listening to?

•Who is this?

•What’s playing?

•Who’s playing?

•What album is this?

■USB commands

•USB play

•USB play track # (#: 1 to 30)

•USB skip forward

•USB skip back

•USB track random

•USB track repeat

•USB track scan

•USB folder up

•USB folder down

•USB folder random

•USB folder repeat

•USB folder scan

•USB normal play

■Bluetooth® Audio commands

•Bluetooth Audio play

•Bluetooth Audio skip forward

•Bluetooth Audio skip back

•Bluetooth Audio group up

•Bluetooth Audio group down

•Bluetooth Audio pause

•Bluetooth Audio resume

•Bluetooth Audio track random

•Bluetooth Audio track repeat

NOTE:

Bluetooth® Audio commands may not work

on some phones or Bluetooth® Audio

devices.

■AUX commands

•Auxiliary play

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

*1: These commands toggle the function on and off, so

your intended action.

the command may not match

*1: These commands toggle the function on and off, so

your intended action.

the command may not match

224

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■Pandora® commands

The system accepts these commands while

the Pandora® is playing.

•Pandora play

•Pandora skip forward

•Pandora station up

•Pandora station down

•Pandora pause

•Pandora resume

•Pandora thumbs up

•Pandora thumbs down

■Aha

commands

The system accepts these commands while

the Aha

is playing.

•Aha radio play

•Aha radio skip forward

•Aha radio skip back

•Aha radio station up

•Aha radio station down

•Aha radio resume

•Aha radio pause

•Aha radio like

•Aha radio dislike

■Internet service commands

•Internet service play

•Internet service skip forward

•Internet service skip back

•Internet service station up

•Internet service station down

•Internet service resume

•Internet service pause

•Internet service like

•Internet service dislike

*1: The system accepts these commands while the

Internet service is playing.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

225

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Continued

In keyboard screen, letters can be selected

by saying each individual letter or by saying

a keyward phrase. These keyward phrases

are:

■Keyboard Entry Commands ■

Letters

Say . . . Or say . . .

AApple/Alpha

BBoy/Bravo

CCharlie

DDog/Delta

E Edward/Echo

FFrank/Foxtrot

GGeorge/Golf

HHenry/Hotel

IIgloo/India

JJohn/Juliet

KKing/Kilo

LLarry/Lima

MMary/Mike

NNancy/November

OOscar

PPaul/Papa

QQueen/Quebec

RRobert/Romeo

S Sam/Sierra

TTom/Tango

UUncle/Uniform

VVictor

WWilliam/Whiskey

XX-ray

YYellow/Yankee

ZZebra/Zulu

■Numbers

Number . . . Or say . . .

0Zero

1One

2Two

3Three

4Four

5Five

6 Six

7Seven

8Eight

9Nine

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

226

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■Symbols

Symbol . . . Or say . . .

-Hyphen

!Exclamation point

“Double Quote

#Pound

$Dollar

%Percent

&Ampersand

‘Apostrophe

(Open Parenthesis

)Close Parenthesis

~Tilde

/Slash

<Less than

>Greater than

{Open Brace

}Close Brace

■Accented letters

Symbol . . . Or say . . .

ÀA grave

ÂA circumflex

ÄA umlaut

ÇC cedilla

ÈE grave

ÉE acute

ÊE circumflex

ËE umlaut

ÌI grave

ÎI circumflex

ÏI umlaut

ÔO circumflex

ÙU grave

ÛU circumflex

ÜU umlaut

■Punctuation marks

Symbol . . . Or say . . .

@At Sign

^Caret

*Asterisk

_Underscore

`Back Quote

,Comma

.Dot

?Question mark

:Colon

;Semicolon

+Plus

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

227

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Continued

Playing AM/FM Radio

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

Tune Up/Down Icons

Select or to tune the radio

frequency.

MENU Button

Press to display the menu items.

(Power) Button

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Source

Select to change a band or change

an audio source.

To listen to a stored channel,

select 1-6 (AM) or 1-12 (FM).

Presets

Select to store a station.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to search up and

down the selected band for a

station with a strong signal.

Select to display the menu items.

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous

display.

VOL (Volume) Knob

Turn to adjust the volume.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button

Press and turn to tune the radio

frequency.

Move up, down, right and left to

select secondary menu.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

228

To store a station:

1. Tune to the selected station.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select Save Preset, then press .

4. Rotate to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press

and hold .

2. Select More.

3. Select Save Preset.

4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.

■Preset Memory

1Playing AM/FM Radio

You can control the AM/FM radio using voice

commands.

2Voice Control Operation P. 219

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating

stereo FM broadcasts.

Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

Switching the Audio Mode

Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.

2Audio Remote Controls P. 153

You can also switch the mode by pressing the MENU

button and selecting Change Source on the Audio

menu screen.

You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into

the preset memory.

Interface Dial

Audio with Touch Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

229

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

■To find an RDS station from Station List

1. Press the MENU button while listening to an FM station.

2. Rotate to select Station List, then press .

3. Rotate to select the station, then press .

■Manual update

Updates your available station list at any time.

1. Press the MENU button while listening to an FM station.

2. Rotate to select Station List, then press .

3. Rotate to select Refresh, then press .

■Radio Data System (RDS)

1Radio Data System (RDS)

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS

automatically turns on, and the frequency display

changes to the station name. However, when the

signals of that station become weak, the display

changes from the station name to the frequency.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

230

■Radio text

Display the radio text information of the selected RDS station.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .

■Scan

Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Scan, then press .

To turn off scan, press to select Cancel Scan, or press the BACK button.

1. Select More.

2. Select Scan.

To turn off scan, select Cancel Scan.

1Radio text

The text indicator comes on when you received a text

message. The indicator stays on until you read the

message.

Interface Dial

Audio with Touch Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

231

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio

Continued

Playing XM® Radio

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

Category Up/Down Icons

Select or to display and select

an XM® Radio category.

MENU Button

Press to display the menu items.

(Power) Button

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Source

Select to change an audio source.

To listen to a stored channel,

select 1-12.

Presets

Select to store a station.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to the previous

or next channel.

In channel mode, select and hold to

change the channel rapidly.

Select to display the menu items.

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous

display.

VOL (Volume) Knob

Turn to adjust the volume.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button

Press and turn to tune the radio

frequency.

Move up, down, right and left to

select secondary menu.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio

232

1. Select the XM® mode.

2Audio Remote Controls P. 153

2Audio with Touch Screen P. 211

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select XM Tune Mode, then press .

4. Rotate to select Channel Mode or Category Mode, then press .

5. Rotate to select Channel List, then press .

6. Rotate to select a channel from a list, then press .

2. Select More.

3. Select Tune Mode.

4. Select CH Channel Mode or CAT Category Mode.

5. Select a channel using the , , , icons on the tune mode screen or

the preset numbers (1-12) on the preset mode screen.

■To Play the XM® Radio

1Playing XM® Radio

You can control the XM® radio using voice

commands.

2Voice Control Operation P. 219

In the channel mode, all available channels are

selectable. In the category mode, you can select a

channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).

There may be instances when XM® Radio does not

broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This

does not indicate a problem with your audio system.

Interface Dial

Audio with Touch Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

233

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio

To store a station:

1. Tune to the selected station.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select Save Preset, then press .

4. Rotate to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press

and hold .

2. Select More.

3. Select Save Preset.

4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.

■Preset Memory

1Playing XM® Radio

You can store 12 XM® stations into the preset

memory.

Interface Dial

Audio with Touch Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

234

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Playing a CD

Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or

AAC

format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes ® are playable on this unit.

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

MENU Button

Press to display the menu items.

CD Slot

Insert a CD about halfway into the

CD slot.

(CD Eject) Button

Press to eject a CD.

Folder Up/Down Icons

Select to skip to the next folder,

and to skip to the beginning of

the previous folder in MP3, WMA,

or AAC.

Source

Select to change an audio source.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to change tracks

(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).

Select and hold to move rapidly

within a track/file.

Select to display the menu items.

(Power) Button

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous

display.

VOL (Volume) Knob

Turn to adjust the volume.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

Move up, down, right and left to

select secondary menu.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

235

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Music Search, then

press .

3. Rotate , move or , then press to

select a file from the Music Search list.

■How to Select a File from the Music Search List

(MP3/WMA/AAC)

1Playing a CD

NOTICE

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can

cause the CD to jam in the unit.

WMA files protected by digital rights management

(DRM) cannot be played.

The audio system displays Unplayable File, then

skips to the next file.

Text data appears on the display under the following

circumstances:

•When you select a new folder, file, or track.

•When you change the audio mode to CD.

•When you insert a CD.

If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,

the system reloads the CD automatically after several

seconds.

You can control a CD audio using voice commands.

2Voice Control Operation P. 219

Folder Selection

File Selection

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

236

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/

Repeat, then press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.

3. Select a mode.

1. Press the MENU button.

1. Select More.

2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

Scan

Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second

sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.

Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all

tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,

WMA, or AAC).

Random/Repeat

Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in

the current folder.

Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.

Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files

in the current folder in random order.

Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random

order.

Random/Repeat

is selected.

Interface Dial

Random/Repeat

is selected.

Audio with Touch Screen

Interface Dial

Audio with Touch Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

■To turn off a play mode

2. Rotate to select the mode you want

to turn off, then press .

237

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Continued

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

The Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio function plays tracks from music CDs that have

been recorded onto the built-in HDD. You can arrange the tracks in playlists or play

the tracks using various search methods.

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

MENU Button

Press to display the menu items.

CD Slot

Insert a CD about halfway into the

CD slot.

(CD Eject) Button

Press to eject a CD.

Playlist/Album Up/Down Icons

Select to skip to the next playlist/

album, and to skip to the

beginning of the previous playlist/

album.

Source

Select to change an audio source.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to change tracks.

Select and hold to move rapidly

within a track.

Select to display the menu items.

(Power) Button

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous

display or cancel a setting.

VOL (Volume) Knob

Turn to adjust the volume.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

Move up, down, right and left to

select secondary menu.

SETTINGS Button

Press to go the Setting menu screen.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

238

The songs on music CDs are automatically recorded by factory default to the HDD

the first time you play each disc. You can then play the songs directly from the HDD.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Cancel Record to HDD, then press .

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Rec to HDD, then press .

■Recording a Music CD to HDD

1Recording a Music CD to HDD

You can add tracks to user playlists, where you can

mix and match tracks from other CDs recorded on

the HDD.

2Editing an Album or Playlist P. 241

2Editing Track Information P. 244

If you stop the engine or the power system is turned

off while recording a CD, there may be pauses

between songs when you play back from the HDD.

Repeat, random, and scan functions are not available

during recording.

You can play music from other sources (e.g., XM,

HDD, etc.) while recording.

Please note that there is no compensation offered in

the case of unsuccessful recording of audio data or

the loss of audio data due to any cause whatsoever.

Clearing the HDD

Any music tracks stored on the HDD can be deleted.

2Deleting all HDD Data P. 310

■Stop Recording

■Recording a CD Manually

Recording Indicator

Recording

Ready to record

1Recording a CD Manually

Use this feature to set up the music search abilities

when using Song By Voice™ (SBV) commands.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

239

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Music Search, then

press .

3. Rotate , move or , then press to

select a track from the Music Search list.

uTitle information is displayed if found in

the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote®

Media Database) stored on the HDD.

uThe HDD has two types of playlists:

original playlists and user playlists. An

original playlist is automatically created

for each album when a music CD is

recorded. You can customize up to six

user playlists provided on the HDD by

adding tracks from your original playlists.

■How to Select a Track from the Music Search List

1How to Select a Track from the Music Search List

You can control the HDD audio using voice

commands.

2Voice Control Operation P. 219

2Song By Voice

(SBV) P. 251

Music tracks recorded on HDD cannot be recorded

onto CDs or other devices.

Tracks are recorded at four times the playback speed

using ultra-efficient compression technology;

therefore, sound quality may vary slightly from the

original.

If the HDD is ever replaced, all music data is lost and

cannot be recovered.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the display.

2Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio P. 264

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

240

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/

Repeat, then press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.

3. Select a mode.

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the MENU button.

1. Select More.

2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

Scan

Scan Albums: Provides 10-second sampling of the

first track in each album.

Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all

tracks on HDD.

Random/Repeat

Repeat Album: Repeats all tracks in the current

album.

Repeat Track: Repeats the current track.

Random in Album: Plays all tracks in the current

album in random order.

Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks in random order.

Random/Repeat

is selected.

Interface Dial

Random/Repeat

is selected.

Audio with Touch Screen

Interface Dial

Audio with Touch Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

2. Rotate to select the mode you want

to turn off, then press .

Continued

241

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Change the playlist name, album name, genre, and track order of the current

playlist. You can also delete tracks, playlists, and albums.

■Editing an album

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Edit/Delete, then

3. Rotate to select Albums, then press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

4. To edit an album name:

Rotate to select Edit name, then

uEnter the name using the interface dial or

the audio with touch screen.

To delete an album:

Rotate to select Delete, then press .

To edit track information or delete a track:

Rotate to select List Tracks, then

2Editing Track Information P. 244

■Editing an Album or Playlist

1Editing an Album or Playlist

The maximum number of songs in each of the six

user playlists is 999. Adding new songs overwrites

the oldest songs.

The maximum number of original playlists is 999 with

a maximum of 99 songs in each playlist.

Each album CD counts as an original playlist. Adding

a track from a user playlist into the same user playlist

will cause the track to appear twice in the playlist.

Deleting an album (original playlist) also deletes the

album tracks you have stored in any user playlists.

Deleting a user playlist or deleting all tracks from a

user playlist does not remove the playlist folder.

The folder retains the playlist name and artist

information.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

242

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

■Editing a playlist

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Edit/Delete, then

3. Rotate to select Playlists, then

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

4. To edit a playlist name:

Rotate to select Edit name, then

uEnter the name using the interface dial or

the audio with touch screen.

To delete a playlist:

Rotate to select Delete, then press .

To edit track information or delete a track:

Rotate to select List Tracks, then

2Editing Track Information P. 244

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

243

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Continued

■Creating a new playlist

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Edit/Delete, then

3. Rotate to select Playlists, then

4. Rotate to select Create New Playlist,

then press .

uEnter the name using the interface dial or

the audio with touch screen, then select

tracks from the Music Search list.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

244

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Change the track title, artist name, genre and composer. You can also delete tracks.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Edit/Delete, then

3. Rotate to select Tracks, then press .

4. Rotate to select a track you want to edit

or delete, then press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

5. To edit track information:

Rotate to select Edit name, then

uEnter the track name, track artist, etc.

using the interface dial or the audio with

touch screen. Move , rotate to

select OK, then press .

To delete a track:

Rotate to select Delete, then press .

■Editing Track Information

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

245

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Continued

Music information (album name, artist name, genre) can be acquired by accessing

the Gracenote® Album Info.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Edit/Delete, then

3. Rotate to select Albums, then press .

4. Rotate to select an album you want to

edit, then press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

5. Rotate to select Edit name, then

6. Move to select Get Music Info, then

press .

uThe system starts to access the

Gracenote® Album Info.

■Displaying Music Information

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

246

Update the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote® Media Database) that is included

with the navigation system.

1. Insert the update disc into the disc slot or

connect the USB flash drive that includes

the update.

2. Press the SETTINGS button in the HDD

mode.

3. Rotate to select Audio Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select

Gracenote Album DB Info Update.

4. Rotate to select Update from CD or

Update from USB, then press .

uThe system starts updating and the

confirmation message appears on the

screen. Press to finish.

■Updating Gracenote® Album Info

1Updating Gracenote® Album Info

To acquire updated files:

•Consult a dealer.

•U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com.

•Canada: Visit www.hondanavi.ca.

Once you perform an update, any information you

edited before will be overwritten or erased.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

247

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Continued

Playing an iPod®

Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB port, then select the iPod

mode.

2USB Port P. 149

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

MENU Button

Press to display the menu items.

Album Bar

Select to search for an album.

Source

Select to change an audio source.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to change songs.

Select and hold to move rapidly

within a song.

Select to display the menu items.

(Power) Button

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous

display.

VOL (Volume) Knob

Turn to adjust the volume.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

Move up, down, right and left to

select secondary menu.

USB Indicator

Appears when an iPod® is connected.

Album Art

Album Art Icon

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

248

1. Select the album bar.

uThe image of the current album is displayed.

2. Select or icon to search for an album.

uWhen the album image you are looking for appears, select it to play.

■How to Select an Album

1How to Select an Album

You cannot select an album while the vehicle is

moving.

Select to go back to the previous screen.

Select an album

image.

Select the

album bar.

Album Bar Album Image

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

249

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Music Search, then

press .

3. Rotate , move or , then press to

select a song from the Music Search list.

■How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

You can control an iPod® using voice commands.

2Voice Control Operation P. 219

2Song By Voice

(SBV) P. 251

Available operating functions vary on models or

versions. Some functions may not be available on the

vehicle's audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 265

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

250

You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Shuffle/Repeat, then

press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select Shuffle/Repeat.

3. Select a mode.

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select the mode you want to

turn off, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.

Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a

selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,

or composers) in random order.

Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a

selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,

or composers) in random order.

Interface Dial

Audio with Touch Screen

Interface Dial

Audio with Touch Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

251

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By Voice

(SBV)

Continued

Song By Voice

(SBV)

Use SBV to search for and play music from your HDD or iPod® using voice

commands.

■To enable SBV

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

3. Rotate to select Song by Voice, then

press .

4. Rotate to select On or Off, then

1Song By Voice

(SBV)

Setting options:

•On (factory default): Song By Voice commands are

available.

•Off: Disable the feature.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By Voice

(SBV)

252

■Searching for music using SBV

1. Set the Song by Voice setting to On.

2. Press the (Talk) button and say “Music

Search” to activate the SBV feature for the

HDD and iPod®.

3. Press the button and say a command.

uExample 1: Say “(List) ‘Artist A’“ to view a

list of songs by that artist. Select the

desired song to start playing.

uExample 2: Say “Play ‘Artist A’“ to start

playing songs by that artist.

4. To cancel SBV, press the (hang-up/back)

button on the steering wheel. The selected

song continues playing.

Once you have canceled this mode, you need

to press the button and say “Music Search”

again to re-activate this mode.

1Searching for music using SBV

Song By Voice

Commands List

2Song By Voice

commands P. 221

NOTE:

Song By Voice

commands are available for tracks

stored on the HDD or iPod®.

You can add phonetic modifications of difficult

words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists,

songs, albums, and composers in voice commands.

2Phonetic Modification P. 253

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

253

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By Voice

(SBV)

Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV

to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when

searching for music on the HDD or iPod®.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings,

then press .

3. Rotate to select Song by Voice

Phonetic Modification, then press .

4. Move and rotate to select New

Modification, then press .

5. Rotate to select HDD or iPod, then

press .

■Phonetic Modification

1Phonetic Modification

Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By

Voice is set to Off.

You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification

items.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

254

uuAudio System Basic Operationu

6. Rotate to select the item to modify

(e.g., Artist), then press .

uThe list of the selected item appears on

the screen.

7. Rotate to select an entry (e.g., No

Name), then press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the

screen.

uThe listen to the current phonetic

modification, rotate to select Play,

then press .

uTo delete the current phonetic

modification, rotate to select

Delete, then press .

8. Rotate to select Modify, then

9. Enter the phonetic spelling you wish to

use (e.g., “Artist A”) when prompted.

10. Move to select OK to exit.

uThe artist “No Name” is phonetically

modified to “Artist A.” When in the SBV

mode, you can press the (Talk)

button and use the voice command

“Play ‘Artist A’” to play songs by the

artist “No Name.”

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

255

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

Continued

Playing Internet Radio

Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.

You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port.

Make sure the audio setting is correct for the connection type.

2USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority

P. 305

Select Source to select Pandora or Aha mode.

U.S. models

Compatible phones only

1Playing Internet Radio

Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade

dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of

Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora

is currently available exclusively in the United States.

iPhone

Audio/Information Screen

Album Art

USB Indicator

Appears when a phone is

connected.

Rating Icon

Audio with Touch Screen

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

Skip Icon

Select to skip a song.

Select to display the menu items.

Station Up/Down Icons

Select to change a station.

Source

Select Pandora® or Aha

Play/Pause Icon

Select to resume or play a song.

Like/Dislike Icons

Select to evaluate a song.

(Power) Button

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

VOL (Volume) Knob

Turn to adjust the volume.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button

Press and turn to select an item, then press

to set your selection. Move up, down, right

and left to select secondary menu.

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

256

You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio

system. The available items are:

■Operating a menu item

The menu items are shown in the lower half of

the audio/information screen.

Rotate to select an item and press .

To select Change Source, press the MENU

button, then press .

■Pandora® Menu

•Skip Forward •Dislike

•Play/Pause •Bookmark This Song

•Station List •Bookmark This Artist

•Like •Change Source

1Playing Internet Radio

To find out if your phone is compatible with this

feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

(888) 528-7876.

Pandora® is a personalized Internet radio service that

selects music based on an artist, song, or genre a user

enters, and streams what is likely to be of interest.

To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app

must first be installed on your phone. Visit

www.pandora.com. for more information.

If you cannot operate Pandora

through the audio system,

it may be streaming through

Bluetooth

Audio. Make sure

Pandora

mode on your audio system is selected.

1Pandora® Menu

You can control Pandora® using voice commands.

2Voice Control Operation P. 219

Available operating functions vary on software

versions. Some functions may not be available on the

vehicle's audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2Pandora® P. 266

There are restrictions on the number of songs you

can skip or dislike in a given hour.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

257

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

You can operate some of the Aha

menu items from your vehicle’s audio system.

The available items are:

■Operating a menu item

The menu items are shown in the lower half of

the audio/information screen.

Rotate to select an item and press .

To select Change Source or Stations, press

the MENU button, then press .

■Aha

•Like •View text

•Dislike •View list

•Play/Pause •Reply

•15sec Back •Change Source

•30sec Skip •Stations

1Aha

Aha

by Harman is a cloud-based service that

organizes your favorite web content into live radio

stations. You can access podcasts, internet radio,

location-based services, and audio updates from

social media sites.

You can control Aha

using voice commands.

2Voice Control Operation P. 219

Available operating functions vary on software

versions. Some functions may not be available on the

vehicle's audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2Aha

P. 268

The menu items vary depending on the station you

selected.

To use this service in your vehicle, the HondaLink app

must be installed on your phone. Visit

owners.honda.com/apps for more information.

You must have a previously set up Aha account prior

to using the service in your vehicle. Visit

www.aharadio.com for more information.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

258

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,

WMA, or AAC

format.

Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.

2USB Port P. 149

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes ® are playable on this unit.

Audio/Information Screen

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

Select to display the menu items.

Source

Select to change an audio source.

USB Indicator

Appears when a USB flash drive

is connected.

Folder Up/Down Icons

Select to skip to the next folder,

and to skip to the beginning of

the previous folder.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to change files.

Select and hold to move rapidly

within a file.

(Power) Button

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

VOL (Volume) Knob

Turn to adjust the volume.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button

Press and turn to select an item, then press

to set your selection. Move up, down, right

and left to select secondary menu.

Audio with Touch Screen

MENU Button

Press to display the menu items.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

259

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Music Search, then

press .

3. Rotate , move or , then press to

select a file from the Music Search list.

■How to Select a File from the Music Search List

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

You can control a USB flash drive using voice

commands.

2Voice Control Operation P. 219

Use the recommended USB flash drives.

2General Information on the Audio System

P. 269

Files in WMA format protected by digital rights

management (DRM) are not played.

The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then

skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 265

Folder Selection

File Selection

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

260

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/

Repeat, then press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select Random/Repeat.

3. Select a mode.

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select the mode you want to

turn off, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

Scan

Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the

first file in each of the main folders.

Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files

in the current folder.

Random/Repeat

Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.

Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.

Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder

in random order.

Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.

Random/Repeat

is selected.

Interface Dial

Random/Repeat

is selected.

Audio with Touch Screen

Interface Dial

Audio with Touch Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

261

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Continued

Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible

phone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

2Phone Setup P. 356

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming

audio capabilities are compatible with the system.

For a list of compatible phones:

•U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

1-888-528-7876.

•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call

In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data

device functions while driving.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,

there will be a delay before the system begins to play.

You can control Bluetooth® Audio using voice

commands.

2Voice Control Operation P. 219

Bluetooth Indicator

Appears when your

phone is connected

to HFL.

Audio/

Information

Screen

Audio with Touch

Screen

Play IconPause Icon

Select to display

the menu items.

Source

Select to change

an audio source.

(Power) Button

Press to turn the

audio system on and

off.

VOL (Volume)

Knob

Turn to adjust the

volume.

Interface Dial/

ENTER Button

Press and turn to

select an item,

then press to set

your selection.

Move up, down,

right and left to

select secondary

menu.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or

to change files.

MENU Button

Press to display

the menu items.

Folder Up/Down

Icons

Select or to

change folders.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

1-888-528-7876.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

262

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and

connected to HFL.

2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.

If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-

compatible phone, which is not compatible

for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be

connected.

■To pause or resume a file

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Play or Pause, then

press .

Select the play icon or pause icon.

Press the (pick-up) button on the steering

wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio

is playing.

2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 350

Press the (hang-up/back) button to end

the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio.

■To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your

phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating

instructions.

The pause function may not be available on some

phones.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing

from your phone.

■Switching to HFL

Interface Dial

Audio with Touch Screen

1Switching to HFL

If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the

pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.

Button

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

263

Audio Error Messages

CD Player

If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.

Error Message Cause Solution

Unplayable File Track/file format not supported

●

Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file

plays automatically.

Bad Disc

Please Check Owner’s

Manual

Push Eject Mechanical error

●

Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the

error message is cleared.

●

Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the

disc again.

2Protecting CDs P. 271

●

If the error message reappears, press the button, and pull out

the disc.

●

Insert a different disc.

If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.

●

If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,

contact a dealer.

Do not try to force the disc out of the player.

Mecha Error

Bad Disc

Please Check Owner’s

Manual

Servo error

Check Disc Disc error

●

Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.

2Protecting CDs P. 271

Heat Error High temperature

●

Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until

the error message is cleared.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

264

uuAudio Error MessagesuHard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

If an error occurs while playing the Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio, you may see the

following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message Solution

Navigation system is suspended due to low air pressure.

System will resume when vehicle moves to an area of lower

altitude.

The HDD is inoperable due to low atmospheric pressure. Move

your vehicle to a lower altitude where atmospheric pressure is

higher.

HDD access error.

Please consult your dealer. —

The navigation system temperature is too high. For

protection, the system will shut off until it cools down.

Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until

the error message is cleared.

The navigation system temperature is too low. For

protection, the system will shut off until it warms up.

The navigation system has difficulty reading the HDD when the

temperature is below approximately -22°F (-30°C). The navigation

system starts up automatically when the display warms up.

Unplayable File Appears when a file format not supported. Current track will be

skipped. The next supported track plays automatically.

Models with navigation system

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

265

uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod®/USB Flash Drive

iPod®/USB Flash Drive

If an error occurs while playing an iPod® or USB flash drive, you may see the

following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message Solution

USB Error Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible with the

USB adapter unit.

Incompatible USB Device

Please Check Owner’s

Manual

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system

off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

Unsupported Version Appears when an unsupported iPod® is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod® is connected,

update the iPod® software to the newer version.

Connect Retry Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod®. Reconnect the iPod®.

Unplayable File Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message

appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.

No Data

Appears when the iPod® is empty.

Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash

drive.

Check that compatible files are stored on the device.

Unsupported Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is

connected, reconnect the device.

iPod®

USB flash drive

iPod® and USB flash drive

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

266

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®

Pandora®

If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.

If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message Solution

Incompatible USB Device

Please Check Owner’s Manual

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect

the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it again. Do

not reconnect the device that caused the error.

There is no station list in the device.

Please add the station list to your device.

No stations have been created.

Please create a station on the device.

Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device

to create a station.

The time that was able to be reproduced in one month was

exceeded.

Appears when you try to skip a song or select Dislike over the

predetermined number of times in a month.

Unfortunately our music licenses force us to limit the number

of songs you may skip each hour.

If you want to hear something else, select another station

starting with a different artist or song.

Music licenses force us to limit the number of tracks you may

skip each hour.

Appears when you try to skip a song or select Dislike over the

predetermined number of times in an hour.

U.S. models

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

267

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®

Error Message Solution

Unable to save rating.

Unable to save bookmark

Unable to skip

Appears when the commanded operation is failed. Try again later.

No data Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated.

Reboot the app and reconnect the device.

PANDORA ver unsupport Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update

Pandora® to the latest version.

PANDORA system maintenance Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again

later.

Cannot connect to PANDORA when stopped. Check your

mobile phone

Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check your

device.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

268

uuAudio Error MessagesuAha

Aha

If an error occurs while playing Aha

, you may see the following error messages.

If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message Solution

Cannot connect to HondaLink. When stopped, check your

mobile device. Appears when the Aha

app is not activated. Check your device.

Incompatible USB Device

Please Check Owner’s Manual

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect

the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it on again.

Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

U.S. models with the touch screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

269

General Information on the Audio System

XM® Radio Service

1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in

the display: Turn the selector knob or the interface dial until 0 appears.

2. Have your radio ID and credit card number ready, and either call or visit the XM®

website to subscribe.

Switch to the XM® mode by pressing the SOURCE button repeatedly or operating

the audio with touch screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the

service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.

Loading:

XM® is loading the audio or program information.

Ch off air:

The channel is not currently broadcasting.

Ch unauthorized:

XM® radio is receiving information update from the network.

No signal:

The signal is too weak in the current location.

Ch unavailable:

No such channel exists, the channel is not part of your subscription, or the artist or

title information is unavailable.

Check antenna:

There is a problem with the XM® antenna. Contact a dealer.

■Subscribing to XM® Radio

■Receiving XM® Radio

■XM® Radio Display Messages

1Subscribing to XM® Radio

Contact Information for XM® Radio:

US: XM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com or

Canada: XM® Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or

1Receiving XM® Radio

The XM® satellites are in orbit over the equator;

therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause

satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are

more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and

mountains the farther north you travel from the

equator.

You may experience reception problems under the

following circumstances:

•In a location with an obstruction to the south of

your vehicle.

•In tunnels

•On the lower level of a multi-tiered road

•Large items carried on the roof rack

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

(800) 852-9696

(877) 209-0079

270

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs

Recommended CDs

•Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use.

•Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed.

•Play only standard round-shaped CDs.

•Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.

•Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.

1Recommended CDs

A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded

under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not

play either.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos:

5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and

worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the

Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are

registered trademarks & DTS 2.0 Channel is a

trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software.

■CDs with MP3, WMA, or AAC files

The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.

Also includes:

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

271

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs

■Protecting CDs

Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs:

•Store a CD in its case when it is not being played.

•When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge.

•Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.

•Never insert foreign objects into the CD player.

•Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.

•Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.

•Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.

1Protecting CDs

NOTICE

Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside

and damage the audio unit.

Examples:

●

Damaged CDs

Bubbled/

Wrinkled

With Label/

Sticker

Using

Printer Label

Kit

Sealed With Plastic Ring

●

Poor quality

CDs

Chipped/

Cracked

Warped Burrs

●

Small CDs

3-inch

(8-cm)

●

Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and

excessively thick CDs

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

272

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod®, iPhone®, and USB Flash Drives

Compatible iPod®, iPhone®, and USB Flash Drives

*1: Models with one display

*2: Models with two display or the navigation system

•Use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher.

•Some digital audio players may not be compatible.

•Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.

•Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.

•Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.

■iPod® and iPhone® Model Compatibility

Model

iPod® (5th generation)

iPod classic® 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)

iPod classic® 120GB (launch in 2008)

iPod classic® 160GB (launch in 2009)

iPod nano® (1st to 6th generation) launch in 2010

iPod touch® (1st to 4th generation) launch in 2010

iPhone® 3G/iPhone® 3GS/iPhone® 4/iPhone® 4S

iPhone® 3G/iPhone® 4/iPhone® 4S

■USB Flash Drives

1iPod® and iPhone® Model Compatibility

This system may not work with all software versions

of these devices.

1USB Flash Drives

Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored

order. This order may be different from the order

displayed on your PC or device.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

273

Continued

Customized Features

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

■How to customize

With the ignition switch is in ON (w

, press the SETTINGS button. Rotate to

select Audio Settings, Phone Settings, Camera Settings, Vehicle Settings,

System Settings or Info Settings and press .

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1Customized Features

When you customize settings:

•Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.

•Shift to (P.

•Set the parking brake.

To customize other features, rotate , and press .

2List of customizable options P. 287

Models without navigation system

Automatic transmission/CVT models

Manual transmission models

Models with one display

SETTINGS Button

Audio/Information Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

274

uuCustomized Featuresu

With the power mode in ON, press and hold the DISP button. Rotate to select

Audio Settings, Phone Settings, Camera Settings, Vehicle Settings, System

Settings or Info Settings and press .

Models with two displays

DISP Button

Audio/Information Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

275

uuCustomized Featuresu

■How to customize

With the power mode in ON, press the SETTINGS button. Rotate to select

Audio Settings, Phone Settings, Camera Settings, Vehicle Settings, System

Settings, Info Settings, or Navi Settings and press .

1Customized Features

When you customize settings:

•Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.

•Shift to (P.

•Set the parking brake.

To customize other features, rotate , move , ,

or , and press .

2List of customizable options P. 297

Models with navigation system

Automatic transmission/CVT models

Manual transmission models

Models with navigation system

SETTINGS Button

Audio/Information Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

276

uuCustomized Featuresu

■Customization flow

Models without navigation system

Clock Format

Background Color

Header Clock Display

Factory data reset

Clock Adjustment

Press the SETTINGS button.

Press and hold the DISP button.

Models with one display

Models with two displays

Language

Default

Edit Pairing Code

Bluetooth On/Off

Bluetooth Device List

Voice Prompt

Brightness

Contrast

Black level

Beep

Clock/

Wallpaper

Type

Clock Type

Wallpaper

System

Settings

Voice

Recog

Bluetooth

Display

Clock

Other

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

277

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

“Trip A” Reset Timing

Keyless Access Light Flash

Auto Light Sensitivity

Auto Door Lock

Auto Door Unlock

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Forward Collision Warning

Distance

Door Unlock Mode

Interior Light Dimming Time

Headlight Auto Off Timer

Memory Position Link

Keyless Start Guidance Screens

Key And Remote Unlock Mode

Keyless Lock Answer Back

Security Relock Timer

Maintenance Reset

Default

Vehicle

Settings

Driver Assist System Setup

Meter

Setup

TPMS Calibration

Driving Position Setup

Keyless

Access

Setup

Lighting

Setup

Door

Setup

Maintenance Info.

Keyless Access Beep

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

278

uuCustomized Featuresu

Wallpaper

Source Select Popup

Clock Type

Sound

Default

Cover Art

Connect Bluetooth Audio Device

Bluetooth Device List

USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority

Default

Clock Adjustment

Clock Format

Audio

Settings

Clock/

Wallpaper

Type

Info

Settings

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

279

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

Add Bluetooth Device

Disconnect

Edit Speed Dial

Auto Transfer

Auto Answer

Ring Tone

Automatic Phone Sync

Default

Use Contact Photo

Enable Text Message

Enable Text/Email

Select Account

Message Auto Reading

New Text Message Alert

New Text/Email Alert

*1: Models with one display

*2: Models with two displays

Phone

Settings

Connect

Phone

Text

Message

Text/Email

Bluetooth

Device

List

Phone

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

280

uuCustomized Featuresu

Display

Show with Turn Signal

Reference Lines

Default

Fixed Guideline

Dynamic Guideline

Camera

Settings

LaneWatch

Rear

Camera

Brightness

Contrast

Black Level

Color

Tint

*1: Models with two displays

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

281

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

■Customization flow

Models with navigation system

Song by Voice

Song by Phonetic Modification

Phonebook Phonetic Modification

Press the SETTINGS button.

Volume

Voice Prompt

Message Auto Reading

Volume

Interface Dial Feedback

Verbal Reminder

Brightness

Contrast

Black level

Bluetooth Status

Bluetooth Device List

Edit Pairing Code

Default

Sound/

Beep

Display

System

Settings

Bluetooth

Voice

Recog.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

282

uuCustomized Featuresu

System Device Information

Factory data reset

Background Color

Header Clock Display

Clock Reset

Auto Time Zone

Auto Daylight

Clock

Clock Adjustment

Clock Format

Clock

Units

Language

Voice Command Tips

Others

Wallpaper

Clock/Wallpaper

Type

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

283

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

“Trip A” Reset Timing

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

Forward Collision

Warning Distance

Keyless Start Guidance Screens

Default

Memory Position Link

Door Unlock Mode

Keyless Access Light Flash

Interior Light Dimming Time

Headlight Auto Off Timer

Auto light Sensitivity

Key And Remote Unlock Mode

Keyless Lock Answer Back

Security Relock Timer

Auto Door Lock

Auto Door Unlock

Maintenance Reset

TPMS Calibration

Vehicle

Settings

Meter

Setup

Driving Position Setup

Keyless

Access

Setup

Lighting

Setup

Door

Setup

Maintenance Info.

Keyless Access Beep

Driver Assist System Setup

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

284

uuCustomized Featuresu

Show with Turn Signal

Reference Lines

Next Maneuver Pop up

Default

Fixed Guideline

Dynamic Guideline

Default

Sound

Source Select Setup

HD Radio Mode

Cover Art

Connect Bluetooth Audio Device

Bluetooth Device List

Recording from CD

Recording Quality

HDD Info

Gracenote Album DB Info Update

Update Gracenote Album Info

Delete all HDD Data

USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority

Camera

Settings

Rear

Camera

LaneWatch

Audio

Settings

Display Brightness

Contrast

Black Level

Color

Tint

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

285

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

Add Bluetooth

Device

Disconnect

Default

Phone Connect phone

Edit Bluetooth

Device

Add Bluetooth

Device

Bluetooth Device

List

Edit Speed Dial

Auto Transfer

Auto Answer

Ring Tone

Automatic Phone Sync

Use Contact Photo

Default

Enable Text/Email

Select Account

New Text/Email Alert

Text/Email

Phone

Settings

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

286

uuCustomized Featuresu

Auto Daylight

Clock Reset

INFO Screen Preference

Clock Format

Auto Time Zone

Clock/Wallpaper Type

Clock Adjustment

Clock

Default

Others

Info

Settings

Navi

Settings See Navigation System Manual.

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

287

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

■List of customizable options

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System

Settings

Display

Brightness Changes the brightness of the audio/information

screen. —

Contrast Changes the contrast of the audio/information

screen. —

Black level Changes the black level of the audio/information

screen. —

Beep Selects whether a beeper sounds or not when

you operate the selector knob. On

/Off

Blue-

tooth

Bluetooth On/Off Turns the Bluetooth® on and off. On

/Off

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a

paired phone, and create a security PIN.

2Phone Setup P. 321

—

Edit Pairing Code Changes a pairing code.

2To change the pairing code setting P. 323 Random

/Fixed

Voice

Recog Voice Prompt Turns the voice prompt on and off. Beginner

/Expert

Models without navigation system

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

288

uuCustomized Featuresu

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System

Settings

Clock

Clock/

Wallpaper

Type

Clock Type Changes the clock display type. Analog/Digital

Small Digital/Off

Wallpaper

●

Changes the wallpaper type.

●

Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.

●

Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.

2Wallpaper Setup P. 157 P.184

Blank/Galaxy

Metallic/Time Zone/

Add New

Clock Adjustment Adjust Clock.

2Setting the Clock P. 84 —

Clock Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H

/24H

Other

Language Changes the display language. English

/French/

Spanish

Background Color Changes the background color of the audio/

information screen and the audio with touch screen

Blue

/Amber/Red/

Green

Header Clock Display Selects whether the clock display comes on or not. On

/Off

Factory data reset Resets all the settings to their factory default.

2Defaulting All the Settings P. 308 Yes/No

Default Cancels /Resets all customized items in the

System Settings group as default. Yes/No

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

289

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle

Settings

TPMS Calibration Cancels/Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel

/Calibrate

Driver

Assist

System

Setup

Forward Collision Warning

Distance

Changes at which distance FCW alerts, or turns

FCW on and off.

Long/Normal

Short/Off

Meter

Setup

Adjust Outside Temp.

Display

Adjust the temperature reading by a few

degrees.

-5°F ~ ±0°F

~ +5°F

(U.S.)

-3°C ~ ±0°C

~ +3°C

(Canada)

“Trip A” Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A

and average fuel economy A.

With Refuel/IGN Off/

Manually Reset

“Trip B” Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B

and average fuel economy B.

With Refuel/IGN Off/

Manually Reset

Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turn the ambient meter feature on and off. On

/Off

Keyless Start Guidance

Screens

Displays the push button start guidance when

conditions are met to change power mode. On

/Off

Driving

Position

Setup

Memory Position Link Changes the driver’s seat position to a stored

setting. On

/Off

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

290

uuCustomized Featuresu

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle

Settings

Keyless

Access

Setup

Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors unlock when you grab the

driver’s door handle.

Driver Door Only

All Doors

Keyless Access Light Flash Causes some exterior lights to blink when you

unlock/lock the doors. On

/Off

Keyless Access Beep Sets the beeper sound or not when you grab

either front door handle. On

/Off

Lighting

Setup

Interior Light Dimming

Time

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay

on after you close the doors.

60seconds/

30seconds

15seconds

Headlight Auto Off Timer Changes the length of time the exterior lights

stay on after you close the driver's door.

60seconds/

30seconds/

15seconds

0seconds

Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come

on.

Max/High/Mid

Low/Min

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

291

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

*1:Default Setting

*2:Automatic transmission/CVT models

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle

Settings

Door

Setup

Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for the automatic locking

feature.

With Vehicle Speed

Shift from P

/Off

Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for when the doors unlock

automatically.

All Doors When

Driver’s Door Opens

All Doors When

Shifted to Park

/All

Doors When Ignition

Switched Off/Off

Key And Remote Unlock

Mode

Sets up either the driver's door or both doors to

unlock on the first push of the remote.

Driver Door

/All

Doors

Keyless Lock Answer Back LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.

LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds. On

/Off

Security Relock Timer

Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock

and the security system to set after you unlock

the vehicle without opening either door.

90seconds/

60seconds/

30seconds

Mainte-

nance

Info.

Maintenance Reset Resets the engine oil life display when you have

performed the maintenance service. —

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

Vehicle Settings group as default. Yes/No

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

292

uuCustomized Featuresu

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Audio

Settings

Sound Adjusts the settings of the audio speaker’s sound.

2Adjusting the Sound P. 159 P. 186

-6 ~ C

~ +6 (Bass,

Treble, Fader, Balance

and SUBW

), Off/Low/

Mid

/High (SVC)

Source Select Popup

Selects whether the list of selectable audio sources

comes on or not when the AUDIO button is pressed.

Selects whether the list of selectable audio

sources comes on or not when Audio is selected

on the Function Change screen.

On/Off

Cover Art Turns on and off the cover art display. On

/Off

Connect Bluetooth Audio Device

Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®

Audio device to HFL. —

Bluetooth Device List

Edits or deletes a Bluetooth® Audio device paired

to HFL. —

USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority

Selects the connection to have priority. Bluetooth/USB

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio

Settings group as default. Yes/No

Models with one display

Models with two displays

iPod®, USB, Pandora® or Aha

mode

Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or Aha

mode

Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or Aha

mode

iPod®, Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or Aha

mode

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

293

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Info

Settings

Clock/

Wall-

paper

type

Clock Type

See System Settings on P. 287 to P. 288

Wallpaper

Clock Adjustment

Clock Format

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info

Settings group as default. Yes/No

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

294

uuCustomized Featuresu

*1:Default Setting

*2:Models with two displays

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Phone

Settings

Connect Phone

Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or

disconnects a paired phone.

2Phone Setup P. 321

—

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a

paired phone, or creates a security PIN.

2Phone Setup P. 321

—

Phone

Edit Speed Dial Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

2Speed Dial P. 332 —

Auto Transfer Sets calls to automatically transfer from your

phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle. On

/Off

Auto Answer Sets whether to automatically answer an

incoming call after about four seconds. On/Off

Ring Tone Selects the ring tone. Fixed/Mobile

Phone

/Off

Automatic Phone Sync Sets a phonebook data to be automatically

imported when a phone is paired to HFL. On

/Off

Use Contact Photo

Displays a caller’s picture on an incoming call

screen. On

/Off

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

295

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

*1:Default Setting

*2:Models with one display

*3:Models with two displays

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Phone

Settings

Text/

Message

Text/

Enable Text Message

Enable Text/Email

Turns the text message/E-mail function on and

off. On

/Off

Select Account

Selects a mail or text message account. —

New Text Message Alert

New Text/Email Alert

Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the

screen when HFL receives a new text message/E-

mail.

On/Off

Message Auto Reading

Sets the system to automatically read an

incoming text message/E-mail.

●

On- A text message/E-mail is always read

aloud.

●

Off- A text message/E-mail is not read aloud.

●

Auto- A text message/E-mail is read aloud only

when driving.

On/Off/Auto

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone

Settings group as default. Yes/No

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

296

uuCustomized Featuresu

*1:Default Setting

*2:Models with two displays

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Camera

Settings

Lane-

Watch

Show with Turn Signal Select whether the LaneWatch display comes on

when you move the turn signal lever to the

passenger side. On

/Off

Reference Lines Selects whether the reference lines come on on

the LaneWatch monitor. On

/Off

Display

Brightness

Adjusts the LaneWatch display settings. —

Contrast

Black Level

Color

Tint

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

LaneWatch group as default. Yes/No

Rear

Camera

Fixed Guideline Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on or

not on the rear camera monitor. On

/Off

Dynamic Guideline Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on

or not on the rear camera monitor. On

/Off

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear

Camera group as default. Yes/No

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

Camera Settings group as default. Yes/No

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

297

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

■List of customizable options

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System

Settings

Display

Brightness Changes the brightness of the audio/information

screen. —

Contrast Changes the contrast of the audio/information

screen. —

Black Level Changes the black level of the audio/information

screen. —

Sound/

Beep

Volume Changes the volume of the audio speakers. —

Interface Dial Feedback

Sets if and when the system reads aloud a

selection made using the Interface Dial. On

/Off/Auto

Message Auto Reading

Selects whether the system automatically read

out message, does not read, or read out only

when driving.

/Off/Auto

Verbal Reminder

Turns the verbal reminders on and off. On

/Off

Blue-

tooth

Bluetooth Turns the Bluetooth® on and off. On

/Off

Bluetooth Device List Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a

paired phone, and create a security PIN.

2Phone Setup P. 356

—

Edit Pairing Code Changes a pairing code.

2To change the pairing code setting P. 358 Random

/Fixed

Models with navigation system

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

298

uuCustomized Featuresu

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System

Settings

Voice

Recog.

Volume Changes the volume of the voice prompt. —

Voice Prompt Turns the voice prompt on and off. On

/Off

Song by Voice Turns the Song By Voice

on and off.

2Song By Voice

(SBV) P. 251 On

/Off

Song by Phonetic

Modification

Modifies a voice command for music stored in

the HDD or an iPod®.

2Phonetic Modification P. 253

—

Phonebook Phonetic

Modification

Modifies a voice command for the phonebook.

2Phonebook Phonetic Modification P. 371 —

Clock

Clock/

Wallpaper

Type

Clock Changes the clock display type. Analogue/Digital

Small Digital/Off

Wallpaper

●

Changes the wallpaper type.

●

Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.

●

Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.

2Wallpaper Setup P. 215

Blank/Galaxy

Metallic/Time Zone

Clock Adjustment Adjust Clock.

2Setting the Clock P. 84 —

Clock Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H

/24H

Auto Time Zone

Sets the navigation system to automatically

adjust the clock when driving through different

time zones.

/Off

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

299

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System

Settings

Clock

Auto Daylight

Sets the navigation system to automatically adjust

the clock (“spring ahead” or “fall back” by one

hour) when a daylight saving time change occurs.

/Off

Clock Reset Resets the settings of all items in the Clock group. —

Other

Units

Changes the distance unit on the navigation map

screen. miles

/km

Language Changes the display language. English

/French/

Spanish

Voice Command Tips

Alerts you when manual control of the system is

disabled to prevent distraction while driving. Only

voice commands are available.

/Off

Background Color Changes the background color of the audio/

information screen and the audio with touch screen.

Blue

/Amber/Red/

Green

Header Clock Display Selects whether the clock display comes on or not. On

/Off

System Device Information Displays the system/Device information. —

Factory data reset Resets all the settings to their factory default.

2Defaulting All the Settings P. 309 —

Default Cancels /Resets all customized items in the

System Settings group as default. Default/OK

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

300

uuCustomized Featuresu

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle

Settings

TPMS Calibration Cancels/Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel

/Calibrate

Driver

Assist

System

Setup

Forward Collision Warning

Distance

Changes at which distance FCW alerts, or turns

FCW on and off.

Long/Normal

Short/Off

Meter

Setup

Adjust Outside Temp.

Display

Adjust the temperature reading by a few

degrees.

-5°F ~ ±0°F

~ +5°F

(U.S.)

-3°C ~ ±0°C

~ +3°C

(Canada)

“Trip A” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,

average fuel economy A, average speed A

, and

elapsed time A

With Refuel/IGN Off/

Manually Reset

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,

average fuel economy B, average speed B

, and

elapsed time B

With Refuel/IGN Off/

Manually Reset

Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On

/Off

Keyless Start Guidance

Screens

Displays the push button start guidance when

conditions are met to change power mode. On

/Off

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

301

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle

Settings

Driving

Position

Setup

Memory Position Link Changes the driver’s seat position to a stored

setting. On

/Off

Keyless

Access

Setup

Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors unlock when you grab the

driver’s door handle.

Drivers Door Only

All Doors

Keyless Access Light Flash Causes some exterior lights to blink when you

unlock/lock the doors. On

/Off

Keyless Access Beep Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/

lock the doors. On

/Off

Lighting

Setup

Interior Light Dimming

Time

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay

on after you close the doors.

60seconds/

30seconds

15seconds

Headlight Auto Off Timer Changes the length of time the exterior lights

stay on after you close the driver's door.

60seconds/

30seconds/

15seconds

0seconds

Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come

on.

Max/High/Mid

Low/Min

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

302

uuCustomized Featuresu

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle

Settings

Door

Setup

Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for the automatic locking

feature.

With Vehicle Speed

Shift from P/Off

Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for when the doors unlock

automatically.

All Doors When

Driver’s Door Opens

All Doors When

Shifted to Park/All

Doors When Ignition

Switched Off/Off

Key And Remote Unlock

Mode

Sets up either the driver's door or both doors to

unlock on the first push of the remote.

Driver Door

/All

Doors

Keyless Lock Answer Back LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.

LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds. On

/Off

Security Relock Timer

Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock

and the security system to set after you unlock

the vehicle without opening either door.

90seconds/

60seconds/

30seconds

Mainte-

nance

Info.

Maintenance Reset Resets the engine oil life display when you have

performed the maintenance service. —

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

Vehicle Settings group as default. Default/OK

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

303

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Camera

Settings

Lane-

Watch

Show with Turn Signal Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on

when you move the turn signal lever to the

passenger side. On

/Off

Reference Lines Selects whether the reference lines come on on

the LaneWatch monitor. On

/Off

Next Maneuver Pop up Selects whether a turn direction screen of the

navigation system interrupts on the LaneWatch

display. On

/Off

Display

Brightness

Adjusts the LaneWatch display settings. —

Contrast

Black Level

Color

Tint

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

LaneWatch group as default. Default/OK

Rear

Camera

Fixed Guideline Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on or

not on the rear camera monitor. On

/Off

Dynamic Guideline Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on

or not on the rear camera monitor. On

/Off

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear

Camera group as default. Default/OK

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

304

uuCustomized Featuresu

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Audio

Settings

Sound Adjusts the settings of the audio speaker’s sound.

2Adjusting the Sound P. 217

-6 ~ C

~ +6 (Bass,

Treble, Fader, Balance

and SUBW), Off/Low/

Mid

/High (SVC)

Source Select Popup Selects whether the list of selectable audio sources

comes on or not when the AUDIO button is pressed. On/Off

HD Radio Mode

Selects whether the audio system automatically

switches to the digital radio waves or receives the

analogue waves only.

Auto

/Analogue

Cover Art

Turns on and off the cover art display. On

/Off

Connect Bluetooth Audio Device

Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®

Audio device to HFL. —

Bluetooth Device List

Edits or deletes a Bluetooth® Audio device paired

to HFL. —

Recording from CD

Selects whether the songs on music CDs are

automatically recorded to the HDD or not. Auto

/Manual

Recording Quality

Selects the quality of the music files recorded to

the HDD. Standard

/High

AM/FM mode

CD (MP3/WMA/AAC), iPod®, USB, Pandora®

or Aha

mode

Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or Aha

mode

Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or Aha

mode

CD mode

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

305

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Audio

Settings

HDD Info Displays the HDD capacity. —

Gracenote Album DB Info Update

Update the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote®

Media Database).

Update from USB

Update from CD

Update Gracenote Album Info

Update the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote®

Media Database).

Update by USB

Update by CD

Delete all HDD Data 2Deleting all HDD Data P. 310 —

USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority

Selects the connection to have priority. USB

/Bluetooth

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio

Settings group as default. Default/OK

Phone

Settings Phone

Connect phone

Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or

disconnects a paired phone.

2Phone Setup P. 356

—

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a

paired phone, or creates a security PIN.

2Phone Setup P. 356

—

Edit Speed Dial Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

2Phone Setup P. 356 —

HDD mode

CD or HDD mode

HDD mode

Pandora® or Aha

mode

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

306

uuCustomized Featuresu

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Phone

Settings

Phone

Auto Transfer Sets calls to automatically transfer from your

phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle. On

/Off

Auto Answer Sets whether to automatically answer an

incoming call after about four seconds. On/Off

Ring Tone Selects the ring tone. Fixed/Mobile

Phone

/Off

Automatic Phone Sync Sets a phonebook data to be automatically

imported when a phone is paired to HFL. On

/Off

Use Contact Photo Displays a caller’s picture on an incoming call

screen. On

/Off

Text/

Enable Text/Email Turns the text message/E-mail function on and

off. On

/Off

Select Account Selects a mail or text message account. —

New Text/Email Alert

Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the

screen when HFL receives a new text message/E-

mail.

On/Off

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

307

uuCustomized Featuresu

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Info

Settings

Clock

Clock/

Wallpaper

type

Clock

See System Settings on P. 297 to P. 299.

Wallpaper

Clock Adjustment

Clock Format

Auto Time Zone

Auto Daylight

Clock Reset

Other INFO Screen Preference

Selects the top menu when the INFO button is

pressed.

●

Info Top- A brief menu pops up.

●

Info Menu- A full menu pops up.

●

Off- A menu does not pop up.

Info Top/Info

/Off

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info

Settings group as default. Default/OK

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

308

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings

Defaulting All the Settings

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

1. Press and hold the DISP button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Other,

then Factory data reset.

uThe confirmation message will appear.

3. Rotate to select Yes, then press to

reset the settings.

4. Rotate to select Yes, then press

again to reset the settings.

uThe confirmation message will appear.

Press to select OK.

Models without navigation system

1Defaulting All the Settings

When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset

all settings to default and delete all personal data.

Models with one display

Models with two displays

All models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

309

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings

Defaulting All the Settings

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

3. Rotate to select Factory data reset,

then press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

4. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

uThe confirmation message will appear.

5. Rotate to select Yes, then press

again to reset the settings.

uThe confirmation message will appear.

Press to select OK.

Models with navigation system

1Defaulting All the Settings

When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset

all settings to default and delete all personal data.

The following settings will be reset:

•Routing & Guidance: Rerouting, Unverified Area

Routing, Traffic Rerouting, Edit Waypoint Search

Area, Guidance Mode, Street Name Guidance

•Route Preference

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

310

uuCustomized FeaturesuDeleting all HDD Data

Deleting all HDD Data

Reset all the menu and customized settings, and delete all music data on the HDD.

1. Turn on the audio system and select the

HDD mode.

2. Press the SETTINGS button.

3. Rotate to select Audio Settings, then

press .

4. Rotate to select Delete all HDD Data,

then press .

uThe confirmation message will appear.

5. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

Models with navigation system

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

311

Continued

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three

remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or

home security systems.

Refer to the safety information that comes with your garage door opener to test that

the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety

information, contact the manufacturer.

Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the

way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.

When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s

path.

Training HomeLink

If you have not trained any of the buttons in

HomeLink before, you should erase any

previously learned codes. To do this:

•Press and hold the two outside buttons for

about 20 seconds, until the red indicator

blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to

step 1.

•If you are training the second or third

button, go directly to step 1.

■Important Safety Precautions

1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver

HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson

Controls., Inc.

Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage

door opener, confirm that the opener has an external

entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic

eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it

does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.

Red Indicator

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver

uTraining HomeLink

312

■Training a Button

1Training HomeLink

Retraining a Button

If you want to retrain a programmed button for a

new device, you do not have to erase all button

memory. You can replace the existing memory code

using this procedure:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button

until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink.

2. Continue to hold the HomeLink button and

follow steps 1 - 3 under “Training a Button.”

Indicator remains on

for about 25 secs.

Standard transmitter

Indicator blinks rapidly for

2 secs, then remains on for

about 23 secs.

Rolling code transmitter

Erasing Codes

To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside

buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink

(about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes

before selling the vehicle.

If you have any problems, see the device’s

instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call

HomeLink at (800) 355-3515.

5. a.

1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the

HomeLink button you want to program.

Press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the button on

the remote transmitter. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED)

blink after 10 secs?

Press and hold the

programmed HomeLink

button for about a sec.

Does the device (garage

door opener) work?

Press and hold the remote and the HomeLink

button at the same time. Then, while

continuing to hold the HomeLink button,

press and release the button on the remote

every 2 secs.

Does the LED blink within 20 secs?

Training

Complete

Press and hold the HomeLink button again.

Press and hold the HomeLink

button again.

The remote-controlled device

should operate.

Training Complete

The remote has a rolling code. Press the

“learn” button on the remote-controlled

device (e.g. garage door opener).

Within 30 secs, press and hold the

programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.

HomeLink indicator blinks for 2 secs,

then remains on.

HomeLink LED

is on.

YES NO

YES

YES NO NO

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

313

Continued

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using

your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

(Pick-up) button: Press to answer an incoming call.

(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.

(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag, a phonebook

name, or a number.

PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.

Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .

■HFL Buttons

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell

phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing

procedures, and special feature capabilities:

•U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

(888) 528-7876.

•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call

To use HFL, the Bluetooth On/Off setting must be

On.

2Customized Features P. 273

Voice control tips

•Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the

windows, as noise coming from them may interfere

with the microphone.

•Press and release the button when you want to

call a number using a stored voice tag, a

phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and

naturally after a beep.

•If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,

the command may be misinterpreted.

•To change the volume level, use the audio system's

volume knob or the remote audio controls on the

steering wheel.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of

handheld electronic devices while operating a

vehicle.

Models without navigation system

Models with one display

Talk Button

Volume up

Microphone

Hang-up/Back Button

Pick-up

Button

Volume down

Selector

Knob

PHONE

Button

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

(888) 528 -7876.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

314

(Pick-up) button: Press to display the phone menu on half of the screen, or to

answer an incoming call.

(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.

(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag, a phonebook

name, or a number.

Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .

To go to the Phone screen:

1. Press the DISP button to switch the display to the Function Change screen.

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any

use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is

under license. Other trademarks and trade names are

those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations

An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio

system when it is playing. It will resume when the call

is ended.

Models with two displays

Talk Button

Volume up

Microphone

Hang-up/Back Button

Pick-up

Button

Volume down

Selector

Knob

DISP

Button

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

315

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

Certain manual functions are disabled or

inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.

You cannot select a grayed-out option until

the vehicle is stopped.

Only previously stored speed dial entries with

voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers

can be called using voice commands while the

vehicle is in motion.

2Speed Dial P. 332

■HFL Status Display

1HFL Status Display

The information that appears on the audio/

information screen varies between phone models.

You can change the system language to English,

French, or Spanish.

2Customized Features P. 273

■Limitations for Manual Operation

Bluetooth Indicator

Comes on when your

phone is connected to HFL.

Signal Strength

HFL Mode

Battery Level

Status

Roam Status

Caller’s Name

Caller’s Number

Disabled Options

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

316

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus

The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w

to use HFL.

■Phone Settings screen

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

1. Press and hold the DISP button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

1HFL Menus

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-

compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle

is parked.

Some functions are limited while driving. A message

appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving

and the operation is canceled.

Models with one display

Models with two displays

All models

Pair a phone to the system.

Replace a previously paired phone with a

new phone.

Connect

Phone

Bluetooth

Device List

Add Bluetooth Device

Edit PIN

(Existing entry list)

Disconnect

Connect a phone to the system.

Disconnect a paired phone from the system.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

(Existing

entry list)

Replace This

Device

Delete This

Device Delete a previously paired phone.

Create a security PIN for a paired phone.

Add

Bluetooth

Device

*2: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Pair a phone to the system.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

317

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Select a phone number from the call

history to store as a speed dial number.

Manual Input

New Entry Import from

Call History

Import from

Phonebook

Enter a phone number to store as a

speed dial number.

Delete all of the previously stored speed dial number.

*2: Models with two displays

Select a phone number from the

phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Edit Edit a previously stored speed dial number.

●

Change a number.

●

Create or delete a voice tag.

Delete

Delete a previously stored speed dial

number.

(Existing

entry list)

Delete All

Edit Speed

Dial

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the

vehicle.

Auto Transfer

Auto Answer

Ring Tone

Set whether to automatically answer an incoming call after about four

seconds.

Select the ring tone.

Automatic Phone Sync

Use Contact Photo

Set phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to

HFL.

Display a caller’s picture on an incoming call screen.

Phone

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

318

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Turn the text message/E-mail function on and off.

Select Account

Select a mail or text message account.

New Text Message Alert

New Text/Email Alert

Message Auto Reading

Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL

receives a new text message/E-mail.

Sets the system to automatically read an incoming text

message/E-mail.

Text Message

*1, *2

Text/Email

*1, *3

Default

Enable Text Message

Enable Text/Email

Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.

*2: Models with one display

*3: Models with two displays

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

319

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

■Phone screen

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the MENU button to display the

menu items.

1. Press the DISP button.

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .

Models with one display

Models with two displays

Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming and missed calls.

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a

speed dial number.

Call

History

Speed Dial

All

Manual Input

Dialed

Received

Display the last 20 outgoing calls.

Display the last 20 incoming calls.

New Entry

Import from

Call History

Import from

Phonebook

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a

speed dial number.

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

More Speed Dials Display another paired phone’s speed dial list.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Missed Display the last 20 missed calls.

Dial

Redial

Enter a phone number to dial.

Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.

(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

320

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

See the previous message.

Text Message

*1, *2

Text/Email

*1, *3

Read/Stop

Select Account

Previous Message

Next Message See the next message.

System reads received message aloud, or

stop message from being read.

Phonebook

Display the paired phone’s phonebook.

Message is read

aloud.

Call

Reply to a received message using one of

six fixed phrases.

Make a call to the sender.

Select a message

and press .

Select a mail or text message account.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

*2: Models with one display

*3: Models with two displays

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

321

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■To pair a cell phone (when there is no

phone paired to the system)

1. Go to the Phone screen.

2Phone screen P. 319

2. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

3. Make sure your phone is search or

discoverable mode, then press .

uHFL automatically searches for a

Bluetooth device.

4. When your phone appears on the list, select

it by pressing .

uIf your phone does not appear, you can

select Refresh to search again.

uIf your phone still does not appear, select

Phone Not Found and search for

Bluetooth devices using your phone.

From your phone, select

HandsFreeLink.

5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/

information screen.

uConfirm if the pairing code on the screen

and your phone match.

This may vary by phone.

6. You will receive a notification on the screen

if pairing is successful.

■Phone Setup

1Phone Setup

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to

HFL before you can make and receive hands-free

calls.

Phone Pairing Tips:

•You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is

moving.

•Up to six phones can be paired.

•Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is

paired to HFL.

•If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found

by the system within three minutes, the system will

time out and returns to idle.

Once you have paired a phone, you can see it

displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the

right side.

These icons indicate the following:

: The phone can be used with HFL.

: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

When pairing is completed, an Automatic Phone

Sync prompt appears. Select On if you want your call

history and phonebook automatically imported to

HFL.

2Changing the Automatic Phone Sync

setting P. 331

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

322

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■To pair a cell phone (when a phone has

already been paired to the system)

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate to select Connect Phone, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Add

Bluetooth Device.

3. Make sure your phone is in search or

discoverable mode, then press .

uHFL automatically searches for a

Bluetooth device.

4. When your phone appears on the list, select

it by pressing .

uIf your phone does not appear, you can

select Refresh to search again.

uIf your phone still does not appear, select

Phone Not Found and search for

Bluetooth devices using your phone.

From your phone, select

HandsFreeLink.

5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/

information screen.

uConfirm if the pairing code on the screen

and your phone match.

This may vary by phone.

6. You will receive a notification on the screen

if pairing is successful.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

323

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■To change the pairing code setting

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

1. Press and hold the DISP button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select

Bluetooth, then Edit Pairing Code.

3. Rotate to select Fixed or Random,

then press .

1To change the pairing code setting

The pairing code may be six or four digits depending

on your phone.

The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the

setting.

To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the

current code, then enter a new one.

For a randomly generated pairing code each time you

pair a phone, select Random.

Edit Pairing Code

Models with one display

Models with two displays

All models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

324

■To replace an already-paired phone

with a new phone

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List,

then press .

3. Rotate to select a paired phone you

want to replace, then press .

4. Rotate to select Replace This Device,

then press .

5. HFL enters the pairing process and searches

a new phone.

uFollow the prompts to pair a new phone.

6. You will receive a notification on the screen

if pairing is successful.

1To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone

The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial

entries, call history, and security PIN information from

the previously paired phone.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

325

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

■To delete a paired phone

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List,

then press .

3. Rotate to select a phone you want to

delete, then press .

4. Rotate to select Delete This Device,

then press .

5. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then

press .

6. You will receive a notification on the screen

if it is successful.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

326

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■To turn on or off the text/E-mail

function

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate to select Text Message, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Enable

Text Message.

uA pop-up menu appears on the screen.

2. Rotate to select Text/Email, then

uRepeat the procedure to select Enable

Text/Email.

uA pop-up menu appears on the screen.

3. Rotate to select On or Off, then

■To Set Up a Text Message/Email Options

Models with one display

Models with two displays

All models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

Continued

327

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice

1. On the Text Message screen, rotate to

select New Text Message Alert, then

press .

1. On the Text/Email screen, rotate to

select New Text/Email Alert, then

uA pop-up menu appears on the screen.

2. Rotate to select On or Off, then

■To set up the auto reading option

1. On the Text Message or the Text/Email

screen, rotate to select Message Auto

Reading, then press .

uA pop-up menu appears on the screen.

2. Rotate to select On, Off or Auto then

press .

1To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice

On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you

receive a new message.

Off: The message you receive is stored in the system

without notification.

Models with one display

Models with two displays

All models

1To set up the auto reading option

On: A text message/Email is always read aloud.

Off: A text message/Email is not read aloud.

Auto: A text message/Email is read aloud only when

driving.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

328

You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN.

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List,

then press .

3. Rotate to select a phone you want to

add a security PIN to, then press .

4. Rotate to select Edit PIN, then press .

5. Enter a new four-digit number.

Rotate to select, then press .

Press to delete. Press OK to enter the

security PIN.

You can also enter a number using the

icons.

6. Re-enter the four-digit number.

uThe screen returns to the screen in

step 4.

■To Create a Security PIN

1To Create a Security PIN

If the phone is already security PIN protected, you

need to enter the current security PIN before clearing

the PIN or creating a new one.

Audio/information screen

Audio with touch screen

Audio/information screen

Audio with touch screen

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

329

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically

transferred to HFL.

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Auto

Transfer.

3. Rotate to select On, then press .

You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds.

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Auto

Answer.

3. Rotate to select On, then press .

■Automatic Transferring

■Auto Answer

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

330

You can change the ring tone setting.

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Ring

Tone.

3. Rotate to select Fixed, Mobile Phone

or Off, then press .

■Ring Tone

1Ring Tone

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker.

Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the

connected cell phone sounds from the speaker.

Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

331

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■When Automatic Phone Sync is

set to On:

When your phone is paired, the contents of its

phonebook and call history are automatically

imported to HFL.

■Changing the Automatic Phone Sync

setting

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select

Automatic Phone Sync.

3. Rotate to select On or Off, then

■Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

When you select a person from the list in the cellular

phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.

The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored

for that name.

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the

category icons to HFL.

The phonebook is updated after every connection.

Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Pref

Home

Mobile

Work

Pager

Fax

Car

Other

Message

Voice

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

332

Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.

To store a speed dial number:

1. Go to the Phone screen.

2Phone screen P. 354

Press the MENU button to display the

menu items.

2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then

uRepeat the procedure to select New

Entry.

3. Rotate to select a place to choose a

number from, then press .

From Import from Call History:

uSelect a number from the call history.

From Manual Input:

uInput the number manually.

From Import from Phonebook:

uSelect a number from the linked cell

phone’s imported phonebook.

4. When the speed dial is successfully stored,

you are asked to create a voice tag for the

number. Rotate to select Yes or No,

then press .

5. Using the button, follow the prompts to

store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.

■Speed Dial

1Speed Dial

When a voice tag is stored, press the button to

call the number using the voice tag. Say “Call” and

the voice tag name.

Mr.AAA 111AAA####

555EEE####

444DDD####

333CCC####

222BBB####

Mr.EEE

Mr.DDD

Mr.CCC

Mr.BBB

Select a method to store

Models with one display

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

Continued

333

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■To add a voice tag to a stored speed

dial number

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Edit

Speed Dial.

3. Select an existing speed dial entry.

uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Edit, then press .

4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then

uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Record, then press .

5. Using the button, follow the prompts to

complete the voice tag.

1Speed Dial

Avoid using duplicate voice tags.

Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.

It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For

example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

334

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■To delete a voice tag

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Edit

Speed Dial.

3. Select an existing speed dial entry.

uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Edit, then press .

4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then

uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Clear, then press .

5. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then

press .

■To delete a speed dial

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Edit

Speed Dial.

3. Select an existing speed dial entry.

uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Delete, then press .

4. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then

press .

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

Continued

335

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

You can make calls by inputting any phone

number, or by using the imported

phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or

redial.

■Making a Call

1Making a Call

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,

or number can be dialed by voice from most screens.

Press the button and say “Call” and the voice tag

name, “Call by name” and the phonebook name, or

the phone number.

The maximum range between your phone and

vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of

the person you are calling through the audio

speakers.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

336

■To make a call using the imported

phonebook

1. Go to the Phone screen.

2Phone screen P. 319

Press the MENU button to display the

menu items.

2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then

press .

3. Rotate to select a name, then press .

uYou can also search by letter. Rotate

to select Alphabet Search, then

uUse the keyboard on the touch screen for

entering letters.

4. Rotate to select a number, then

uDialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the imported phonebook

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.

However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed

dial number using voice commands.

2Limitations for Manual Operation P. 315

2Speed Dial P. 332

You can use the keyboard on the audio with touch

screen for an alphabetical search.

Models with two displays

Models with one display

Models with two displays

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

Continued

337

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■To make a call using a phone number

1. Go to the Phone screen.

2Phone screen P. 319

Press the MENU button to display the

menu items.

2. Rotate to select Dial, then press .

3. Rotate to select a number, then

4. Rotate to select , then press .

uDialing starts automatically.

■To make a call using redial

1. Go to the Phone screen.

2Phone screen P. 319

Press the MENU button to display the

menu items.

2. Rotate to select Redial, then press .

uDialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a phone number

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.

However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed

dial number, phonebook name, or number using

voice commands.

2Limitations for Manual Operation P. 315

2Speed Dial P. 332

You can use the keyboard on the audio with touch

screen to input numbers.

Select numbers, then to start dialing.

Models with two displays

Models with one display

1To make a call using redial

Press and hold the button to redial the last

number dialed in your phone’s history.

Models with one display

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

338

■To make a call using the call history

Call history is stored by All, Dialed,

Received, and Missed.

1. Go to the Phone screen.

2Phone screen P. 319

Press the MENU button to display the

menu items.

2. Rotate to select Call History, then

press .

3. Rotate to select All, Dialed, Received

or Missed, then press .

4. Rotate to select a number, then

uDialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the call history

The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or

missed calls.

(Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)

Audio/information screen

Models with one display

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

339

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

You can dial to the last six numbers in the call

history.

1. Select .

2. Select Call History.

3. Select 1-6.

uDialing starts automatically.

Audio with touch screen

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

340

■To make a call using a speed dial entry

1. Go to the Phone screen.

2Phone screen P. 319

Press the MENU button to display the

menu items.

2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then

3. Rotate to select a number, then press .

uDialing starts automatically.

You can dial to the first six numbers in the

speed dial entries ( - ).

1. Select .

2. Select Speed Dial.

3. Select 1-6.

uDialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a speed dial entry

Select More Speed Dials to view another paired

phone’s speed dial list. You can make a call from that

list using the currently connected phone.

When a voice tag is stored, press the button to

call the number using the voice tag.

2Speed Dial P. 332

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,

or number can be dialed by voice from any screen.

Press the button and follow the prompts.

To call stored speed dial entries 1-6, press the

corresponding preset buttons from the Phone

screen.

Models with one display

Audio/information screen

Models with one display

Audio with touch screen

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

Continued

341

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

When there is an incoming call, an audible

notification sounds (if activated) and the

Incoming Call screen appears.

Press the button to answer the call.

Press the button to decline or end the call.

■Receiving a Call

1Receiving a Call

Call Waiting

Press the button to put the current call on hold to

answer the incoming call.

Press the button again to return to the current call.

Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it.

Press the button if you want to hang up the

current call.

You can select the icons on the audio with touch

screen instead of the and buttons.

Models with two displays

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

342

The following options are available during a call.

Mute: Mute your voice.

Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.

Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-

driven phone system.

Pres the MENU button to display the options.

The available options are shown on the lower

half of the screen.

Rotate to select the option, then press .

uThe mute icon appears when Mute is

selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

■Options During a Call

1Options During a Call

Touch Tones: Available on some phones.

You can select the icons on the audio with touch

screen.

Models with two displays

Mute Icon

Models with one display

Models with two displays

All models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

343

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL can display newly received text messages as well as 20 of the most recently

received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud

and replied to using a fixed common phrase.

HFL can also display E-mails.

1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new

text message or E-mail.

2. Rotate to select Read to listen to the

message, then press .

uThe text message or E-mail is displayed.

The system automatically starts reading

out the message.

3. To discontinue the message read-out, press

■Receiving a Text Message/E-mail

1Receiving a Text Message/E-mail

The system does not display any received messages

while you are driving. You can only hear them read

aloud.

With some phones, you may be able to display up to

20 most recent text messages and E-mails.

State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text

message/E-mail feature. Only use the text message/

E-mail feature when conditions allow you to do so

safely.

When you receive a text message or E-mail for the

first time after the phone is paired to HFL, you are

asked to turn the New Text Message Alert or the

New Text/Email Alert setting to On.

2To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice

P. 327

Models with two displays

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

344

If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to

be active and receive notifications.

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate to select Text/Email, then

uRepeat the procedure to select Select

Account.

3. Rotate to select Text message or an E-

mail account you want, then press .

■Selecting a Mail Account

Models with two displays

1Selecting a Mail Account

You can also select a mail account from the folder list

screen or the message list screen.

Rotate to select Select Account on the top of the

list, then press .

You can only receive notifications from one text

message or mail account at a time.

Message List

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

Continued

345

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■Displaying text messages

1. Go to the Phone screen.

2Phone screen P. 319

Press the MENU button to display the

menu items.

2. Rotate to select Text Message, then

press .

2. Rotate to select Text/Email, then

uSelect account if necessary.

3. Rotate to select a message, then

uThe text message is displayed. The

system automatically starts reading the

message aloud.

■Displaying Messages

1Displaying Messages

The icon appears next to an unread message.

If you delete a message on the phone, the message is

also deleted in the system. If you send a message

from the system, the message goes to your phone’s

outbox.

To see the previous or next message, press on the

text message screen. From the pop-up menu, rotate

to select Previous Message or Next Message,

then press .

Message List

Text Message

Models with one display

Models with two displays

All models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

346

■Displaying E-mails

1. Go to the Phone screen.

2Phone screen P. 319

2. Rotate to select Text/Email, then press

uSelect account if necessary.

3. Rotate to select a folder, then press .

4. Rotate to select a message, then press

uThe E-mail is displayed. The system

automatically starts reading the message

aloud.

1Displaying E-mails

Received text messages and E-mails may appear in

the message list screen at the same time. In this case,

text messages are titled No Subject.

Message List

E-mail

Folder List

Models with two displays

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

Continued

347

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■Using the Stop or Read option

1. Go to the text message or E-mail screen.

uThe system automatically starts reading

the message aloud.

2Displaying Messages P. 345

2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear

on the screen.

3. Rotate to select Stop or Read, then

press .

1Using the Stop or Read option

This option changes to:

•Stop while the text message/E-mail is read out.

Select this option to discontinue the message read

out.

•Read when the system has finished reading out the

text message/E-mail, or after you selected Stop.

Select this option to hear the system read out the

selected message.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

348

■Reply to a message

1. Go to the text message or E-mail screen.

uThe system automatically starts reading

the message aloud.

2Displaying Messages P. 345

2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear

on the screen.

3. Rotate to select Reply, then press .

4. Rotate to select the reply message, then

press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

5. Select Send to send the message.

uComplete appears on the screen when

the reply message was successfully sent.

1Reply to a message

The available fixed reply messages are as follows:

•Talk to you later, I’m driving.

•I’m on my way.

•I’m running late.

•OK

•Yes

•No

You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

349

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■Making a call to a sender

1. Go to the text message screen.

uThe system automatically starts reading

the message aloud.

2Displaying text messages P. 345

2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear

on the screen.

3. Rotate to select Call, then press .

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

350

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using

your vehicle’s navigation system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

(Pick-up) button: Press to go to the Phone Call screen or to answer an

incoming call.

(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.

(Talk) button: Press to give HFL voice commands.

PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.

Interface dial: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press . Move ,

, or to select secondary menu.

■HFL Buttons

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell

phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing

procedures, and special feature capabilities:

•U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

(888) 528-7876.

•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call

To use HFL, the Bluetooth setting must be On.

2Customized Features P. 273

Voice control tips

•Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the

windows, as noise coming from them may interfere

with the microphone.

•Press and release the button when you want to

call a number using a stored voice tag, a

phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and

naturally after a beep.

•If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,

the command may be misinterpreted.

•To change the volume level, use the audio system's

volume knob or the remote audio controls on the

steering wheel.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of

handheld electronic devices while operating a

vehicle.

Models with navigation system

Talk Button

Volume up

Microphone

Hang-up/Back Button

Pick-up

Button

Volume down

Interface

Dial

PHONE

Button

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

(888) 528 -7876.

351

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

Certain manual functions are disabled or

inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.

You cannot select a grayed-out option until

the vehicle is stopped.

Only previously stored speed dial entries with

voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers

can be called using voice commands while the

vehicle is in motion.

2Speed Dial P. 368

■HFL Status Display

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any

use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is

under license. Other trademarks and trade names are

those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations

An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio

system when it is playing. It will resume when the call

is ended.

1HFL Status Display

The information that appears on the audio/

information screen varies between phone models.

You can change the system language to English,

French, or Spanish.

2Customized Features P. 273

■Limitations for Manual Operation

Bluetooth Indicator

Comes on when your

phone is connected to HFL.

Signal Strength

HFL Mode

Battery Level

Status

Roam Status

Caller’s Name

Caller’s Number

Disabled Option

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

352

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus

The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use HFL.

■Phone Settings screen

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

1HFL Menus

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-

compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle

is parked.

Some functions are limited while driving. A message

appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving

and the operation is canceled.

Edit the user name of a paired phone.

Phone

Edit Device

Name

Connect

phone

Bluetooth

Device List

(Existing

entry list)

Replace This

Device

Add Bluetooth

Device

Disconnect a paired phone from the system.

Connect a phone to the system.

Disconnect

(Existing entry list)

Pair a phone to the system.

Edit PIN

Create a security PIN for a paired phone.

Replace a previously paired phone with a

new phone.

Delete This

Device Delete a previously paired phone.

Add Bluetooth

Device Pair a phone to the system.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

353

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Text/Email

Manual Input

Edit Speed

Dial New Entry

Import from

Call History

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Import from

Phonebook

Delete All Delete all the previously stored speed dial numbers.

Select a phone number from the call

history to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the

phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Enter a phone number to store as a speed

dial number.

Edit

Delete

(Existing

entry list)

Edit a previously stored speed dial number.

●

Change a number.

●

Create or delete a voice tag.

Delete a previously stored speed dial number.

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the

vehicle.

Auto Transfer

Auto Answer

Ring Tone

Set whether to automatically answer an incoming call after about four

seconds.

Select the ring tone.

Use Contact Photo

Set phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to

HFL.

Display a caller’s picture on an incoming call screen.

Automatic Phone Sync

Select Account Select a mail or text message account.

Enable Text/Email Turn the text message/E-mail function on and off.

New Text/Email Alert Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL receives a new

text message/E-mail.

Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.

Default

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

354

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■Phone screen

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the MENU button to display the

menu items.

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a

speed dial number.

Speed Dial

Manual Input

New Entry Import from

Call History

Import from

Phonebook

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a

speed dial number.

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

More Speed Dials Display another paired phone’s speed dial list.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.

Phonebook

Dial

Display the paired phone’s phonebook.

Enter a phone number to dial.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

355

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Text/Email

Message is

read aloud.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

See the previous message.

(Read/Stop)

Next See the next message.

System reads received message aloud, or stop message

from being read.

Call

Reply to a received message using one of six fixed phrases.

Make a call to the sender.

Select Account

Select a message

and press .

Select a mail or text message account.

Redial

Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.

Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming and missed calls.

Call History

All

Dialed

Received

Display the last 20 outgoing calls.

Display the last 20 incoming calls.

Missed Display the last 20 missed calls.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

356

■To pair a cell phone (when there is no

phone paired to the system)

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

3. Make sure your phone is search or

discoverable mode, then press .

uHFL automatically searches for a

Bluetooth device.

4. When your phone appears on the list, select

it by pressing .

uIf your phone does not appear, you can

select Refresh to search again.

uIf your phone still does not appear, move

to select Phone Not Found? and

search for Bluetooth devices using your

phone. From your phone, select

HandsFreeLink.

5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/

information screen.

uConfirm if the pairing code on the screen

and your phone match.

This may vary by phone.

6. You will receive a notification on the screen

if pairing is successful.

■Phone Setup

1Phone Setup

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to

HFL before you can make and receive hands-free

calls.

Phone Pairing Tips:

•You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is

moving.

•Up to six phones can be paired.

•Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is

paired to HFL.

•If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found

by the system within three minutes, the system will

time out and returns to idle.

Once you have paired a phone, you can see it

displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the

right side.

These icons indicate the following:

: The phone can be used with HFL.

: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

When pairing is completed, an Automatic Phone

Sync prompt appears. Select On if you want your call

history and phonebook automatically imported to

HFL.

2Changing the Automatic Phone Sync

setting P. 367

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

357

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

■To pair a cell phone (when a phone has

already been paired to the system)

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Connect

Phone, then Add Bluetooth Device.

3. Make sure your phone is in search or

discoverable mode, then press .

uHFL automatically searches for a

Bluetooth device.

4. When your phone appears on the list, select

it by pressing .

uIf your phone does not appear, you can

select Refresh to search again.

uIf your phone still does not appear, move

to select Phone Not Found? and

search for Bluetooth devices using your

phone. From your phone, select

HandsFreeLink.

5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/

information screen.

uConfirm if the pairing code on the screen

and your phone match.

This may vary by phone.

6. You will receive a notification on the screen

if pairing is successful.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

358

■To change the pairing code setting

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Edit

Pairing Code.

3. Rotate to select Fixed or Random,

then press .

1To change the pairing code setting

The pairing code may be six or four digits depending

on your phone.

The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the

setting.

To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the

current code, then enter a new one.

For a randomly generated pairing code each time you

pair a phone, select Random.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

359

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■To replace an already-paired phone

with a new phone

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select

Bluetooth Device List.

3. Rotate to select a paired phone you

want to replace, then press .

4. Rotate to select Replace This Device,

then press .

5. HFL enters the pairing process and searches

a new phone.

uFollow the prompts to pair a new phone.

6. You will receive a notification on the screen

if pairing is successful.

1To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone

The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial

entries, call history, and security PIN information from

the previously paired phone.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

360

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■To delete a paired phone

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select

Bluetooth Device List.

3. Rotate to select a phone you want to

delete, then press .

4. Rotate to select Delete This Device,

then press .

5. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then

press .

6. You will receive a notification on the screen

if it is successful.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

361

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■To turn on or off the text/E-mail

function

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Enable

Text/Email.

uA pop-up menu appears on the screen.

3. Rotate to select On or Off, then

■To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select New

Text/Email Alert.

uA pop-up menu appears on the screen.

3. Rotate to select On or Off, then

■To Set Up a Text Message/E-mail Options

1To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice

On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you

receive a new text message.

Off: The message you receive is stored in the system

without notification.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

362

■To set up the auto reading option

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Message

Auto Reading.

uA pop-up menu appears on the screen.

3. Rotate to select On, Off or Auto, then

press .

1To set up the auto reading option

On: A text message/Email is always read aloud.

Off: A text message/Email is not read aloud.

Auto: A text message/Email is read aloud only when

driving.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

363

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select

Bluetooth Device List.

3. Rotate to select a phone you want to

add a security PIN to, then press .

4. Rotate to select Edit PIN, then press .

5. Enter a new four-digit number.

Rotate to select, then press .

Move to delete. Rotate to select

OK to enter the security PIN.

You can also enter a number using the

icons.

6. Re-enter the four-digit number.

uThe screen returns to the screen in

step 4.

■To Create a Security PIN

1To Create a Security PIN

If the phone is already security PIN protected, you

need to enter the current security PIN before clearing

the PIN or creating a new one.

Audio/information screen

Audio with touch screen

Audio/information screen

Audio with touch screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

364

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Edit the user name of a paired phone as

follows:

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select

Bluetooth Device List.

3. Rotate to select a phone you want to

edit, then press .

4. Rotate to select Edit Device Name,

then press .

5. Enter a new name of the phone.

Rotate to select, then press .

Move to delete. Rotate or move

to select OK then press to enter the

name.

You can also enter a name using the

icons.

■Editing User Name

Audio/information screen

Audio with touch screen

Audio/information screen

Audio with touch screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

365

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically

transferred to HFL.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Auto

Transfer.

3. Rotate to select On, then press .

You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Auto

Answer.

3. Rotate to select On, then press .

■Automatic Transferring

■Auto Answer

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

366

You can change the ring tone setting.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Ring

Tone.

3. Rotate to select Fixed, Mobile Phone

or Off, then press .

■Ring Tone

1Ring Tone

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker.

Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the

connected cell phone sounds from the speaker.

Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

367

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■When Automatic Phone Sync is set to

On:

When your phone is paired, the contents of its

phonebook and call history are automatically

imported to HFL.

■Changing the Automatic Phone Sync

setting

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select

Automatic Phone Sync.

3. Rotate to select On or Off, then

■Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

When you select a person from the list in the cellular

phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.

The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored

for that name.

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the

category icons to HFL.

The phonebook is updated after every connection.

Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Pref

Home

Mobile

Work

Pager

Fax

Car

Other

Message

Voice

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

368

Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.

To store a speed dial number:

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then

uRepeat the procedure to select New

Entry.

4. Rotate to select a place to choose a

number from, then press .

From Import from Call History:

uSelect a number from the call history.

From Manual Input:

uInput the number manually.

From Import from Phonebook:

uSelect a number from the linked cell

phone’s imported phonebook.

5. When the speed dial is successfully stored,

you are asked to create a voice tag for the

number. Rotate to select Yes or No,

then press .

6. Using the button, follow the prompts to

store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.

■Speed Dial

1Speed Dial

When a voice tag is stored, press the button to

call the number using the voice tag. Say “Call” and

the voice tag name.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

Continued

369

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■To add a voice tag to a stored speed

dial number

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Edit

Speed Dial.

3. Select an existing speed dial entry.

uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Edit, then press .

4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then

uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Record, then press .

5. Using the button, follow the prompts to

complete the voice tag.

1Speed Dial

Avoid using duplicate voice tags.

Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.

It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For

example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

370

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■To delete a voice tag

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Edit

Speed Dial.

3. Select an existing speed dial entry.

uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Edit, then press .

4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then

uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Clear, then press .

5. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then

press .

■To delete a speed dial

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Edit

Speed Dial.

3. Select an existing speed dial entry.

uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Delete, then press .

4. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then

press .

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

Continued

371

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phone’s contact name so that

it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands.

■To add a new voice tag

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

3. Rotate to select Phonebook Phonetic

Modification, then press .

4. Rotate to select the phone you want to

add phonetic modification to, then

■Phonebook Phonetic Modification

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification

Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By

Voice is set to Off.

You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

372

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

5. Rotate to select New Voice Tag, then

press .

6. Move or and rotate to select a

contact name, then press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

7. Rotate to select Modify, then press .

8. Using the button, follow the prompts to

complete the voice tag.

9. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select OK, then

press .

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

373

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■To modify a voice tag

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

3. Rotate to select Phonebook Phonetic

Modification, then press .

4. Rotate to select the phone you want to

add phonetic modification to, then

5. Rotate to select a contact name you

want to modify, then press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

6. Rotate to select Modify, then press .

7. Using the button, follow the prompts to

complete the voice tag.

8. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select OK, then

press .

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification

You cannot modify or delete a contact name if it is

edited with a phone other than the phone connected

to HFL.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

374

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■To delete a modified voice tag

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

3. Rotate to select Phonebook Phonetic

Modification, then press .

4. Rotate to select the phone you want to

delete phonetic modification, then

5. Rotate to select a contact name you

want to delete, then press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

6. Rotate to select Delete, then press .

7. Move and rotate to select OK, then

press .

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

375

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

■To delete all modified voice tags

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

3. Rotate to select Phonebook Phonetic

Modification, then press .

4. Rotate to select the phone you want to

delete phonetic modification, then

uThe contact name list appears.

5. Move and rotate to select Delete All,

then press .

6. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then

press .

Connect phone

Phone#2

Phone#1

Phone#3

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

376

You can make calls by inputting any phone

number, or by using the imported

phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or

redial.

■Making a Call

1Making a Call

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,

or number can be dialed by voice from most screens.

Press the button and say “Call” and the voice tag

name, “Call by name” and the phonebook name, or

the phone number.

The maximum range between your phone and

vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of

the person you are calling through the audio

speakers.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

377

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■To make a call using the imported

phonebook

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select Phonebook, then

press .

4. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.

Move to Search.

uYou can use the keyboard on the touch

screen for an alphabetical search.

5. Rotate to select a number, then

uDialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the imported phonebook

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.

However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed

dial number, phonebook name, or number using

voice commands.

2Limitations for Manual Operation P. 351

2Speed Dial P. 368

You can use the keyboard on the audio with touch

screen for an alphabetical search.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

378

■To make a call using a phone number

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select Dial, then press .

4. Rotate to select a number, then

5. Rotate to select , then press .

uDialing starts automatically.

■To make a call using redial

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select Redial, then press .

uDialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a phone number

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.

However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed

dial number, phonebook name, or number using

voice commands.

2Limitations for Manual Operation P. 351

2Speed Dial P. 368

You can use the keyboard on the audio with touch

screen to input numbers.

Select numbers, then to start dialing.

1To make a call using redial

Press and hold the button to redial the last

number dialed in your phone’s history.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

Continued

379

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■To make a call using the call history

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select Call History, then

press .

4. Move or to select All, Dialed,

Received, and Missed.

5. Rotate to select a number, then

uDialing starts automatically.

■To make a call using a speed dial entry

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then

4. Rotate to select a number, then

uDialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the call history

The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or

missed calls.

(Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)

These icons next to the number indicate the

following:

: Dialed calls.

: Received calls.

: Missed calls.

1To make a call using a speed dial entry

Move to select More Speed Dials to view another

paired phone’s speed dial list. You can make a call

from that list using the currently connected phone.

When a voice tag is stored, press the button to

call the number using the voice tag.

2Speed Dial P. 368

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name

or number can be dialed by voice from any screen.

Press the button and follow the prompts.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

380

When there is an incoming call, an audible

notification sounds (if activated) and the

Incoming call screen appears.

Press the button to answer the call.

Press the button to decline or end the call.

■Receiving a Call

1Receiving a Call

Call Waiting

Press the button to put the current call on hold to

answer the incoming call.

Press the button again to return to the

current call.

Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to

answer it.

Press the button if you want to hang up the

current call.

You can select the icons on the audio with touch

screen instead of the and buttons.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

381

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

The following options are available during a call.

Mute: Mute your voice.

Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.

Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-

driven phone system.

The available options are shown on the Phone

screen.

Rotate to select the option, then press .

uThe mute icon appears when Mute is

selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

■Options During a Call

1Options During a Call

Touch Tones: Available on some phones.

You can select the icons on the audio with touch

screen.

Mute Icon

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

382

HFL can display newly received text messages and E-mails as well as 20 of the most

recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be

read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.

1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new

text message or E-mail.

2. Rotate to select Read to listen to the

message, then press .

uThe text message or E-mail is displayed.

The system automatically starts reading

out the message.

3. To discontinue the message read-out,

■Receiving a Text Message/E-mail

1Receiving a Text Message/E-mail

The system does not display any received messages

while you are driving. You can only hear them read

aloud.

With some phones, you may be able to display up to

20 most recent text messages and E-mails.

State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text

message/E-mail feature. Only use the text message/

E-mail feature when conditions allow you to do so

safely.

When you receive a text message or E-mail for the

first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are

asked to turn the New Text/Email Alert setting to

On.

2To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice

P. 361

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

Continued

383

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to

be active and receive notifications.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Select

Account.

3. Rotate to select Text message or an

■Selecting a Mail Account

1Selecting a Mail Account

You can also select a mail account from the folder list

screen or the message list screen.

Move to select Select Account, then press .

You can only receive notifications from one text

message or mail account at a time.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

E-mail account you want, then press

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

384

■Displaying text messages

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select Text/Email, then

uSelect account if necessary.

4. Rotate to select a message, then

uThe text message is displayed. The

system automatically starts reading the

message aloud.

■Displaying Messages

1Displaying Messages

The icon appears next to an unread message.

If you delete a message on the phone, the message is

also deleted in the system. If you send a message

from the system, the message goes to your phone’s

outbox.

To see the previous or next message, move or

on the text message screen.

Message List

Text Message

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

Continued

385

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■Displaying E-mails

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select Text/Email, then

4. Rotate to select a folder, then press .

5. Rotate to select a message, then

uThe E-mail is displayed. The system

automatically starts reading the message

aloud.

1Displaying E-mails

Received text messages and E-mails may appear in

the message list screen at the same time. In this case,

text messages are titled No subject.

Folder List

Message List

E-mail

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

386

■Read or stop reading a message

1. Go to the text message or E-mail screen.

uThe system automatically starts reading

the message aloud.

2Displaying Messages P. 384

2. Press to stop reading.

Press again to start reading the message

from the beginning.

■Reply to a message

1. Go to the text message or E-mail screen.

uThe system automatically starts reading

the message aloud.

2Displaying Messages P. 384

2. Move and rotate to select Reply,

then press .

3. Rotate to select the reply message, then

press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

4. Select Send to send the message.

uComplete appears on the screen when

the reply message was successfully sent.

1Reply to a message

The available fixed reply messages are as follows:

•Talk to you later, I’m driving.

•I’m on my way.

•I’m running late.

•OK

•Yes

•No

You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

387

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■Making a call to a sender

1. Go to the text message screen.

uThe system automatically starts reading

the message aloud.

2Displaying text messages P. 384

2. Move and rotate to select Call, then

press .

John 0123456789####

Reply Call

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

388

Compass

When you set the power mode to ON, the compass self-calibrates, and the compass

display appears.

Compass Calibration

If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL indicator blinks, you need

to manually calibrate the system.

1. Set the power mode to ON.

2. On the top screen of any audio source,

press and hold for 5 seconds.

uThe display switches to the Compass

Settings screen.

3. Rotate to select Calibration, then

4. When the display changes to Calibration

Start, press .

5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles.

uThe compass starts to show a direction

after the calibration. The CAL indicator

goes off.

1Compass

Compass operation can be affected under the

following conditions:

•Driving near power lines or stations

•Crossing a bridge

•Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large

object that can cause a magnetic disturbance

•When accessories such as antennas and roof racks

are mounted by magnets

1Compass Calibration

Calibrate the compass in an open area.

While setting the compass, press the BACK button to

cancel the setting mode and return to the previous

screen.

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

press .

389

uuCompass

uCompass Zone Selection

Compass Zone Selection

1. Set the power mode to ON.

2. On the top screen of any audio source,

press and hold for 5 seconds.

uThe display switches to the Compass

Settings screen.

3. Rotate to select Zone Adjust, then

press .

uThe display shows the current zone

number.

4. Rotate to select the zone number of

your area (See Zone Map), then press .

Zone Map

Guam Island: Zone 8

Puerto Rico: Zone 11

1Compass Zone Selection

The zone selection is done to compensate the

variation between magnetic north and true north.

If the calibration starts while the audio system is in

use, the display returns to normal after the calibration

is completed.

2013 Accord Coupe

Features

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

390

2013 Accord Coupe

QRG

Index

Home

391

Driving

This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.

Before Driving

Driving Preparation .......................... 392

Maximum Load Limit........................ 395

Towing a Trailer

Towing Preparation.......................... 397

Driving Safely with a Trailer.............. 399

Towing Your Vehicle........................ 400

When Driving

Starting the Engine .................. 401, 403

Precautions While Driving................. 407

Automatic Transmission/CVT............ 408

Shifting............................ 409, 413, 417

ECON Button ...................................420

Cruise Control ................................. 421

Forward Collision Warning (FCW)

.. 424

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

..... 428

VSA

(Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC

(Electronic Stability Control), System ...... 431

LaneWatch

.......................................... 433

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)... 435

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -

Required Federal Explanation ......... 437

Braking

Brake System ................................... 439

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ........... 441

Brake Assist System ......................... 442

Parking Your Vehicle

When Stopped ................................ 443

Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 444

Rearview Camera ............................. 445

Refueling

Fuel Information .............................. 446

How to Refuel ................................. 447

Fuel Economy

Improving Fuel Economy.................. 448

Accessories and Modifications ........ 449

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

QRG

Index

Home

392

Driving

Before Driving

Driving Preparation

Check the following items before you start driving.

•Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior

lights, or other parts of the vehicle.

uRemove any frost, snow, or ice.

uRemove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of

vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.

uWhen removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel

or wheel components.

•Make sure the hood is securely closed.

uIf the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.

•Make sure the tires are in good condition.

uCheck air pressure, check for damage and excessive wear.

2Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 485

•Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.

uThere are blind spots from the inside.

■Exterior Checks

1Exterior Checks

NOTICE

When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around

the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force

them open, as this can damage the rubber trim

around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid

further freezing.

Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.

You will be unable to insert key if the water freezes in

the hole.

Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite

flammable materials left under the hood, causing a

fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended

period, inspect and remove any debris that may have

collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have

fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a

small animal.

Also check under the hood for leftover flammable

materials after you or someone else has performed

maintenance on your vehicle.

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

393

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

•Store or secure all items on board properly.

uCarrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's

handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.

2Maximum Load Limit P. 395

•Do not pile items higher than the seat height.

uThey can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden

braking.

•Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor

mat.

uAn object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator

pedal operation while driving.

•If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.

uThey may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.

•Securely close and lock both doors and the trunk.

2Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 94

•Adjust your seating position properly.

uAdjust the head restraint, too.

2Adjusting the Seats P. 125

2Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 128

•Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.

uAdjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.

2Adjusting the Mirrors P. 123

2Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 122

■Interior Checks

1Interior Checks

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not

need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry

heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer, have the

aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified

technician.

2013 Accord Coupe

Driving

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

394

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

•Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the

seats.

uThey can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation

of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.

•Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.

2Fastening a Seat Belt P. 33

•Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the

vehicle, and go off soon after.

uAlways have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.

2Indicators P. 66

2013 Accord Coupe

Driving

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

395

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

Continued

Maximum Load Limit

The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg).

See Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver's doorjamb.

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories,

and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load

capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,4000 lbs. and there

will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available

cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

1Maximum Load Limit

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all

occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue

load.

2Specifications P. 530

P. 532

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.

2Specifications P. 530

P. 532

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading

can affect handling and stability

and cause a crash in which you

can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and other

loading guidelines in this manual.

Label Example

2013 Accord Coupe

Driving

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

or XXX lbs.

396

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the

vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage

load capacity calculated in step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred

to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the

available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and

trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or

the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver's doorjamb.

Load Limits Example

Example1

Max Load

850 lbs

(385 kg)

Passenger Weight

150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs

(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

Cargo Weight

550 lbs

(249 kg)

Example2

Max Load

850 lbs

(385 kg)

Passenger Weight

150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs

(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

Cargo Weight

100 lbs

(45 kg)

2013 Accord Coupe

Driving

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

397

Continued

Towing a Trailer

Towing Preparation

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper

equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.

■Total trailer weight

Maximum allowable weight of the trailer,

cargo, and everything in or on it must not

exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing loads in

excess of this can seriously affect vehicle

handling and performance and can damage

the engine and drivetrain.

■Tongue load

The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded

trailer on the hitch should be approximately

10% of the total trailer weight.

•Excessive tongue load reduces front tire

traction and steering control. Too little

tongue load can make the trailer unstable

and cause it to sway.

•To achieve a proper tongue load, start by

loading 60% of the load toward the front

of the trailer and 40% toward the rear.

Readjust the load as needed.

■Towing Load Limits

1Towing Load Limits

Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale.

If a public scale is not available, add the estimated

weight of your cargo load to the weight of your

trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and the

tongue load.

Break-in Period

Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle's first 600

miles (1,000 km).

Never exceed the gross weight ratings.

Gross weight information

2Vehicle Specifications P. 530

P. 532

WARNING

Exceeding any load limit or improperly

loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a

crash in which you can be seriously hurt or

killed.

Check the loading of your vehicle and

trailer carefully before starting to drive.

Total Load

Tongue Load

2013 Accord Coupe

Driving

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

398

Towing equipment varies by the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing,

and where you are towing.

■Hitches

The hitch must be of an approved type and properly bolted to the underbody.

■Safety chains

Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the

trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.

■Trailer brakes

There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are

common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes,

be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to

your vehicle's hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a

potential hazard.

■Additional towing equipment

Many states and provinces/territories require special outside mirrors when towing a

trailer. Even if mirrors are not required in your locale, you should install special

mirrors if visibility is restricted in any way.

■Trailer light

Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and

local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the

requirements in the area where you plan to tow.

■Towing Equipment and Accessories

1Towing Equipment and Accessories

Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and

maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/

territory, and local regulations.

Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other

items are recommended or required for your towing

situation.

The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type

and brand. If a connector is required, it should only

be installed by a qualified technician.

2013 Accord Coupe

Driving

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

399

uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer

Continued

Driving Safely with a Trailer

•Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition.

•Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.

2Towing Load Limits P. 397

•Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer.

•Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while

driving.

•Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly.

•Check the pressures of the trailer tires, including the spare.

•Drive slower than normal.

•Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.

•Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads.

•Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal.

•Allow more time and distance for braking.

•

Do not brake or turn suddenly.

■Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer

■Towing Speeds and Gears

■Turning and Braking

1Driving Safely with a Trailer

Parking

In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel

chocks at each of the trailer's tires.

Automatic transmission/CVT models

2013 Accord Coupe

Driving

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

400

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle

•Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn off the

climate control system and reduce speed. Pull to the side of the road safely to cool

down the engine if necessary.

•Shift to the (S position if the transmission shifts frequently.

Towing Your Vehicle

Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs

to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.

2Emergency Towing P. 527

■Driving in Hilly Terrain

Automatic transmission models

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

401

Continued

When Driving

Starting the Engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

2. Check that the shift lever is in (P, then

depress the brake pedal.

uAlthough it is possible to start the vehicle

in (N, it is safer to start it in (P.

2. Check that the shift lever is in (N. Then

depress the brake pedal with your right

foot, and the clutch pedal with your left

foot.

uThe clutch pedal must be fully depressed

to start the engine.

Models without smart entry system

1Starting the Engine

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when

starting the engine.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in

thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400

meters).

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all

electrical accessories such as the lights, climate

control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce

battery drain.

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,

an engine block heater will improve starting and

warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently

below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant

mixture should be charged to a higher concentration

to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can

smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle

checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with

the engine or exhaust system.

Brake Pedal

Automatic transmission (CVT) models

Brake Pedal

Clutch Pedal

Manual transmission models

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

402

3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e

without depressing the accelerator pedal.

1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that

the brake system indicator has gone off.

2Parking Brake P. 439

2. Put the shift lever in (D. Select (R when reversing.

3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull

away.

■Hill start assist system

Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from

rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.

Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to (1 when facing uphill, or (R when facing

downhill, then release the brake pedal.

Move the shift lever to (D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill,

then release the brake pedal.

1Starting the Engine

Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 15

seconds.

•If the engine does not start right away, wait for at

least 10 seconds before trying again.

•If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,

wait at least 10 seconds before repeating step 3

while gently depressing the accelerator pedal.

Release the accelerator pedal once the engine

starts.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from

theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is

used, the engine's fuel system is disabled.

2Immobilizer System P. 101

■Starting to Drive

Automatic transmission (CVT) models

Manual transmission models

Automatic transmission (CVT) models

1Hill start assist system

Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from

rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and

does not operate on small inclines.

Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking

brake.

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

403

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Continued

Starting the Engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

2. Check that the shift lever is in (P, then

depress the brake pedal.

uAlthough it is possible to start the vehicle

in (N, it is safer to start it in (P.

2. Check that the shift lever is in (N. Then

depress the brake pedal with your right

foot, and the clutch pedal with your left

foot.

uThe clutch pedal must be fully depressed

to start the engine.

Models with smart entry system

1Starting the Engine

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when

starting the engine.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in

thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400

meters).

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all

electrical accessories such as the lights, climate

control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce

battery drain.

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,

an engine block heater will improve starting and

warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently

below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant

mixture should be changed to a higher concentration

to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can

smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle

checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with

the engine or exhaust system.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from

theft.

If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s

fuel system is disabled.

2Immobilizer System P. 101

Brake Pedal

Automatic transmission/CVT models

Brake Pedal

Clutch Pedal

Manual transmission models

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

404

3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button

without depressing the accelerator pedal.

All models

1Starting the Engine

Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE

START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry

remote is weak.

2If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

P. 512

The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is

subjected to strong radio waves.

Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to

start the engine.

If the engine does not start, wait at least 10 seconds

before trying again.

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

405

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Continued

You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.

1. Shift to (P.

2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.

•If the shift lever is in (N, press the ENGINE START/STOP button.

•If the shift lever is in any gear other than (N, depress the clutch pedal, then press

the ENGINE START/STOP button.

1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that

the parking brake indicator has gone off.

2Parking Brake P. 439

2. Put the shift lever in (D. Select (R when reversing.

3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull

away.

■Stopping the Engine

■Starting to Drive

Automatic transmission/CVT models

Manual transmission models

Automatic transmission/CVT models

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

406

■Hill start assist system

Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from

rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.

Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to (1 when facing uphill, or (R when facing

downhill, then release the brake pedal.

Move the shift lever to (D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill,

then release the brake pedal.

Manual transmission models

Automatic transmission/CVT models

1Hill start assist system

Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from

rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and

does not operate on small inclines.

Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking

brake.

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

407

uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving

Precautions While Driving

Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or

driveline, or cause electrical component failure.

If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.

Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

■In Rain

■Other Precautions

1Precautions While Driving

NOTICE

Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the

accelerator pedal. You could damage the

transmission.

If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q or

LOCK (0

while driving, the engine will shut down

and all steering and brake power assist functions will

stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.

Do not put the shift lever in (N, as you will lose

engine braking (and acceleration) performance.

During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,

avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so

as to not damage the engine or powertrain.

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).

You should also follow this when the brake pads are

replaced.

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

408

uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission/CVT

Automatic Transmission/CVT

The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases.

Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.

Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the

transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress

the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.

■Creeping

■Kickdown

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

409

uuWhen Driving uShifting

Continued

Shifting

Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

■Shift lever positions

Automatic transmission (CVT) models

1Shifting

You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0

and remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P.

The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in

(N while the engine is cold.

Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,

apply the parking brake.

When shifting positions in extremely low

temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short

delay before the shift position is displayed. Always

confirm you are in the correct shift position before

driving.

Reverse

Used when reversing

Drive

Used:

●

For normal driving

●

When temporarily driving in the 7-speed

manual shift mode

Park

Used when parking or starting the engine

Neutral

Used when idling

Release Button Drive (S)

Used:

●

For better acceleration

●

To increase engine braking

●

When going up or down hills

●

When driving in the 7-speed manual

shift mode

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

410

■Shift Lever Operation

1Shift Lever Operation

NOTICE

When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and

vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the

brake pedal depressed.

Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come

to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.

Use the shift lever position indicator to check the

lever position before pulling away.

If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in

any shift position, there is a problem with the

transmission.

Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission

checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine

speeds in or over the tachometer's red zone (engine

speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a

slight jolt.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the

brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release

button is held down.

Depress the brake pedal first.

Shift Lever Position Indicator

Depress the brake pedal and press the

shift lever release button to shift.

Shift without pressing the shift lever

release button.

Press the shift lever release button

and shift.

Tachometer’s red zone

M (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode)

Indicator/Shift Indicator

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

Continued

411

uuWhen Driving uShifting

Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 7th speeds without removing

your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission switches to the 7-speed

manual shift mode when you pull a paddle shifter while driving. This mode is useful

when engine braking is needed.

■When the shift lever is in (D:

The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode temporarily, and the

number is displayed in the shift indicator.

The 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled automatically if you drive at constant

speed or accelerate, and the number in the shift indicator goes off.

You can cancel this mode by pulling the (+ paddle shifter for a few seconds.

The 7-speed manual shift mode is especially useful when reducing the vehicle speed

temporarily before making a turn.

■When the shift lever is in (S:

The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode. The M indicator and the

speed number are displayed in the shift indicator. As the vehicle speed slows down,

the transmission automatically shifts down accordingly. When the vehicle comes to

a stop, it automatically shifts down into 1st.

If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer’s

red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up.

You can only pull away in 1st speed.

When canceling the 7-speed manual shift mode, move the shift lever from (S to

(D. When the 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and shift

indicator go off.

■7-Speed Manual Shift Mode

17-Speed Manual Shift Mode

To improve fuel economy, the transmission may shift

up to a higher speed than the seventh under certain

circumstances. In this case, the number in the shift

indicator remains as 7.

In the 7-speed manual shift mode, the transmission

shifts up or down by operating either paddle shifter

under the following conditions:

Shift Up: The engine speed reaches the lowest

threshold of the higher speed position.

Shift Down: The engine speed reaches the highest

threshold of the lower speed position.

When the engine speed reaches near the

tachometer’s red zone, the transmission shifts up

automatically.

When the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold

of the selected speed position, the transmission shifts

down automatically.

Operating the paddle shifters on slippery surfaces

may cause the tires to lock up. In this case, the 7-

speed manual shift mode is canceled and goes back

to the normal D driving mode.

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

412

■7-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation

17-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation

Each paddle shift operation makes a single speed

change.

To change continuously, release the paddle shifter

before pulling it again for the next speed.

Recommended Shift Points

Use this table as a guideline to help increase fuel

efficiency and reduce emissions.

The shift indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or

down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its

allowable shifting range.

Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift

down while the indicator is blinking.

Shift Up Normal Acceleration

1 to 2 15 mph (24 km/h)

2 to 3 25 mph (40 km/h)

3 to 4 40 mph (64 km/h)

4 to 5 47 mph (76 km/h)

5 to 6 52 mph (84 km/h)

(- Paddle Shifter

(Shift down)

(+ Paddle Shifter

(Shift up)

Downshifting when pulling

the (- paddle shifter

(Changes to lower speed

number)

Upshifting when pulling

the (+ paddle shifter

(Changes to higher speed

number)

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

413

uuWhen Driving uShifting

Continued

Shifting

Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

■Shift lever positions

Automatic transmission models

1Shifting

You cannot change the power mode from ON to

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) unless the shift lever is in (P.

The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in

(N while the engine is cold.

Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,

apply the parking brake.

When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures

(-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short delay before the

shift is indicated in the display. Always confirm you

are in the correct gear before driving.

Reverse

Used when reversing

Drive

Used for:

●

Normal driving (gears change between

1st and 6th automatically)

●

Temporally driving in the sequential

mode

Park

Used when parking or starting the engine

Neutral

Used when idling

Release Button

Drive (S)

●

Automatically changing gears between

1st and 5th (5th gear is used only at

high speed)

●

Used when towing a trailer in hilly

terrain

●

Used for driving in the sequential mode

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

414

■Shift Lever Operation

1Shift Lever Operation

NOTICE

When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and

vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the

brake pedal depressed.

Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come

to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.

Use the shift lever position indicator to check the

lever position before pulling away.

If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in

any shift position, there is a problem with the

transmission.

Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission

checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine

speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine

speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a

slight jolt.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the

brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release

button is held down.

Depress the brake pedal first.

Shift Lever Position Indicator

Depress the brake pedal and press the

shift lever release button to shift.

Shift without pressing the shift lever

release button.

Press the shift lever release button

and shift.

Tachometer’s red zone

M (Sequential Shift Mode)

Indicator/Gear Position Indicator

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

415

uuWhen Driving uShifting

Continued

Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 6th gears without removing your

hands from the steering wheel. The transmission will switch to the sequential shift

mode.

■When the shift lever is in (D:

The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode momentarily, and the gear position

indicator will come on.

Once you start traveling at a constant speed, the sequential shift mode will

automatically switch off, and the gear position indicator will go off.

Hold the (+ paddle shifter for two seconds to return to normal drive.

■When the shift lever is in (S:

The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode, and the M (sequential shift mode)

indicator and gear position indicator will come on. At speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or

less, the vehicle automatically shift down into 1st gear.

If you do not operate the paddle shifters while in 1st gear, the transmission

automatically shift up to 2nd gear. If does not shift automatically from 2nd through

6th gears.

You can only pull away in 1st and 2nd gear.

When canceling the sequential shift mode, move the shift lever from (S to (D.

When the sequential shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and gear position

indicator go off.

■Sequential Shift Mode

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

416

■Second gear lock mode

If you pull the (+ paddle shifter while stopped or driving at 6 mph (10 km/h) or less,

the gear position will be locked in 2nd gear. This makes it easier to pull away on

slippery surfaces such as snow covered roads.

To cancel the 2nd gear lock mode, pull the (- paddle shifter, or move the shift lever

from (S to (D.

■Sequential Shift Mode Operation

1Sequential Shift Mode Operation

Each paddle shift operation makes a single gear

change.

To change gear continuously, release the paddle

shifter before pulling it again for the next gear.

Recommended Shift Points

Use this table as a guideline to help increase fuel

efficiency and reduce emissions.

The gear position indicator blinks when you cannot

shift up or down. It indicates that your vehicle speed

is not in its allowable gear shifting range.

Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift

down while the indicator is blinking.

Shift Up Normal Acceleration

1st to 2nd 15 mph (24 km/h)

2nd to 3rd 25 mph (40 km/h)

3rd to 4th 40 mph (64 km/h)

4th to 5th 47 mph (76 km/h)

5th to 6th 53 mph (85 km/h)

(- Paddle Shifter

(Shift down)

(+ Paddle Shifter

(Shift up)

Downshifting when pulling

the (- paddle shifter

(Changes to a lower gear)

Upshifting when pulling

the (+ paddle shifter

(Changes to a higher gear)

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

417

uuWhen Driving uShifting

Continued

Shifting

Fully depress the clutch pedal to operate the shift lever and change gears, then

slowly release the pedal.

Depress the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into (R, or

shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. This stops the gears so they do not

“grind.”

■Shift Lever Operation

Manual transmission models

1Shifting

NOTICE

Do not shift to (R before the vehicle comes to a

complete stop.

Shifting to (R before stopping can damage the

transmission.

NOTICE

Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not

go into the tachometer's red zone. Should this occur,

it can severely damage your engine.

There is a metallic part on the shift lever. If you leave

the vehicle parked outside for a long time on a hot

day, be careful before moving the shift lever. Because

of heat, the shift lever may be extremely hot. If the

outside temperature is low, the shift lever may feel

cold.

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

418

When you are not shifting, do not rest your

foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your

clutch to wear out faster.

1Shifting

Recommended Shift Points

Driving in the highest gear that allows the engine to

run and accelerate smoothly helps to optimize fuel

economy and effective emissions control. The

following shift points are recommended:

If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you

are in, the engine speed will enter into the

tachometer's red zone. When this happens, you may

experience a slight jolt.

Shift Up Normal Acceleration

1st to 2nd 17 mph (27 km/h)

2nd to 3rd 29 mph (46 km/h)

3rd to 4th 37 mph (60 km/h)

4th to 5th 43 mph (69 km/h)

5th to 6th 49 mph (79 km/h)

Shift Up Normal Acceleration

1st to 2nd 17 mph (28 km/h)

2nd to 3rd 27 mph (44 km/h)

3rd to 4th 36 mph (58 km/h)

4th to 5th 41 mph (66 km/h)

5th to 6th 44 mph (71 km/h)

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

419

uuWhen Driving uShifting

The manual transmission has a lockout mechanism that stops you from accidentally

shifting into (R from a forward gear while the vehicle is moving above a certain

speed.

If you cannot shift to (R when the vehicle is stopped, do the following:

1. Depress the clutch pedal, move the shift

lever all the way to the left, and shift to (R.

2. If you still cannot shift into (R, apply the

parking brake, and turn the ignition switch

to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0

3. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into (R.

4. Keep depressing the clutch pedal and start

the engine.

Have the vehicle checked by a dealer if you

have to go through this procedure repeatedly.

■Reverse Lockout

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

420

uuWhen DrivinguECON Button

ECON Button

The ECON button turns the ECON mode on

and off.

The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel

economy by adjusting the performance of the

engine, transmission, climate control system,

and cruise control.

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

421

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

Continued

Cruise Control

Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the

accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a

constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.

1Cruise Control

It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed

when driving uphill or downhill.

When not using cruise control:

Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE

button.

While in the ECON mode, it may take relatively more

time to accelerate to maintain the set speed.

When the engine speed slows down, try to

downshift.

You can maintain the set speed if you change gear

within fives seconds.

WARNING

Improper use of the cruise control can lead

to a crash.

Use the cruise control only when traveling

on open highways in good weather.

Manual transmission models

When to use

■

Shift positions for cruise control:

In (D or (S

Always keep sufficient distance

between you and the vehicle in

front of you.

Automatic transmission/CVT models

■

Vehicle speed for cruise control:

Desired speed in a range above

roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~

How to use

CRUISE MAIN is on in the

instrument panel.

Cruise control is ready to use.

■

Press the CRUISE button on

the steering wheel.

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

422

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired

speed.

The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control

begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.

■To Set the Vehicle Speed

–/SET Button

On when cruise control begins

Press and release

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

423

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET buttons on the

steering wheel.

•Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by

about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

•If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you

release it. This speed is then set.

To cancel cruise control, do any of the

following:

•Press the CANCEL button.

•Press the CRUISE button.

•Depress the brake pedal.

•Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or

more.

The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.

■To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

You can set the vehicle speed using the –/SET button

on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with

the accelerator and brake pedals.

■To Cancel

To decrease speed

To increase speed

1To Cancel

Resuming the prior set speed:

After cruise control has been canceled, you can still

resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+

button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph

(40 km/h) or more.

You cannot set or resume in the following situations:

•When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)

•When the CRUISE button is turned off

At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise

control is canceled automatically.

CRUISE

Button

CANCEL

Button

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

424

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)

Forward Collision Warning (FCW)

Alerts you when it detects the possibility of your vehicle colliding with the vehicle in

front of yours.

If the system determines a collision is possible, it gives both visual and audible alerts,

including a heads-up warning that flashes on the windshield.

uTake appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes,

etc.).

■How the system works

The system may give warnings of potential collisions when your vehicle speed is

above 10 mph (15 km/h).

1Forward Collision Warning (FCW)

Important Safety Reminder

FCW cannot detect all objects ahead and may not

detect a given object; accuracy of the system will vary

based on weather, speed and other factors. FCW

does not include a braking function. It is always your

responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid

collisions.

You can change the Forward Collision Warning

Distance setting or turn the system on and off.

2Customized Features P. 273

The camera is shared with Lane Departure Warning

(LDW).

2LDW Camera P. 429

LONG

NORMAL

SHORT

Your Vehicle Vehicle Ahead

You can set Long, Normal or Short for when warnings start:

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

Continued

425

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)

1Forward Collision Warning (FCW)

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the

windshield that could obstruct the FCW camera's

field of vision.

Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield

within the FCW camera's field of vision can cause the

system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we

recommend that you replace the windshield with a

genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making

even minor repairs within the camera's field of vision

or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield

may also cause the system to operate abnormally.

After replacing the windshield, have a dealer

recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the FCW

camera is necessary for the system to operate

properly.

Beep

Camera-based system

The camera is located

behind the rearview mirror.

The beeper sounds and

the FCW indicator blinks

until a possible collision

is avoided.

Heads-up Warning Lights

Flash twice.

1How the system works

The heads-up warning uses a lens located at the front

end of the dashboard.

Do not cover the lens or spill any liquid on it.

Lens

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)

426

■Automatic shutoff

FCW may automatically shut itself off and the FCW indicator comes and stays on when:

•The temperature inside the system is high.

•The windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.

Once the conditions that caused FCW to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g.,

cleaning), the system comes back on.

1Automatic shutoff

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior

temperatures will cause the camera system to shut

off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front

of the vehicle away from the sun. Also, do not use a

reflective sun shade that can concentrate heat on the

camera.

If the CAMERA HOT message appears:

•Use the climate control system to cool down the

interior and, if necessary, the defroster mode when

windows are fogged.

•Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield

temperature, which cools down the area around

the FCW system.

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

427

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)

FCW may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle, and may

activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or when there is no

vehicle ahead under the following conditions.

■FCW Limitations

Condition

●

The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.

●

A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.

●

A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.

●

When either your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you accelerates rapidly.

●

The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, a small vehicle, or a unique vehicle such as a

tractor.

●

When you drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an

extended period that makes it difficult for the camera to properly detect a vehicle in front

of you.

●

When there are pedestrians or animals in front of your vehicle.

●

When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.).

●

A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle.

●

An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).

●

When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.

●

When the temperature inside the system is high.

●

A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.

●

You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk).

●

When the windshield is dirty or cloudy.

●

When streetlights are perceived as the taillight of a vehicle in front of yours.

●

When driving at night, the vehicle ahead of you is running with either taillight bulb burned

out.

●

When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.

●

When your vehicle is towing a trailer.

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

428

uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

Alerts you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally

crossing over left or right side lane markings.

If your vehicle is getting too close to detected

left or right side lane markings without a turn

signal activated, LDW will give audible and

visual alerts.

The beeper sounds and the LDW indicator

blinks, letting you know that you need to take

appropriate action.

■How the System Works

1Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

Important Safety Reminder

Like all assistance systems, LDW has limitations.

Over-reliance on LDW may result in a collision. It is

always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within

your driving lane.

LDW only alerts you when lane drift is detected

without a turn signal in use. LDW may not detect all

lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary

based on weather, speed and lane marker condition.

It is always your responsibility to safely operate the

vehicle and avoid collisions.

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

Continued

429

uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW)

The system begins to search for lane markings when all the following conditions are met:

•The vehicle is traveling between at 40-90 mph (64-145 km/h).

•The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.

•The turn signals are off.

•The brake pedal is not pressed.

The camera is located behind the rearview

mirror.

Press the LDW button to turn the system on

and off.

uThe indicator in the button comes on

when the system is on.

■How the System Activates

■LDW Camera

1How the System Activates

LDW may automatically shut off and the LDW

indicator comes and stays on.

2Indicators P. 74

1LDW Camera

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the

windshield that could obstruct the LDW camera's

field of vision.

Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield

within the LDW camera's field of vision can cause the

system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we

recommend that you replace the windshield with a

genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making

even minor repairs within the camera's field of vision

or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield

may also cause the system to operate abnormally.

After replacing the windshield, have a dealer

recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the LDW

camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior

temperatures will cause the camera system to shut off,

when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the

vehicle away from the sun. Also, do not use a reflective

sun shade that can concentrate heat on the camera.

If the CAMERA HOT message appears:

•Use the climate control system to cool down the

interior and, if necessary, the defroster mode when

windows are fogged.

•Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield

temperature, which cools down the area around

the LDW system.

LDW Camera

■LDW On and Off

LDW Button

Indicator

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

* Not available on all models

430

uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW)

LDW may not activate or may not recognize lanes, and may activate even when

keeping in the middle of a lane under the following conditions.

■LDW Limitations

Condition

●

When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.).

●

A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle.

●

An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).

●

When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.

●

When the temperature inside the system is high.

●

A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.

●

You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk).

●

When the windshield is dirty or cloudy.

●

When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.

●

When your vehicle is towing a trailer.

●

When you drive on a wet road surface following another vehicle.

uThe camera may perceive the tire tracks in the water as lane lines.

●

When there is snow or wheel tracks on the side of the road.

●

When the road has many repaired area or an erased lane line.

●

When the vehicle is running over painted signs or crosswalk markings.

●

When you drive in a lane with specific lane markups (e.g., bots-dots).

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

431

uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System

Continued

VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic

Stability Control), System

VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less

than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces.

It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA® activates, you may notice that the

engine does not respond to the accelerator.

You may also notice some noise from the

hydraulic system. You will also see the

indicator blink.

■VSA® Operation

1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability

Control), System

The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and

size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and

type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.

When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on

while driving, there may be a problem with the

system. While this may not interfere with normal

driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer

immediately.

VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations

and does not control the entire braking system. You

still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate

for the conditions and always leave a sufficient

margin of safety.

The main function of the VSA® system is generally

known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The

system also includes a traction control function.

VSA® System

Indicator

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System

432

This button is on the driver side control panel.

To turn the VSA® system on and off, press and

hold it until you hear a beep.

VSA® will stop and the indicator will come on.

To turn it on again, press the (VSA® OFF)

button until you hear a beep.

VSA® is turned on every time you start the

engine, even if you turned it off the last time

you drove the vehicle.

■VSA® On and Off

1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability

Control), System

Without VSA®, your vehicle will have normal braking

and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA®

traction and stability enhancement.

In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets

stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier

to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.

When the VSA® system is off, the traction control

system is also off. You should only attempt to free

your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to

free it when the VSA® is on.

Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to

switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving

your vehicle with the VSA® and traction control

systems switched off.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on or

blinks, the VSA® system comes on automatically. In

this case, you cannot turn the system off by pressing

the button.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the

engine compartment while system checks are being

performed immediately after starting the engine or

while driving. This is normal.

VSA® OFF Indicator

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

433

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatch

Continued

LaneWatch

Is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear areas

displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to the

passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these areas

and allows you to check for vehicle, in addition to your visual check and use of the

passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience while

driving.

1LaneWatch

Important Safety Reminder

Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has

limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in

a collision.

The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather,

lighting (including headlights and low sun angle),

ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.

The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique

lens makes objects on the screen slightly look

different from what they are.

LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift

lever is in (R.

WARNING

Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to

change lanes before doing so may result in

a crash and serious injury or death.

Do not rely only on LaneWatch while

driving.

Always look in your mirrors, to either side

of your vehicle, and behind you for other

vehicles before changing lanes.

1 2

Camera

Audio/Information Screen

Move the turn signal

lever to the passenger

side.

Press the LaneWatch

button.

Pull the turn signal

lever back.

Press the LaneWatch

button again.

The passenger side view

display appears on the

audio/information screen.

The system activates when you:

The system deactivates when you:

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatch

434

■Customizing the LaneWatch Settings

You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen.

•Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when

you operate the turn signal light lever.

•Reference Lines: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch

monitor.

•Next Maneuver Pop up

: Selects whether a turn direction screen of the

navigation system interrupts the LaneWatch display.

•Display: Adjusts display settings.

2Customized Features P. 273

■Reference Lines

Three lines that appear on the screen can give

an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on

the screen are from your vehicle, respectively.

If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates

that it is close to your vehicle whereas an

object near line 3 farther away.

1LaneWatch

For a proper LaneWatch use:

•The camera is located in the passenger side door

mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera

lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft,

moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of

debris.

•Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers

of any kind.

•Do not touch the camera lens.

1Reference Lines

The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close

to your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually

confirm the safety of a lane change before changing

lanes.

The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and

3 on the screen vary depending on road condition

and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines

on the screen may seem to appear closer than the

actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more

heavily loaded.

Consult a dealer if:

•The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is

severely impacted, resulting in changing the

camera angle.

•The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

* Not available on all models

435

uuWhen DrivinguTPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

Continued

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle

monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each

wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are

significantly under-inflated. This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to

come.

You must start TPMS calibration every time you:

•Adjust the pressure in one or more tires.

•Rotate the tires.

•Replace one or more tires.

Before calibrating the TPMS:

•Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.

2Checking Tires P. 485

Make sure:

•The vehicle is at a complete stop.

•The shift lever is in (N.

•The shift lever is in (P.

•The ignition switch is in ON (w

■TPMS Calibration

1TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

The system does not monitor the tires when driving

at low speed.

Conditions such as low ambient temperature and

altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can

trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.

Tire pressure checked and inflated in:

•Warm weather can become under-inflated in

colder weather.

•Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer

weather.

The low tire pressure indicator will not come on as a

result of over inflation.

The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and

size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and

type of tire.

2Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 485

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on

with a delay or may not come on at all when:

•You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the

steering wheel.

•You drive on snowy or slippery roads.

•Snow chains are used.

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on

under the following conditions:

•A compact spare tire is used.

•There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires,

such as when towing a trailer, than the condition at

calibration.

•Snow chains are used.

Manual transmission models

Automatic transmission/CVT models

All models

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

* Not available on all models

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

uuWhen DrivinguTPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

436

Press and hold the TPMS button until the low

tire pressure/TPMS indicator blinks twice,

indicating the calibration process has begun.

•If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator does

not blink, confirm the above conditions

then press and hold the TPMS button again.

•The calibration process finishes

automatically.

1TPMS Calibration

•TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is

installed.

•The calibration process requires approximately 30

minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between

30-60 mph (48-97 km/h).

•During this period, if the ignition is turned on and

the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you

may notice the low tire pressure indicator comes on

briefly. This is normal and indicates that the

calibration process is not yet complete.

You can calibrate the system using the audio/

information screen.

2Customized Features P. 273

If the snow chains are installed, remove them before

calibrating the TPMS.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even

when the properly inflated specified regular tires are

installed, have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

We recommend that the tires be replaced with the

same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a

dealer for details.

TPMS

Button

Low Tire Pressure/

TPMS Indicator

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

437

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

Continued

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -

Required Federal Explanation

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when

cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle

manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire

inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped

with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that

illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of

your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop

and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper

pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can

lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

U.S. models

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

438

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it

is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-

inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to

indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction

indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system

detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and

then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to

detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation

of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS

from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and

wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

439

Continued

Braking

Brake System

Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking.

To apply:

Pull the lever fully up without pressing the

release button.

To release:

1. Pull the lever slightly, and press and hold

the release button.

2. Lower the lever down all the way, then

release the button.

■Parking Brake

1Parking Brake

NOTICE

Release the parking brake fully before driving. The

rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive

with the parking brake applied.

If you start driving without fully releasing the parking

brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning.

Always apply the parking brake when parking.

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

uuBrakinguBrake System

440

Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist

helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases

the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency

situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when

braking very hard.

2Brake Assist System P. 442

2ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 441

■Foot Brake

1Foot Brake

Check the brakes after driving through deep water,

or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If

necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the

pedal several times.

If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when

applying the brakes, the brake pads need to be

replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a

long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake

effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your

foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a

lower gear. With manual transmission use a lower

gear for greater engine braking.

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while

driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause

them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad

life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

441

uuBrakinguABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by

pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.

The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also

balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.

You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always

keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as

“stomp and steer.”

■ABS operation

The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the

pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very

hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately

if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.

■ABS

1ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

NOTICE

The ABS may not function correctly if you use an

incorrect tire type and size.

When the ABS indicator comes on while driving,

there may be a problem with the system.

While normal braking is not affected, there is a

possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle

checked by a dealer immediately.

The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes

to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control

during hard braking.

In the following cases, your vehicle may need more

stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:

•When driving on rough road surfaces, including

when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or

snow.

•When tire chains are installed.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the

engine compartment while system checks are being

performed immediately after starting the engine or

while driving. This is normal.

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

442

uuBrakinguBrake Assist System

Brake Assist System

Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress

the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.

■Brake assist system operation

Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.

When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise

may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.

■Brake Assist System

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

443

Parking Your Vehicle

When Stopped

1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P.

3. Move the shift lever to (R.

4. Turn off the engine.

Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.

1Parking Your Vehicle

Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,

such as dry grass, oil, or timber.

Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.

1When Stopped

NOTICE

The following can damage the transmission:

•Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals

simultaneously.

•Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by

depressing the accelerator pedal.

•Moving the shift lever into

(P before the vehicle

stops completely.

Raise the wiper arms when snow is expected.

Automatic transmission/CVT models

Manual transmission models

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

444

Multi-View Rear Camera

About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display

automatically changes to the rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R.

You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display. Press the

selector knob to switch the angle.

If the last used viewing mode is Wide or Normal, the same mode is selected the next

time you shift into (R. If Top View was last used, Wide mode is selected.

■Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area

Models with two displays/Models with navigation system

1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see

the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath

the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects

appear closer or farther than they actually are.

Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing

up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and

high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do

not rely on the rearview display which does not give

you all information about conditions at the back of

your vehicle.

If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,

use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free

of debris.

You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic

Guideline settings.

2Customized Features P. 273

Fixed Guideline

On: Guidelines appear when you shift into (R.

Off: Guidelines do not appear.

Dynamic Guideline

On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel

direction.

Off: Guidelines do not move.

Top Down View Mode

Normal View Mode

Wide View Mode

Guidelines

Bumper

Camera

Approx. 118 inches (3 m)

Approx. 79 inches (2 m)

Approx. 39 inches (1 m)

Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

445

Rearview Camera

About Your Rearview Camera

The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view.

The display automatically changes to a rear view when the shift lever is

moved to

(R.

The rearview camera has a unique lens that makes objects appear closer or further

than they actually are.

■Rearview Camera Display Area

Models with one display

1About Your Rearview Camera

The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see

the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath

the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects

appear closer or farther than they actually are.

Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing

up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and

high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do

not rely on the rearview display which does not give

you all information about conditions at the back of

your vehicle.

If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,

use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free

of debris.

You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic

Guideline settings.

2Customized Features P. 273

Fixed Guideline

On: Guidelines appear when you shift into (R.

Off: Guidelines do not appear.

Dynamic Guideline

On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel

direction.

Off: Guidelines do not move.

Bumper

Guidelines Approx. 118 in (3 m)

Approx. 79 in (2 m)

Approx. 39 in (1 m)

Approx. 20 in (0.5 m)

Approx. 118 in (3 m)

Approx. 79 in (2 m)

Approx. 39 in (1 m)

Camera

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

446

Refueling

Fuel Information

■Fuel recommendation

Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise

that can lead to engine damage.

■Top tier detergent gasoline

Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda

endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help

maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent

Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive

manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.

Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met

“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is

guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic

additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic

additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission

control system.

For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on

gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit

www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top

tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

■Fuel tank capacity: 17.2 US gal (65 liters)

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher

1Fuel Information

NOTICE

We recommend quality gasoline containing

detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and

engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain

good performance, fuel economy, and emissions

control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline

that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based

fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is

available.

Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely

affect performance, and cause the malfunction

indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.

If this happens, contact a dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such

as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on

oxygenated gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol

by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.

If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try

another service station or switch to another brand of

gasoline.

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

447

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

How to Refuel

1. Stop your vehicle with the service station

pump on the left side of the vehicle in the

rear.

2. Turn off the engine.

3. Push on the fuel fill door release handle at

the foot of the driver’s seat.

uThe fuel fill door opens.

4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a

release of air, wait until this stops, then turn

the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.

5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder.

6. Insert the filler nozzle fully.

uWhen the tank is full, the fuel nozzle will

click off automatically. This leaves space

in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands

with a change in the temperature.

7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap, tightening

it until you hear it click at least once.

uShut the fuel fill door by hand.

1How to Refuel

The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in

the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result

of changes in air temperature.

If the fuel nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is

not full, there may be a problem with the pump's fuel

vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If

this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.

Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has

automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed

the full tank capacity.

WARNING

Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.

You can be burned or seriously injured

when handling fuel.

•Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,

and flame away.

•Handle fuel only outdoors.

•Wipe up spills immediately.

Push

Cap

Holder

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

448

Fuel Economy

Improving Fuel Economy

Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your

driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and

other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.

You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.

Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the

information display.

•Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.

•Maintain the specified tire pressure.

•Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.

•Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside

adds weight and increases wind resistance.

■Maintenance and Fuel Economy

1Improving Fuel Economy

Direct calculation is the recommended method to

determine actual fuel consumed while driving.

In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are

established following a simulated test. For more

information on how this test is performed, please visit

http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/

Miles driven Gallons of

fuel

Miles per

Gallon

100 Liter Kilometers L per 100 km

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

449

Accessories and Modifications

Accessories

When installing accessories, check the following:

•Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and

delay your reaction to driving conditions.

2Forward Collision Warning (FCW)

P. 424

2Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

P. 428

•Do not install accessories on the side pillars or across the side windows.

Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the

side curtain airbags.

•Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with

proper operation of your vehicle.

2Fuses P. 524

•Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for

assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.

Modifications

Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Honda components that can affect its

handling, stability, and reliability.

Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is

properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province,

territory, and local regulations.

1Accessories and Modifications

Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to

ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

WARNING

Improper accessories or modifications can

affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and

performance, and cause a crash in which

you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner's

manual regarding accessories and

modifications.

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Driving

450

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

451

Maintenance

This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance

Inspection and Maintenance ............ 452

Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 453

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance

Service ........................................... 454

Maintenance Minder

..................... 455

Maintenance Under the Hood

Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 459

Opening the Hood ........................... 461

Recommended Engine Oil ................ 463

Oil Check......................................... 464

Adding Engine Oil............................ 466

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 467

Engine Coolant................................ 469

Transmission Fluid............................ 471

Brake/Clutch Fluid............................ 473

Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 474

Replacing Light Bulbs....................... 475

Checking and Maintaining Wiper

Blades .......................................... 483

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Checking Tires ................................. 485

Tire and Loading Information Label...... 486

Tire Labeling .................................... 486

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).......488

Wear Indicators................................ 490

Tire Service Life................................ 490

Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 491

Tire Rotation.................................... 492

Winter Tires ..................................... 493

Battery............................................... 494

Remote Transmitter Care

Replacing the Button Battery ........... 495

Climate Control System Maintenance .. 497

Cleaning

Interior Care .................................... 498

Exterior Care.................................... 500

2013 Accord Coupe

QRG

Index

Home

452

Maintenance

Before Performing Maintenance

Inspection and Maintenance

For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle

in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient

brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in

effect.) Refer to the separate maintenance booklet for detailed maintenance and

inspection information.

■Daily inspections

Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when

refueling.

■Periodic inspections

•Check the brake fluid level monthly.

2Brake/Clutch Fluid P. 473

•Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.

2Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 485

•Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.

2Replacing Light Bulbs P. 475

•Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.

2Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 483

■Types of Inspection and Maintenance

1Inspection and Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of

emissions control devices and systems may be

done by any automotive repair establishment or

individuals using parts that are “certified” to

EPA standards.

According to state and federal regulations, failure to

perform maintenance on the maintenance main

items marked with # will not void your emissions

warranties. However, all maintenance services should

be performed in accordance with the intervals

indicated by the information display.

2Maintenance Service Items P. 457

If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks

that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a

subscription to the Service Express website at

www.techinfo.honda.com.

2Authorized Manuals P. 541

If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make

sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.

After performing maintenance, update the records in

the separate maintenance booklet.

U.S. models

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

453

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance

Safety When Performing Maintenance

Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.

However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in

performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform

a given task.

•To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames

away from the battery and all fuel related parts.

•Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.

uHeat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.

•To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not

gasoline.

•Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or

compressed air.

•Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.

uOnly operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.

•The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.

uMake sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and

the engine is off.

•Be aware that hot parts can burn you.

uMake sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before

touching vehicle parts.

•Be aware that moving parts can injure you.

uDo not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away

from moving parts.

■Maintenance Safety

■Vehicle Safety

1Safety When Performing Maintenance

WARNING

Improperly maintaining this vehicle or

failing to correct a problem before driving

can cause a crash in which you can be

seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection and

maintenance recommendations according

to the schedules in this owner's manual.

WARNING

Failure to properly follow maintenance

instructions and precautions can cause you

to be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures and

precautions in this owner's manual.

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

454

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and

servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the

same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

455

Continued

Maintenance Minder

If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages

appear on the information display every time you turn the ignition switch to ON

. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your

vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.

To Use Maintenance Minder

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w

2. Press the (Select/Reset) knob repeatedly

until the engine oil life appears on the

information display.

The Maintenance Minder indicator ( ) stays

on in the instrument panel after the engine oil

life becomes 0%. Have the indicated

maintenance done by a dealer immediately.

■Displaying the Engine Oil Life

1Displaying the Engine Oil Life

Based on the engine operating conditions, the

remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed

as a percentage.

Displayed Engine Oil

Life (%)

Calculated Engine Oil

Life (%)

100 100 to 91

90 90 to 81

80 80 to 71

70 70 to 61

60 60 to 51

50 50 to 41

40 40 to 31

30 30 to 21

20 20 to 16

15 15 to 11

10 10 to 6

55 to 1

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

456

uuMaintenance Minder

uTo Use Maintenance Minder

To switch the display, press the (Select/Reset) knob.

■Maintenance Minder Messages on the Information Display

Oil Life Display Explanation Information Maintenance Minder Indicator

The engine oil life indicator starts

to appear along with other due

soon maintenance item codes

when the remaining oil life

becomes 15 percent.

The engine oil is approaching the

end of its service life.

Starts to come on when the

remaining engine oil life becomes

15 percent.

It goes off when the display is

switched.

The SERVICE message also starts

to appear along with the engine oil

life indicator and the maintenance

item codes.

The engine oil has almost reached

the end of its service life, and the

maintenance items should be

inspected and serviced as soon as

possible.

The remaining engine oil life has

passed its service life, and a

negative distance appears after

driving over 10 miles (U.S. models)

or 10 km (Canadian models). The

negative distance on the display

blinks.

The engine oil life has passed.

The maintenance items must be

inspected and serviced

immediately. Stays on as a reminder even when

the display is switched.

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

457

uuMaintenance Minder

uTo Use Maintenance Minder

Continued

■Maintenance Service Items

1Maintenance Service Items

•Independent of the Maintenance Minder

information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

•Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles

•Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if

they are noisy.

Maintenance Minder

Message

Maintenance

Minder Indicator

Sub ItemsMain Item

*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the

engine oil every year.

#: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

CODE Maintenance Main Items

●

Replace engine oil

●

Replace engine oil

and oil filter

●

Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary

●

Check parking brake adjustment

●

Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots

●

Inspect suspension components

●

Inspect driveshaft boots

●

Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)

●

Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids

●

Inspect exhaust system

●

Inspect fuel lines and connections

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and

from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

*4: 6-cylinder models

*5: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110 °F, 43 °C), in very low temperatures (under -

20 °F, -29 °C), or tow a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles/100,000 km.

CODE Maintenance Sub Items

●

Rotate tires

●

Replace air cleaner element

●

Replace dust and pollen filter

●

Inspect drive belt

●

Replace transmission fluid

●

Replace spark plugs

●

Replace timing belt and inspect water pump

*4,*5

●

Inspect valve clearance

●

Replace engine coolant

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

(256,000 km).

uuMaintenance Minder

uTo Use Maintenance Minder

458

Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w

2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly

pressing the (Select/Reset) knob.

3. Press and hold the knob for ten seconds

or more.

uThe engine oil life indicator and the

maintenance item codes blink.

4. Press the knob for five seconds or more.

uThe displayed maintenance items

disappear, and the engine oil life display

returns to 100%.

■Resetting the Display

1Resetting the Display

NOTICE

Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance

service results in the system showing incorrect

maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious

mechanical problems.

The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after

completing the required maintenance service. If

someone other than a dealer performs maintenance

service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.

You can reset the engine oil life display using the

audio/information screen.

2Customized Features P. 273

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

459

Continued

Maintenance Under the Hood

Maintenance Items Under the Hood

4-cylinder models

Brake Fluid

(Black Cap)

Engine Coolant

Reservoir

Radiator Cap

Washer Fluid

(Blue Cap)

Engine Oil Dipstick

(Orange Handle) Clutch Fluid

(Light Gray Cap)

Engine Oil Fill Cap

Battery

Manual transmission

models

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

460

uuMaintenance Under the HooduMaintenance Items Under the Hood

6-cylinder models

Engine Oil Dipstick

(Orange Handle)

Washer Fluid

(Blue Cap)

Engine Coolant

Reservoir

Radiator Cap

Brake Fluid

(Black Cap)

Engine Oil Fill Cap

Battery

Clutch Fluid

(Light Gray Cap)

Manual transmission

models

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

461

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

Continued

Opening the Hood

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set

the parking brake.

2. Pull the hood release handle under the

lower left corner of the dashboard.

uThe hood will pop up slightly.

3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center

of the hood to release the lock mechanism,

and open the hood.

4. Remove the support rod from the clamp

using the grip. Mount the support rod in

the hood.

When closing, remove the support rod, and

stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the

hood. Remove your hand at a height of

approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the

hood close.

1Opening the Hood

NOTICE

Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are

raised.

The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage

either the hood or the wipers.

When closing the hood, check that the hood is

securely latched.

If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can

open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch

mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

Hood Release Handle

Pull

Lever

Support Rod

Grip

Clamp

4-cylinder models

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

462

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

4. Lift the hood up most of the way.

uThe hydraulic supports will lift it up the

rest of the way and hold it up.

When closing, lower it to approximately 12

inches (30 cm), then press down firmly with

your hands.

6-cylinder models

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

463

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil

Recommended Engine Oil

Oil is a major contributor to your engine's

performance and longevity. If you drive the

vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,

the engine may fail or be damaged.

This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving

and that it meets the American Petroleum

Institute’s latest requirements.

Use a Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another

commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for

the ambient temperature as shown.

■Synthetic oil

You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal

and is the specified viscosity grade.

•Genuine Honda Motor Oil

•Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the

container.

1Recommended Engine Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,

they may adversely affect the engine performance

and durability.

Ambient Temperature

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

464

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

Oil Check

We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check

the oil.

1. Remove the dipstick (orange handle).

2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or

paper towel.

3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its

hole.

1Oil Check

If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly

add oil being careful not to overfill.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

465

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the

level. It should be between the upper and

lower marks. Add oil if necessary.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Upper Mark

Lower Mark

Upper Mark

Lower Mark

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

466

uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.

2. Add oil slowly.

3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten

it securely.

4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the

engine oil dipstick.

1Adding Engine Oil

If any oil spills, wipe it up immediately. Spilled oil may

damage the engine compartment components.

NOTICE

Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.

Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and

engine damage.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Engine Oil Fill Cap

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

467

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

Continued

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the

engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.

Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the

information display.

1. Run the engine until it reaches normal

operating temperature, and then turn the

engine off.

2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil

fill cap.

3. Remove the drain bolt and washer from

the bottom of the engine, and drain the

oil into a suitable container.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

NOTICE

You may damage the environment if you do not

dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are

changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of

the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take

it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away

into a garbage can or onto the ground.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Drain Bolt

Washer

Drain Bolt

Washer

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

468

4. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the

remaining oil.

5. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to

the engine contact surface.

uIf it is stuck, you must detach it.

6. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the

contact surface of the engine block, and

install a new oil filter.

uApply a light coat of new engine oil to

the oil gasket.

7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then

reinstall the drain bolt.

uTightening torque:

30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)

29 lbf∙ft (39 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)

Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine.

uEngine oil change capacity (including

filter):

4.4 US qt (4.2 L) 4.5 US qt (4.3 L)

9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and

start the engine.

10. Run the engine for a few minutes, and

then check that there is no leak from the

drain bolt or oil filter.

11. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,

and then check the oil level on the dipstick.

uIf necessary, add more engine oil.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

You will need a special wrench to replace the oil

filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.

When installing the new oil filter, follow the

instructions supplied with the oil filter.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The

low oil pressure indicator should go off within five

seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check

your work.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Oil Filter

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

469

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

Continued

Engine Coolant

This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any

straight antifreeze or water.

We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the

reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the

radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.

1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve

tank.

2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark,

add the specified coolant until it reaches

the MAX mark.

3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2

■Reserve Tank

1Engine Coolant

NOTICE

If temperatures consistently below −22°F (−30°C) are

expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to

a higher concentration. Consult a dealer for more

information.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may

use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a

temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality

coolant recommended for aluminum engines.

Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result

in corrosion, causing the cooling system to

malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed

and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as

possible.

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your

vehicle's coolant system. They may not be compatible

with the coolant or with the engine components.

Reserve

Tank

MAX

MIN

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

470

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are

cool.

2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise and

relieve any pressure in the coolant system.

Do not push the cap down when turning.

3. Push down and turn the radiator cap

counterclockwise to remove it.

4. The coolant level should be up to the base

of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.

5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it

fully.

6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it

reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back

on the reserve tank.

■Radiator

1Radiator

NOTICE

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill

any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can

damage components in the engine compartment.

WARNING

Removing the radiator cap while the

engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray

out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool

down before removing the radiator cap.

Radiator Cap

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

471

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

Continued

Transmission Fluid

Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

■Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid

Specified fluid: HCF-2

■Manual Transmission Fluid

Specified fluid: Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)

4-cylinder models with automatic transmission (CVT)

1Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid

NOTICE

Do not mix HCF-2 with other transmission fluids.

Using a transmission fluid other than HCF-2 may

adversely affect the operation and durability of your

vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission.

Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that

is not equivalent to HCF-2 is not covered by Honda's

new vehicle warranty.

4-cylinder/6-cylinder models with manual transmission

1Manual Transmission Fluid

If Honda MTF is not available, you may use the API

certificated SAE 0 W-20 or 5 W-20 viscosity motor oil

as a temporary measure.

Replace with MTF as soon as possible. Motor oil does

not contain the proper additives for the transmission

and continued use can cause decreased shifting

performance and lead to transmission damage.

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

472

Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

■Automatic Transmission Fluid

Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)

6-cylinder models with automatic transmission

1Automatic Transmission Fluid

NOTICE

Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 with other

transmission fluids.

Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF

DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and

durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage

the transmission.

Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that

is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered

by Honda's new vehicle warranty.

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

473

uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake/Clutch Fluid

Brake/Clutch Fluid

Use the same fluid for both the brakes and clutch.

The fluid level should be between the MIN

and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.

The fluid level should be between the MIN

and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.

Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

■Checking the Brake Fluid

1Brake/Clutch Fluid

NOTICE

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your

vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive

damage.

If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should

use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed

container as a temporary replacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion

and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the

brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy

Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.

If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,

have a dealer inspect for leaks or worn brake pads as

soon as possible.

Brake Reservoir

MIN

MAX

■Checking the Clutch Fluid

Manual transmission models

1Checking the Clutch Fluid

If the clutch fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,

have a dealer inspect for leaks or an excessively worn

clutch plate as soon as possible.

Clutch Reservoir

MIN

MAX

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

474

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid

Refilling Window Washer Fluid

Check the amount of window washer fluid by looking at the reservoir.

If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.

If the washer fluid is low, the washer level

indicator comes on.

Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

1Refilling Window Washer Fluid

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water

solution in the windshield washer reservoir.

Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A

vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield

washer pump.

Canadian models

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

475

Continued

Replacing Light Bulbs

Headlight Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Unlock the holding clips, then remove the

upper part of the air intake duct and the air

intake tube.

1. Remove the engine coolant reservoir.

High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type)

Low beam headlight: LED type

Low beam headlight: 55 W (H11 for halogen bulb type)

■High Beam Headlight

1Headlight Bulbs

NOTICE

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.

Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause

the bulb to overheat and shatter.

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not

need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry

heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer, have the

aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified

technician.

When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base,

and protect the glass from contact with your skin or

hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with

denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

The exterior lights' inside lenses (headlights, brake

lamps, etc.) may fog temporarily after a car wash or

while driving in the rain. This does not impact the

exterior light function.

However, if you see a large amount of water or ice

accumulated inside the lenses, have your vehicle

inspected by a dealer.

Tube

Holding Clip

Holding Clips

Driver side

6-cylinder models

Passenger side

All models

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs

476

2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.

3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.

4. Insert a new bulb into the headlight

assembly and turn it to the right.

5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the

bulb.

1High Beam Headlight

Press down the central pin until it clicks to unlock it.

Push the central pin back to lock the clip. Then, insert

the clip into the hole and press on the central pin

until it is flat.

Holding clip

Central pin

Push until

the pin is

flat.

Tab

CouplerBulb

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

477

uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs

1. Push the tab to remove the coupler.

2. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.

3. Insert a new bulb into the headlight

assembly and turn it to the right.

4. Insert the coupler into the connector of the

bulb.

■Low Beam Headlights

1Low Beam Headlights

Low beam headlight bulbs are LED type. Have an

authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light

bulbs.

Models with LED low beam headlights

Models with halogen low beam headlights

Tab

Coupler

Bulb

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

478

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs

Fog Light Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Remove the screw using a Phillips-head

screwdriver and carefully pull the fog light

assembly out of the bumper.

2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.

3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.

4. Insert a new bulb into the fog light

assembly and turn it to the right.

5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the

bulb.

Fog Light: 35 W (H8)

1Fog Light Bulbs

NOTICE

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration,

or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to

overheat and shatter.

The fog lights are halogen bulbs.

When replacing a bulb, handle it by its plastic case,

and protect the glass from contact with your skin or

hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with

denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Screw

Tab

Coupler

Bulb

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

479

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs

Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the

opposite side from the light being replaced.

Passenger side: Turn the steering wheel

to the left.

Driver side: Turn the steering wheel to the

right.

2. Remove the holding clips and screw, and

pull the inner fender back.

3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.

4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Light Bulbs

Door mirrors have the side turn lights. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and

replace the light bulbs.

Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light: 28/8 W (Amber)

1Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs

Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the

central pin to remove the clip.

Insert the clip with the central pin raised, and push

until it is flat.

Central pin

Push until the

pin is flat.

Holding Clip

Screw

Bulb

Socket

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

* Not available on all models

480

uuReplacing Light BulbsuParking/Daytime Running Light Bulbs

Parking/Daytime Running Light Bulbs

Parking/daytime running light bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer

inspect and replace the light bulbs.

Parking Light Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Remove the upper part of the air intake

duct and the air intake tube.

2High Beam Headlight P. 475

1. Remove the engine coolant reservoir.

2High Beam Headlight P. 475

2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.

3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it,

then remove the old bulb.

4. Insert a new bulb.

Parking Light: 5 W

Models with LED type parking/daytime running lights

Models with bulb type parking lights

Bulb

Socket

Tab

Coupler

Driver side

Passenger side

Both sides

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

481

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake/Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs

Brake/Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal

Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Remove the cargo hook by squeezing the

tabs on both sides.

2. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip

screwdriver, then pull the lining back.

3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.

4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Brake/Taillight: 21/5 W

Back-Up Light: 16 W

Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)

Rear Side Marker Light: 3CP

1Brake/Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear

Side Marker Light Bulbs

When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver,

then lift and remove the clip.

Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until it is

flat.

Clip

Push until the

pin is flat.

Holding Clip

Tabs

Cargo Hook

Bulb

Socket

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

482

uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulbs

Rear License Plate Light Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Remove the lens by carefully prying on its

left edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver.

2. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

High-Mount Brake Light Bulbs

High-mount brake light bulbs are the LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer

inspect and replace the light bulbs.

Rear License Plate Light: 5 W

Lens

Bulb

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

483

Continued

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades

Checking Wiper Blades

If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the metal wiper

arm may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber

1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the

passenger side.

2. Press and hold the tab, then slide the blade

from the wiper arm.

1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber

NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the

windshield.

Tab

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

484

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber

3. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by

pulling the tabbed end out.

4. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade

that has been removed, and mount to a

new rubber blade.

uCorrectly align the rubber protrusion and

the retainer grooves.

5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder

from the bottom end.

uThe tab on the holder should fit in the

indent of the wiper blade.

6. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm,

then push down the lock tab.

7. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,

then the driver side.

Blade

Top

Retainer

Blade

Tab

Indent

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

485

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Checking Tires

To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in

good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.

■Inflation guidelines

Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.

Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specification’s page for the specified pressure.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and

are more likely to fail from overheating.

Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,

and wear unevenly.

Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the

others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.

At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in

all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to

20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm

) per month.

■Inspection guidelines

Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.

Look for:

•Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,

splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.

•Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.

•Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.

•Excessive tread wear.

2Wear Indicators P. 490

•Cracks or other damage around valve stem.

1Checking Tires

Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This

means the vehicle has been parked for at least three

hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If

necessary, add or release air until the specified

pressure is reached.

If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as

4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm

) higher than if

checked when cold.

Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must

calibrate the TPMS.

2TPMS Calibration P. 435

Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent

vibration while driving. New tires and any that have

been removed and reinstalled should be properly

balanced.

WARNING

Using tires that are excessively worn or

improperly inflated can cause a crash in

which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s

manual regarding tire inflation and

maintenance.

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

486

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label

Tire and Loading Information Label

The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading

information.

Tire Labeling

The tires that came on your vehicle have a

number of markings. Those you should be

aware of are described below.

Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

1Tire and Loading Information Label

The tire and loading information label attached to the

driver’s doorjamb contains:

The number of people your vehicle can carry.

The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not

exceed this weight.

The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare.

The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and

spare.

Label

Example

Example Tire Size

Tire

Identification

Number (TIN)

Maximum

Tire Load

Maximum

Tire Pressure

Tire Size

■Tire Sizes

1Tire Sizes

Following is an example of tire size with an

explanation of what each component means.

215/55R17 94V

215: Tire width in millimeters.

55: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a

percentage of its width).

R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).

17: Rim diameter in inches.

94: Load index (a numerical code associated with the

maximum load the tire can carry).

V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating

the maximum speed rating).

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

487

uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uTire Labeling

The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like

the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at

least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given

inflation pressure.

Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can

hold.

Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum

permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended

by the manufacturer.

Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves

designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

■Tire Identification Number (TIN)

■Glossary of Tire Terminology

1Tire Identification Number (TIN)

DOT B97R FW6X 2209

DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all

requirements of the U.S. Department of

Transportation.

B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark.

FW6X: Tire type code.

22 09: Date of manufacture.

Year

Week

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

488

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are

also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to

Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains

these gradings.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread

houlder and maximum section width.

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire

when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test

course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2)

times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative

performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,

and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

■Uniform Tire Quality Grading

■Treadwear

1Uniform Tire Quality Grading

For example:

Treadwear 200

Traction AA

Temperature A

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal

Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

489

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades

represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under

controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphat and

concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's

resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heate when

te sted under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test

wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to

degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which

all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on

the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

■Traction

■Temperature

1Traction

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is

abased on straight-ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include acceleration, cornering,

hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

1Temperature

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly inflated and

not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,

or excessive loading, either separately or in

combination, can cause heat buildup and possible

tire failure.

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

490

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators

Wear Indicators

The groove where the wear indicator is

located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than

elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so

that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.

Worn out tires have poor traction on wet

roads.

Tire Service Life

The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road

conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and

environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is

recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five

years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10

years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

1Checking Tires

High speed driving

We recommend that you do not drive faster than the

posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you drive

at sustained high speeds (over 99 mph or 160 km/h),

adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below to

avoid excessive heat build up and sudden tire failure.

Tire Size 235/45R18 94V

Pressure 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm

)

6-cylinder models

Example of a Wear

Indicator mark

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

491

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement

Tire and Wheel Replacement

Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and

maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a

different size or construction can cause the ABS and VSA® (vehicle stability assist)

system to work incorrectly.

It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the

front or rear tires in pairs.

Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.

1Tire and Wheel Replacement

WARNING

Installing improper tires on your vehicle can

affect handling and stability. This can cause

a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or

killed.

Always use the size and type of tires

recommended in this owner’s manual.

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

492

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation

Tire Rotation

Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the information display

helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.

■Tires without rotation marks

Rotate the tires as shown here.

■Tires with rotation marks

Rotate the tires as shown here.

1Tire Rotation

Tires with directional tread patterns should only be

rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).

Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation

indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the

TPMS.

2TPMS Calibration P. 435

FRONT

Direction Mark

Front

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

493

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires

Winter Tires

If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire

chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.

Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent

skidding.

Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.

When mounting, refer to the following points.

For winter tires:

•Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.

•Mount the tires to all four wheels.

For tire chains:

•Install them on the front tires only.

•Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the

chains listed below:

•Follow the chain manufacturer's instruction when installing. Mount them as

tightly as you can.

•Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.

•Drive slowly.

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1036

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1040

1Winter Tires

NOTICE

Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly

installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines,

suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are

hitting any part of the vehicle.

When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain

manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle

operational limits.

If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be

aware that these tires are not designed for winter

driving conditions. For more information, contact a

dealer.

WARNING

Using the wrong chains, or not properly

installing chains, can damage the brake

lines and cause a crash in which you can be

seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner's

manual regarding the selection and use of

tire chains.

Models with 215/55R17 tires

Models with 235/45R18 tires

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

494

Battery

Checking the Battery

Check the battery condition monthly. Look at

the test indicator window and check the

terminals for corrosion.

The battery condition is being monitored by

the sensor on the negative terminal. If there is

a problem with the sensor, the warning

message on the information display will let

you know. Have your vehicle checked by

If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead:

•The audio system is disabled.

2Reactivating the audio system P. 151

•The clock resets.

2Setting the Clock P. 84

•The navigation system

is disabled.

2Refer to the navigation system manual

Charging the Battery

Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system.

Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.

1Battery

WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related

accessories contain lead and lead compounds.

Wash your hands after handling.

The test indicator's color information is on the

battery.

When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals

by applying a baking powder and water solution.

Clean terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry

the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help

prevent future corrosion.

WARNING

The battery gives off explosive hydrogen

gas during normal operation.

A spark or flame can cause the battery to

explode with enough force to kill or

seriously hurt you.

When conducting any battery

maintenance, wear protective clothing

and a face shield, or have a skilled

technician do it.

Test Indicator Window

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

a dealer.

495

Continued

Remote Transmitter Care

Replacing the Button Battery

If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.

1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillips-

head screwdriver.

2. Open the remote transmitter.

uWrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a

cloth to prevent scratching the

transmitter.

3. Remove the button battery with the small

flat-tip screwdriver.

4. Make sure to replace the battery with the

correct polarity.

■Master Keys with Remote Transmitter

1Replacing the Button Battery

NOTICE

An improperly disposed of battery can damage the

environment. Always confirm local regulations for

battery disposal.

Replacement batteries are commercially available or

at a dealer.

Screw

Battery type: CR1620

Battery

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

496

uuRemote Transmitter CareuReplacing the Button Battery

1. Remove the built-in key.

2. Remove the upper half of the cover by

carefully prying on the edge with a coin.

uRemove carefully to avoid losing the

buttons.

uWrap a coin with a cloth to prevent

scratching the smart entry remote.

3. Make sure to replace the battery with the

correct polarity.

■Smart Entry Remote

Battery type: CR2032

Battery

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

497

Climate Control System Maintenance

Dust and Pollen Filter

The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects

pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance Minder

messages will let

you know when to replace the filter.

We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your

vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.

1Dust and Pollen Filter

If the airflow from the climate control system

deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up

easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please

contact a dealer for replacement.

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

498

Cleaning

Interior Care

Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.

Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.

Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.

Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.

■Cleaning Seat Belts

1Interior Care

Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle.

Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if

liquids are splashed on them.

Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices

such as audio devices and switches.

Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire

inside the vehicle.

If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on

electrical devices, consult a dealer.

Depending on their composition, chemicals and

liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,

and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.

Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as

benzene or gasoline.

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them

off using a dry cloth.

Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts

or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

Opening

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

499

uuCleaninguInterior Care

The floor mats for the driver, and the rear

passenger on the passenger’s side hook over

the floor anchors, which keep the mats from

sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning,

turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position.

When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn

the knobs to the lock position.

Do not put additional floor mats on top of

the anchored mat.

Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats

and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and

10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or

dirt on leather surfaces immediately.

■Floor Mats

1Floor Mats

If you use any floor mats that were not originally

provided with your vehicle, make sure they are

designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and

are securely anchored by the floor anchors.

Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are

not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere

with the front seat functions.

Lock

Unlock

Lock

Unlock

Front (driver side)

Rear (passenger side)

■Maintaining Genuine Leather

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

500

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Exterior Care

Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.

Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a

painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.

Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following

conditions:

•If driving on roads with road salt.

•If driving in coastal areas.

•If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.

Fold in the door mirrors. Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the

automated car wash.

•Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.

•Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to

enter the vehicle interior. Do not spray water into the engine compartment.

■Washing the Vehicle

■Using an Automated Car Wash

■Using High Pressure Cleaners

1Washing the Vehicle

Do not spray water into the air intake vents or engine

compartment. It can cause a malfunction.

Air Intake Vents

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

501

uuCleaninguExterior Care

A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the

elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the

elements, so reapply as necessary.

If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they

may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and

clean water.

Wipe using a glass cleaner.

Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road

contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly.

Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or

a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that

helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.

■Applying Wax

■Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts

■Cleaning the Window

■Maintaining Aluminum Wheels

1Applying Wax

NOTICE

Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage

the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe up

spills immediately.

1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts

Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when

you want to repair the painted surface of the parts

made of resin.

1Cleaning the Window

Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.

Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a

soft cloth so as not to damage them.

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

502

2013 Accord Coupe

QRG

Index

Home

503

Handling the Unexpected

This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools

Types of Tools..................................504

If a Tire Goes Flat

Changing a Flat Tire......................... 505

Engine Does Not Start

Checking the Engine........................ 511

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is

Weak..........................................512

Emergency Engine Stop ................... 513

Jump Starting.................................... 514

Shift Lever Does Not Move.............. 517

Overheating

How to Handle Overheating............. 518

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator

520

If the Charging System Indicator

520

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

521

If the Brake System Indicator (Red)

Comes On.................................. 522

If the EPS System Indicator Comes On.. 522

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

Comes On or Blinks ....................... 523

Fuses

Fuse Locations ................................. 524

Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 526

Emergency Towing........................... 527

2013 Accord Coupe

QRG

Index

Home

Comes On ................................

Comes On .....................................

Comes On or Blinks .......................

504

Handling the Unexpected

Tools

Types of Tools

1Types of Tools

The tools were stored in the trunk.

Wheel Nut Wrench/

Jack Handle

Jack

Jack Handle Bar

Tool Case

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

505

Continued

If a Tire Goes Flat

Changing a Flat Tire

If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually

to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact

spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or

replaced.

1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface and apply the parking

brake.

2. Move the shift lever to (P.

2. Move the shift lever to (R.

3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0

1Changing a Flat Tire

Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact

spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.

Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

)

When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the

vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with

a full-size tire as soon as possible.

The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are

specifically for this model.

Do not use them with another vehicle.

Do not use another type of compact spare tire or

wheel with your vehicle.

Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.

If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of

the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact

spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it

with the full size tire that was removed from the rear.

Mount the tire chains on the front tire.

Automatic transmission/CVT models

Manual transmission models

All models

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

506

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

1. Open the trunk floor lid.

2. Take the tool case out of the trunk. Take

the jack and wheel nut wrench out of the

tool case.

3. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the

spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.

4. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear

of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.

■Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire

Tool Case

Spare Tire

Wheel

Blocks

The tire to be replaced.

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

507

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Continued

5. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up)

under the vehicle body, near the tire that

needs to be replaced.

6. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn

using the wheel nut wrench.

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

508

1. Place the jack under the jacking point

closest to the tire to be changed.

2. Turn the end bracket (as shown in the

image) clockwise until the top of the jack

contacts the jacking point.

uMake sure that the jacking point tab is

resting in the jack notch.

3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar

and the jack handle, until the tire is off the

ground.

■How to Set Up the Jack

1How to Set Up the Jack

Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the

vehicle.

Use the jack provided in your vehicle.

Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or

their shape may not match.

The following instructions must be followed to use

the jack safely.

•Do not use while the engine is running.

•Use only where the ground is firm and level.

•Use only at the jacking points.

•Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.

•Do not put anything on top of or underneath the

jack.

WARNING

The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,

seriously injuring anyone underneath.

Follow the directions for changing a tire

exactly, and never get under the vehicle

when it is supported only by the jack.

Jack

Handle

Bar Wheel Nut

Wrench as Jack Handle

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

509

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.

2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel

with a clean cloth.

3. Mount the compact spare tire.

4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the

lips around the mounting holes, and stop

rotating.

5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.

Tighten the wheel nuts in the order

indicated in the image. Go around,

tightening the nuts, two to three times in

this order.

Wheel nut torque:

80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)

■Replacing the Flat Tire

1Replacing the Flat Tire

Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra

torque using your foot or a pipe.

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

510

1. Remove the center cap.

2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare

tire well.

3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing

bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the

bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.

4. Securely put the jack and wheel nut

wrench back in the tool case. Store the case

in the trunk.

If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator

comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the

indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on, but this is normal.

Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire.

2TPMS Calibration P. 435

■Storing the Flat Tire

1Storing the Flat Tire

WARNING

Loose items can fly around the interior in a

crash and can seriously injure the

occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely

before driving.

Spacer

Cone

Wing

Bolt

For

compact

spare tire

For

full-size

tire

■TPMS and the Spare Tire

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

511

Engine Does Not Start

Checking the Engine

If the engine does not start, check the starter.

Starter condition Checklist

Starter doesn’t turn or turns

over slowly.

The battery may be dead. Check

each of the items on the right and

respond accordingly.

Check brightness of the interior light.

Turn on interior lights and check brightness.

●

If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all

2Battery P. 494

●

If the interior lights come on normally

2 Fuses P. 524

The starter turns over normally

but the engine doesn’t start.

There may be a problem with the

fuse. Check each of the items on

the right and respond accordingly.

Review the engine start procedure.

Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again.

2 Starting the Engine P. 401

Check the immobilizer system indicator.

When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.

2Immobilizer System P. 101

Check the fuel level.

There should be enough fuel in the tank.

2 Fuel Gauge P. 79

Check the fuse.

Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

2Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 526

If the problem continues:

2Emergency Towing P. 527

1Checking the Engine

If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an

assisting vehicle to jump start it.

2Jump Starting P. 514

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

512

uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

If the beeper sounds, the indicator on the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes,

and the engine won’t start, start the engine as follows.

1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/

STOP button with the H logo on the smart

entry remote while the indicator on the

ENGINE START/STOP button is flashing.

The buttons on the smart entry remote

should be facing you.

uThe indicator flashes for about 30

seconds.

2. Depress the brake pedal (automatic

transmission) or clutch pedal (manual

transmission) and press the ENGINE

START/STOP button within 10 seconds

after the beeper sounds and the indicator

stays on.

uIf you don’t depress the pedal, the mode

will change to ACCESSORY.

Models with smart entry system

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

513

uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop

Emergency Engine Stop

If you cannot stop the engine by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button, do

either of the following operations:

•Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds.

•Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button two times.

The steering wheel will not lock.

The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF with the shift lever in (P, and to

ACCESSORY with the shift lever in any position other than (P.

The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.

Models with smart entry system

1Emergency Engine Stop

Do not press the button while driving unless it is

absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched

off.

Automatic transmission/CVT models

Manual transmission models

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

514

Jump Starting

Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,

then open the hood.

1. Connect the first jumper cable to your

vehicle's battery + terminal.

2. Connect the other end of the first jumper

cable to the booster battery + terminal.

uUse a 12-volt booster battery only.

3. Connect the second jumper cable to the

booster battery - terminal.

■Jump Starting Procedure

1Jump Starting

Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they

do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be

careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the

cable ends to touch each other while attaching or

detaching the jumper cables.

WARNING

A battery can explode if you do not follow

the correct procedure, seriously injuring

anyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking

materials away from the battery.

Booster Battery

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Booster Battery

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Continued

515

uuJump Startingu

4. Connect the other end of the second

jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt

as shown.

Do not connect this jumper cable to any

other part.

5. If your vehicle is connected to another

vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine

and increase its rpm slightly.

6. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it

turns over slowly, check that the jumper

cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

1Jump Starting

Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and

may prevent the engine from starting.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

516

uuJump Startingu

Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following

order.

1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground.

2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -

terminal.

3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's battery + terminal.

4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +

terminal.

Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.

■What to Do After the Engine Starts

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

517

Shift Lever Does Not Move

Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P

position.

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

2. Remove the built-in key from the smart

entry remote.

3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flat-

tip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock

release slot as shown in the image, and

remove the cover.

4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.

5. While pushing the key down, press the shift

lever release button and place the shift lever

into (N.

uThe lock is now released. Have the shift

lever checked by a dealer as soon as

possible.

■Releasing the Lock

Automatic transmission/CVT models

Slot

Cover

Models without smart entry system

Models with smart entry system

All models

Release Button

Shift Lock

Release Slot

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

518

Overheating

How to Handle Overheating

Overheating symptoms are as follows:

•The temperature gauge needle is at the mark or the engine suddenly loses

power.

•Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.

■First thing to do

1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.

2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.

uNo steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.

uSteam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.

Then open the hood.

1How to Handle Overheating

NOTICE

Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge

needle at the mark may damage the engine.

WARNING

Steam and spray from an overheated

engine can seriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steam is coming

out.

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

519

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating

■Next thing to do

1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and

stop the engine once the temperature

gauge needle comes down.

uIf the cooling fan is not operating,

immediately stop the engine.

2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect

the coolant level and check the cooling

system components for leaks.

uIf the coolant level in the reserve tank is

low, add coolant until it reaches the

MAX mark.

uIf there is no coolant in the reserve tank,

check that the radiator is cool. Cover the

radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open

the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to

the base of the filler neck, and put the

cap back on.

■Last thing to do

Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge.

If the temperature gauge needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone

down, contact a dealer for repairs.

1How to Handle Overheating

If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.

Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.

Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze

as soon as possible.

WARNING

Removing the radiator cap while the

engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray

out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool

down before removing the radiator cap.

MAX

Reserve Tank

MIN

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

520

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On

■Reasons for the indicator to come on

Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.

■What to do as soon as the indicator comes on

1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.

2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.

■What to do after parking the vehicle

1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about one minute.

2. Open the hood and check the oil level.

uAdd oil as necessary.

3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator.

uThe light goes out: Start driving again.

uThe light does not go out within 10 seconds: Stop the engine and

contact a dealer for repairs immediately.

If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

■Reasons for the indicator to come on

Comes on when the battery is not being charged.

■What to do when the indicator comes on

Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical

systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.

1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On

NOTICE

Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause

serious mechanical damage almost immediately.

1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the

engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge

the battery.

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

521

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

If the Malfunction Indicator

Lamp Comes On or Blinks

■Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink

•Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control

system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose.

•Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.

■What to do when the indicator lamp comes on

Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a

dealer.

■What to do when the indicator lamp blinks

Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least

ten minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

■The message appears on when:

An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being

loose or not being installed.

■What to do when the message appears:

1. Stop the engine.

2. Check that the fuel fill cap is fully installed.

uIf not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.

3. Drive for several days of normal driving.

uThe message should go off.

■When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

Malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of

gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described

above.

■Check Fuel Cap Message

1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

NOTICE

If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,

the emissions control system and the engine could be

damaged.

If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when

restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at

31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle

inspected.

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

522

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

■Reasons for the indicator to come on

•The brake fluid is low.

•There is a malfunction in the brake system.

■What to do when the indicator comes on while driving

Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.

•If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.

•If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the

transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.

If the EPS System Indicator Comes On

■Reasons for the indicator to come on

•Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system.

•If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine

speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and

sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.

■What to do when the indicator comes on

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.

If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle

inspected by a dealer.

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

Have your vehicle repaired immediately.

It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there

is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop

immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift

the gears.

If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come

on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution

system is not working. This can result in vehicle

instability under sudden braking.

Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.

U.S.

Canada

1If the EPS System Indicator Comes On

NOTICE

If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an

extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on

the full left or right position for a while, the system

heats up. The system goes into a protective mode,

and limits its performance. The steering wheel

becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the

system cools down, EPS is restored. Repeated

operation under these conditions can eventually

damage the system.

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

523

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS

Indicator Comes On or Blinks

■Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink

A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated.

If there is a problem with the TPMS or the compact spare tire is installed,

the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on.

■What to do when the indicator comes on

Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking.

Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the

pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on

the driver side doorjamb.

uCalibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.

■What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on

Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact

spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire.

The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).

uCalibrate the TPMS after a full-size tire is reinstalled.

1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

NOTICE

Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause

it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always

inflate your tires to the prescribed level.

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

* Not available on all models

524

Fuses

Fuse Locations

If any electrical devices are not working,

turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0

and

check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.

Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push

the tabs to open the box.

Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box

cover. Locate the fuse in question by the

fuse number and box cover number.

■Circuit protected and fuse rating

■Engine Compartment Fuse Box

Circuit Protected Amps

1Battery 125 A

EPS 70 A

Fuse Box Main 1 (60 A)

Fuse Box Option 1 (40 A)

−−

− −

ABS/VSA FSR 40 A

ABS/VSA Motor 30 A

− −

4 Front Fog Light

(15 A)

5Horn 10 A

6 Stop Light 10 A

7FI Sub 15 A

8 DRL (7.5 A)

9IG Coil 15 A

10 Injector

20 A

11 Hazard 15 A

Fuse Box Main 2 60 A

Fuse Box Option 2 (40 A)

IG Main 1 50 A

30 A

IG Main 2

30 A

Sub Fan Motor 20 A

30 A

Headlight Low Beam Main 30 A

Fuse Box 30 A

Wiper Motor 30 A

Main Fan Motor 30 A

Starter Motor

30 A

13 Rear Defogger 40 A

14 Heater Motor 40 A

15 FI Main 15 A

Circuit Protected Amps

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an

ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

*2:4-cylinder models

*3:6-cylinder models

*4:Models with smart entry system

*5:Models with LED low beam headlights

16 Heated Door Mirror

(10 A)

17 MG Clutch 7.5 A

18 DBW 15 A

19 Small Light 20 A

20 Interior Light 7.5 A

21 Back Up 10 A

22 Audio 10 A

23 Fan Timer 7.5 A

24 Right Headlight Low Beam 10 A

15 A

25 Left Headlight Low Beam 10 A

15 A

26 − −

Circuit Protected Amps

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

525

uuFusesuFuse Locations

Located under the dashboard.

Fuse locations are shown on the label on

the side panel.

Locate the fuse in question by the fuse

number and label number.

■Circuit protected and fuse rating

■Interior Fuse Box

Fuse Label

Circuit Protected Amps

1A/C 7.5 A

2DRL 7.5 A

3 − −

4 − −

5Meter 7.5 A

6SRS 7.5 A

7Option

(7.5 A)

8MISS SOL 10 A

9Fuel Pump 20 A

10 ABS/VSA 7.5 A

11 − −

12 Front Wiper 7.5 A

13 ACG 15 A

14 Rear Accessory Power Socket

(Console Compartment) (20 A)

15 Driver’s Power Seat

Reclining

(20 A)

16 Moonroof

(20 A)

17 Front Seat Heaters

(20 A)

18 − −

19 Passenger Side Door

Unlock 10 A

20 Driver Side Rear Door

Unlock

10 A

21 Driver’s Door Lock 10 A

22 Passenger Side Door Lock 10 A

23 Driver’s Door Unlock 10 A

24 SRS 10 A

25 Illumination 10 A

26 Key Lock 7.5 A

27 Parking Lights 10 A

28 Lumbar Support

(10 A)

29 Right Headlight High Beam 10 A

30 Washer 15 A

31 SMART

(10 A)

32 Driver’s Power Window 20 A

Circuit Protected Amps

33 Front Passenger’s Power

Window 20 A

34 Rear Driver Side Power

Window

20 A

35 Rear Passenger Side Power

Window

20 A

36 Driver’s Power Seat Sliding

(20 A)

37 ACCESSORY 7.5 A

38 − −

39 Left Headlight High Beam 10 A

40 Accessory Power Socket

(Console Panel) 20 A

41 Driver Side Rear Door Lock

10 A

42 Door Lock 20 A

aAudio

(7.5 A)

bACM

(20 A)

cRear Seat Heaters

(15 A)

dPremium Amp

(20 A)

e − −

f − −

gPassenger’s Power Seat

Reclining

(20 A)

hPassenger’s Power Seat

Sliding

(20 A)

Circuit Protected Amps

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

*Not available on all models

526

uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses

Inspecting and Changing Fuses

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0

. Turn

headlights and all accessories off.

2. Remove the fuse box cover.

3. Check the large fuse in the engine

compartment.

uIf the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head

screwdriver to remove the screw and

replace it with a new one.

4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine

compartment and the vehicle interior.

uIf there is a burned out fuse, remove it

with the fuse puller and replace it with a

new one.

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses

NOTICE

Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating

greatly increases the chances of damaging the

electrical system.

Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified

amperage.

Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on

P.524 to 525.

There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine

compartment fuse box cover.

Combined

Fuse

Blown Fuse

Fuse Puller

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

527

Emergency Towing

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

■Flat bed equipment

The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.

This is the best way to transport your vehicle.

■Wheel lift equipment

The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off

the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to

tow your vehicle.

1Emergency Towing

NOTICE

Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will

cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed

to support the vehicle's weight.

NOTICE

Improper towing such as towing behind a

motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the

transmission.

Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.

It is very dangerous, since ropes or chains may shift

from side to side or break.

2013 Accord Coupe

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

528

2013 Accord Coupe

QRG

Index

Home

529

Information

This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other

information required by regulation.

Specifications.................................... 530

Identification Numbers

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...... 534

Engine Number and Transmission

Number...................................... 534

Devices that Emit Radio Waves....... 535

Reporting Safety Defects................. 536

Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 537

Warranty Coverages ........................ 539

Authorized Manuals......................... 541

Customer Service Information......... 542

2013 Accord Coupe

QRG

Index

Home

530

Information

Specifications

■Vehicle Specifications

*1: LX-S models

*2: Except LX-S models

*3: LX models

*4: Except LX models

Model Honda Accord Coupe

No. of Passengers:

Front 2

Rear 3

Total 5

Weights:

Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating

U.S.: 4,189 lbs (1,900 kg)

4,255 lbs (1,930 kg)

Canada: 1,900 kg

1,930 kg

Gross Axle Weight

Rating (Front) U.S.: 2,271 lbs (1,030 kg)

2,315 lbs (1,050 kg)

Canada: 1,040 kg

1,055 kg

Gross Axle Weight

Rating (Rear) U.S.: 1,962 lbs (890 kg)

2,006 lbs (910 kg)

Canada: 890 kg

910 kg

Air Conditioning:

Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)

Charge Quantity 15.0 – 16.8 oz (425 – 475 g)

Lubricant Type ND-OIL 8

4-cylinder models

■Engine Specifications

■Fuel

■Battery

*5:Canadian models

■Washer Fluid

Displacement 144 cu-in (2,356 cm

)

Spark Plugs NGK DILKAR7G11GS

DENSO DXE22HQR-D11S

Fuel:

Type

Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number

of 87 or higher

Fuel Tank Capacity 17.2 US gal (65 ℓ)

Capacity/Type 38AH(5)/47AH(20)

52AH(5)/65AH(20)

Tank Capacity U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)

Canada: 5.12 US qt (4.85 ℓ)

■Light Bulbs

Headlights (Low Beam) 55W (H11)

Headlights (High Beam) 60W (HB3)

Fog Lights

35W (H8)

Parking Lights 5W

Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights 28/8W (Amber)

Side Turn Signal Lights

(on Door Mirrors)

LED

Brake/Taillights 21/5W

Rear Side Marker Lights 3CP

Back-Up Lights 16W

Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber)

High-Mount Brake Light LED

Rear License Plate Lights 5W

Trunk Light 5W

Interior Lights

Map Lights 8W

Ceiling Light 8W

Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

531

uuSpecificationsu

Continued

■Brake/Clutch Fluid

■Automatic Transmission (CVT) Fluid

■Manual Transmission Fluid

Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Specified HCF-2

Capacity Change 3.7 US qt (3.5 ℓ)

Specified Honda Manual Transmission Fluid

Capacity Change 2.0 US qt (1.9 ℓ)

■Engine Oil

■Engine Coolant

Recommended ·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20

·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil

Capacity

Change 4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)

Change

including

filter

4.4 US qt (4.2 ℓ)

Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2

Ratio 50/50 with distilled water

Capacity

1.65 US gal (6.25 ℓ)

(change including the remaining

0.17 US gal (0.64 ℓ) in the reserve tank)

■Tire

Regular

Size 215/55R17 94V

Pressure

psi (kPa [kgf/cm

])

Front 33 (225 [2.3])

Rear 33 (225 [2.3])

Compact

Spare

Size T125/80D16 97M

Pressure

psi (kPa [kgf/cm

]) 60 (420 [4.2])

Wheel Size Regular 17 x 7 1/2J

Compact Spare 16 x 4T

2013 Accord Coupe

Information

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

532

uuSpecificationsu

■Vehicle Specifications

*1: Manual transmission models

*2: Automatic transmission models

Model Honda Accord Coupe

No. of Passengers:

Front 2

Rear 3

Total 5

Weights:

Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating

U.S.: 4,387 lbs (1,990 kg)

4,475 lbs (2,030 kg)

Canada: 1,990 kg

2,030 kg

Gross Axle Weight

Rating (Front) U.S.: 2,403 lbs (1,090 kg)

2,513 lbs (1,140 kg)

Canada: 1,090 kg

1,145 kg

Gross Axle Weight

Rating (Rear) U.S.: 2,006 lbs (910 kg)

Canada: 910 kg

Air Conditioning:

Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)

Charge Quantity 15.0 – 16.8 oz (425 – 475 g)

Lubricant Type ND-OIL 8

6-cylinder models

■Engine Specifications

■Fuel

■Battery

■Washer Fluid

Displacement 212 cu-in (3,471 cm

)

Spark Plugs NGK ILZKR7B11

DENSO SXU22HCR11

Fuel:

Type

Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number

of 87 or higher

Fuel Tank Capacity 17.2 US gal (65 ℓ)

Capacity/Type 60AH(5)/72AH(20)

Tank Capacity U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)

Canada: 5.12 US qt (4.85 ℓ)

■Light Bulbs

Headlights (Low Beam) 55W (H11)

LED

Headlights (High Beam) 60W (HB3)

Fog Lights 35W (H8)

Parking/Daytime Running Lights LED

Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights 28/8W (Amber)

Side Turn Signal Lights

(on Door Mirrors) LED

Brake/Taillights 21/5W

Rear Side Marker Lights 3CP

Back-Up Lights 16W

Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber)

High-Mount Brake Light LED

Rear License Plate Lights 5W

Trunk Light 5W

Interior Lights

Map Lights 8W

Ceiling Light 8W

Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W

Courtesy Lights 2CP

* Not available on all models

2013 Accord Coupe

Information

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

533

uuSpecificationsu

■Brake/Clutch Fluid

■Automatic Transmission Fluid

■Manual Transmission Fluid

Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Specified Honda ATF DW-1

(automatic transmission fluid)

Capacity Change 3.3 US qt (3.1 ℓ)

Specified Honda Manual Transmission Fluid

Capacity Change 2.2 US qt (2.1 ℓ)

■Engine Oil

■Engine Coolant

*1: Manual transmission models

*2: Automatic transmission models

Recommended ·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20

·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil

Capacity

Change 4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)

Change

including

filter

4.5 US qt (4.3 ℓ)

Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2

Ratio 50/50 with distilled water

Capacity

1.7 US gal (6.3 ℓ)

1.7 US gal (6.5 ℓ)

(change including the remaining

0.17 US gal (0.64 ℓ) in the reserve tank)

■Tire

Regular

Size 235/45R18 94V

Pressure

psi (kPa [kgf/cm

])

33 (225 [2.3])Front

Rear 32 (220 [2.2])

Compact

Spare

Size T125/80D16 97M

Pressure

psi (kPa [kgf/cm

]) 60 (420 [4.2])

Wheel Size Regular 18 x 8J

Compact Spare 16 x 4T

2013 Accord Coupe

Information

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

534

Identification Numbers

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your

vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. See the

image below for the VIN locations.

Engine Number and Transmission Number

See the image below for the locations of your vehicle's engine number and

transmission number.

1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is

located under the cover.

Cover

Vehicle Identification Number

Engine Number

Certification Label/

Vehicle Identification

Number

Manual Transmission

Number

Automatic Transmission

(CVT) Number

6-cylinder models

4-cylinder models

Engine Number

Automatic Transmission

Number

Manual Transmission

Number

2013 Accord Coupe

Information

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

535

Devices that Emit Radio Waves

The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in

operation.

Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required

standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada

Standard, described below:

As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/310. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,

and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

Audio System

Bluetooth® Audio

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® Universal Transceiver

Immobilizer System

Keyless Access System

Remote Transmitter

2013 Accord Coupe

Information

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

536

Reporting Safety Defects

In the U.S.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform

the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it

may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,

or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);

go to http://www.safercar.gov;

or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,

1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,

Washington, DC 20590.

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform

Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems

between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.

To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on

reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

2013 Accord Coupe

Information

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

537

Continued

Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

Your vehicle uses “readiness codes,” as part of its onboard self diagnostic system.

Some states refer to these codes during testing to see if your vehicle's emissions

components are working properly.

The codes may not be read if you go through the testing just after the battery has

gone dead or been disconnected.

To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w

, without starting the

engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then

goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are

not set.

If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,

prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:

1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.

2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.

3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).

4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20

seconds.

5. Keep the vehicle in (P (automatic transmission/CVT) or (N (manual

transmission). Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about

3 minutes.

6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.

1Testing of Readiness Codes

The readiness codes are erased when the battery is

disconnected, and set again only after several days of

driving under a variety of conditions.

If a testing facility determines that the readiness

codes are not set, you may be requested to return at

a later date to complete the test.

If the testing facility determines the readiness codes

are still not set, see a dealer.

2013 Accord Coupe

Information

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

538

uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes

7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed

of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in

(D (automatic/CVT) or 5th (manual). Do not use cruise control. When traffic

allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed

may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds

because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two

more times (for a total of 90 seconds).

8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions

allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal

or the brake pedal.

9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.

2013 Accord Coupe

Information

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

539

Continued

Warranty Coverages

■U.S. Owners

Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the

emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and

workmanship.

Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance

Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.

Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for

exact information.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered

by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered for

rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.

Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this

warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other

factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts

against defects in materials and workmanship.

2013 Accord Coupe

Information

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

540

uuWarranty Coveragesu

Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a

replacement battery purchased from a dealer.

Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as

long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the 2013 Honda

warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on

warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.

Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

■Canadian Owners

Please refer to the 2013 warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

2013 Accord Coupe

Information

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

541

Authorized Manuals

■Service Express

For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to

Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.

■For U.S. Owners:

The publications listed below can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can

order a manual by phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at

www.helminc.com.

Make an inquiry to Helm Inc. at (800) 782-4356 if you are interested in ordering

other models' or other years' manuals.

Publication

Form Number Form Description

31T3L600 2013 Honda Accord Coupe Owner’s Manual

31T2A800 2013 Honda Accord Navigation System Manual

31T2AM00 2013 Honda Accord Service History

31T3LA00 2013 Honda Accord Coupe Technology Reference Guide (LX-S)

31T3LB00 2013 Honda Accord Coupe Technology Reference Guide (EX/EX-L)

31T3LC00 2013 Honda Accord Coupe Technology Reference Guide

(EX-L with Navigation)

HON-R Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

1Authorized Manuals

For Canadian Owners:

Si vous avez besoin d'un Manuel du Conducteur en

français, veuillez demander à votre concessionnaire

de commander le numéro de pièce 33T3LC00

2013 Accord Coupe

Information

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

542

Customer Service Information

Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals.

They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that

your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the

dealership's service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the

decision made by the dealership's management, contact Honda Customer Services.

U.S. Owners:

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Honda Automobile Customer Services

Mail Stop 500-2N-7A

1919 Torrance Blvd.

Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Canadian Owners:

Honda Canada Inc.

Customer Relations

180 Honda Boulevard

Markham, ON

L6C 0H9

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9

Fax: 1-877-939-0909

E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com

In Puerto Rico and

the U.S. Virgin Islands:

Bella International

P.O. Box 190816

San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

1Customer Service Information

When you call or write, please give us the following

information:

•Vehicle Identification Number

2Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

P. 534

•Date of purchase

•Odometer reading of your vehicle

•Your name, address, and telephone number

•A detailed description of the problem

•Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you

2013 Accord Coupe

Information

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

543

uuCustomer Service Informationu

Continued

Music recognition technology and related

data are provided by Gracenote®.

Gracenote is the industry standard in music

recognition technology and related content

delivery.

For more information, visit

www.gracenote.com.

When music is recorded to the HDD from a

CD, information such as the recording artist

and track name are retrieved from the

Gracenote Database and displayed (when

available).

Gracenote may not contain information for

all albums.

Gracenote is an internet-based music

recognition service that allows artist, album,

and track information from CDs to display

on the HDD.

Gracenote users are allowed 4 free updates

a year. More information about Gracenote,

its features, and downloads are available at

■Gracenote Music Recognition

Service (CDDB)

www.honda.com (in U.S.) or

www.honda.ca (in Canada).

CD and music-related data from Gracenote,

Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright

One or more patents owned by Gracenote

apply to this product and service. See the

Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list

of applicable Gracenote patents.

Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS,

the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the

“Powered by Gracenote” logo are either

registered trademarks or trademarks of

Gracenote in the United States and/or other

countries.

This application or device contains software

from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville,

California (“Gracenote”). The software

from Gracenote (the “Gracenote

Software”) enables this application to

perform disc and/or file identification and

obtain music- related information, including

name, artist, track, and title information

(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or

■Gracenote® END USER LICENSE

AGREEMENT

embedded databases (collectively,

“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other

functions. You may use Gracenote Data

only by means of the intended End-User

functions or this application or device.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data,

the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote

Servers for your own personal non-

commercial use only.

You agree not to assign, copy, transfer, or

transmit the Gracenote Software or any

Gracenote Data to any third party.

YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT

GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE

SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,

EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to

use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote

Software, and Gracenote Servers will

terminate if you violate these restrictions. If

your license terminates, you agree to cease

any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the

Gracenote Software, and Gracenote

Servers.

2013 Accord Coupe

Information

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

544

uuCustomer Service Informationu

Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote

Data, the Gracenote Software, and the

Gracenote Servers, including all ownership

rights. Under no circumstances will

Gracenote become liable for any payment

to you for any information that you provide.

You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce

its rights under this Agreement against you

directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses a unique

identifier to track queries for statistical

purposes. The purpose of a randomly

assigned numeric identifier is to allow the

Gracenote service to count queries without

knowing anything about who you are. For

more information, see the web page for the

Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote

service.

The Gracenote Software and each item of

Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”

Gracenote makes no representations or

warranties, express or implied, regarding

the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in

the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves

the right to delete data from the Gracenote

Servers or to change data categories for any

cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No

warranty is made that the Gracenote

Software or Gracenote Servers are error-

free or that functioning of Gracenote

Software or Gracenote Servers will be

uninterrupted.

Gracenote is not obligated to provide you

with new enhanced or additional data types

or categories that Gracenote may provide in

the future and is free to discontinue its

services at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND

NONINFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES

NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE

OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE

GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY

GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL

GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY

CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL

DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR

LOST REVENUES.

Requirements to access Pandora®

•Latest version of the Pandora app

installed on your Android, Blackberry,

or iPhone.

•Registered Pandora account (you can

create a free account at

www.pandora.com

<http://www.pandora.com/>

or on your smartphone)

•Connection to the internet via WiFi or

cellular data network.

■Disclaimer of Pandora®

2013 Accord Coupe

Information

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

545

uuCustomer Service Informationu

Limitations

•Access to Pandora requires an active

internet connection

•Ability to access Pandora through this

system is subject to change without

notice

•Certain functionality of Pandora service is

not available when accessing the service

through this system including, but not

limited to, creating new stations, deleting

stations, emailing current stations,

buying songs, viewing additional text

information, logging in to Pandora, and

adjusting Cell Network Audio Quality.

Pandora internet radio is a music service

not affiliated with HONDA. More

information is available at

http://www.pandora.com

<http:// www.pandora.com/>.

Pandora, the

Pandora logo, and the

•Mobile access requires a smartphone

with an active data plan. Standard data

rates may apply.

•Pandora is only available in the United

States.

2013 Accord Coupe

Information

TOC

QRG

Index

Home

Pandora trade address are trademarks or

registered trademarks of Pandora Media,

Inc., used with permission.

546

Index

Numbers

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode .................... 411

Operation................................................ 412

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................... 441

Accessories and Modifications................. 449

Accessory Power Sockets.......................... 138

Additives

Coolant ................................................... 469

Engine Oil................................................ 463

Washer.................................................... 474

Additives, Engine Oil................................ 463

Adjusting

Front Seats .............................................. 125

Head Restraints........................................ 128

Mirrors .................................................... 123

Rear Seats................................................ 132

Steering Wheel........................................ 122

Temperature.............................................. 82

Aha

......................................................... 204

Air Conditioning System

(Climate Control System)........................ 142

Changing the Mode ................................ 142

Defrosting the Windshield

and Windows ........................................ 143

Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 497

Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 142

Sensor ..................................................... 145

Synchronized Mode................................. 144

Using Automatic Climate Control............ 142

Air Pressure............................... 486, 531, 533

Airbags........................................................ 37

Advanced Airbags ..................................... 43

After a Collision ........................................ 40

Airbag Care............................................... 49

Event Data Recorder.................................. 23

Front Airbags (SRS).................................... 40

Indicator.............................................. 47, 70

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 48

Sensors ..................................................... 37

Side Airbags .............................................. 44

Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 46

AM/FM Radio............................ 161, 188, 227

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 441

Indicator.................................................... 69

Audio Remote Controls ........................... 153

Audio System............................................ 148

Adjusting the Sound................ 159, 186, 217

Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 150

Error Messages........................................ 263

General Information................................ 269

HDD........................................................ 237

Internet Radio ......................... 170, 202, 255

iPod®....................................... 167, 198, 247

MP3/WMA/AAC...................... 172, 205, 258

Reactivating ............................................ 151

Recommended CDs................................. 270

Recommended Devices............................ 272

Remote Controls ..................................... 153

Security Code.......................................... 151

Theft Protection ...................................... 151

Touch Screen .................................. 178, 211

USB Flash Drives...................................... 272

USB Port ................................................. 149

Authorized Manuals ................................ 541

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .................. 96

Customize ...................................... 291, 302

Automatic Lighting.................................. 114

Automatic Transmission .......................... 408

Creeping................................................. 408

Fluid ....................................................... 472

Kickdown ............................................... 408

Operating the Shift Lever .................. 17, 414

Shift Lever Does Not Move...................... 517

Shifting................................................... 413

Automatic Transmission (CVT)

Creeping................................................. 408

Fluid ....................................................... 471

Kickdown ............................................... 408

Operating the Shift Lever .................. 16, 410

Shift Lever Does Not Move...................... 517

Shifting................................................... 409

Auxiliary Input Jack ................................. 150

Average Fuel Economy .............................. 81

Battery ...................................................... 494

Charging System Indicator ................ 67, 520

Jump Starting ......................................... 514

Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ....... 494

2013 Accord Coupe

QRG

Index

Home

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

INDEX

547

Maintenance (Replacing)......................... 495

Belts (Seat).................................................. 30

Beverage Holders..................................... 137

Bluetooth® Audio..................... 175, 208, 261

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®............ 313, 350

Booster Seats (For Children)...................... 61

Brake System ............................................ 439

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 441

Brake Assist System................................. 442

Fluid ....................................................... 473

Foot Brake .............................................. 440

Indicator ........................................... 66, 522

Parking Brake.......................................... 439

Brake System Indicator (Amber) ............... 66

Brake System Indicator (Red) .................... 66

Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) ... 118

Bulb Replacement.................................... 475

Brake/Taillights, Back-Up Lights, Rear Turn

Signal Lights and Rear Side Marker

Lights.................................................. 481

Fog Lights ............................................... 478

Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights ....... 479

Headlights .............................................. 475

High-Mount Brake Light.......................... 482

Parking Lights ......................................... 480

Parking/Daytime Running Lights.............. 480

Rear License Plate Lights ......................... 482

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator

Lights.................................................... 479

Bulb Specifications........................... 530, 532

Carbon Monoxide Gas................................ 62

Cargo Hooks ............................................. 139

Carrying Cargo.................................. 393, 395

CD Player................................... 164, 195, 234

Center Pocket ........................................... 136

Certification Label .................................... 534

Changing Bulbs......................................... 475

Charging System Indicator ................. 67, 520

Child Safety................................................. 50

Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 100

Child Seat .................................................... 50

Booster Seats............................................. 61

Child Seat for Infants................................. 52

Child Seat for Small Children ..................... 53

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder

Seat Belt .................................................. 57

Larger Children.......................................... 60

Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 52

Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 54

Using a Tether........................................... 59

Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 500

Cleaning the Interior ................................ 498

Climate Control System............................ 142

Changing the Mode ................................ 142

Defrosting the Windshield

and Windows ........................................ 143

Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 497

Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode ............ 142

Sensors.................................................... 145

Synchronized Mode................................. 144

Using Automatic Climate Control............ 142

Clock............................................................ 84

Clutch Fluid............................................... 473

Coat Hook................................................. 139

Compact Spare Tire.................. 505, 531, 533

Compass .................................................... 388

Console Compartment............................. 135

Controls....................................................... 83

Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 469

Adding to the Radiator............................ 470

Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 469

Overheating ............................................ 518

Creeping

(Automatic Transmission/CVT)............... 408

Cruise Control........................................... 421

Indicator.................................................... 75

Cup Holders .............................................. 137

Customer Service Information................. 542

Customized Features................................ 273

Daytime Running Lights .......................... 116

Dead Battery............................................. 514

Defrosting the Windshield

and Windows.......................................... 143

Devices that Emit Radio Waves ............... 535

Dimming

Headlights............................................... 113

Rearview Mirror....................................... 123

Dipstick (Engine Oil)................................. 464

2013 Accord Coupe

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

INDEX

Index

QRG

Index

Home

548

Directional Signals (Turn Signal).............. 113

Display Button .......................... 155, 181, 213

Door Mirrors ............................................. 124

Doors ........................................................... 86

Auto Door Locking .................................... 96

Auto Door Unlocking................................. 96

Door and Trunk Open Indicator ........... 29, 70

Keys .......................................................... 86

Locking/Unlocking the Doors

from the Inside ........................................ 94

Locking/Unlocking the Doors

from the Outside ..................................... 89

Lockout Prevention System ........................ 93

DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 488

Driving....................................................... 391

Automatic Transmission (CVT) ................. 408

Braking.................................................... 439

Cruise Control ......................................... 421

Shifting Gear ................................... 413, 417

Shifting Position....................................... 409

Starting the Engine.......................... 401, 403

Driving Position Memory System............. 120

Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 497

Eco Assist System .......................................... 7

ECON Button............................................. 420

Electric Power Steering (EPS) System

Indicator............................................ 71, 522

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)............. 431

Emergency ................................................ 527

Emergency Trunk Opener........................ 100

Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes)....... 537

Engine ....................................................... 534

Coolant................................................... 469

Jump Starting.......................................... 514

Oil........................................................... 463

Starting ........................................... 401, 403

Switch Buzzer.......................................... 108

Engine Coolant......................................... 469

Adding to the Radiator............................ 470

Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 469

Overheating ............................................ 518

Temperature Gauge .................................. 79

Engine Oil ................................................. 463

Adding.................................................... 466

Checking................................................. 464

Displaying Oil Life.................................... 455

Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 67, 520

Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 463

ENGINE START/STOP Button.................... 109

EPS (Electric Power Steering)

System ............................................... 71, 522

Exhaust Gas Hazard

(Carbon Monoxide) .................................. 62

Expanded View Driver’s Mirror ............... 124

Exterior Care (Cleaning)........................... 500

Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 124

Features .................................................... 147

Filters

Dust and Pollen....................................... 497

Oil .......................................................... 467

Flat Tire..................................................... 505

Floor Mats ................................................ 499

Fluids

Automatic Transmission .......................... 472

Brake/Clutch ........................................... 473

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) .................................................... 471

Engine Coolant ....................................... 469

Manual Transmission .............................. 471

Windshield Washer ................................. 474

Fog Light Indicator .................................... 72

Folding Down the Rear Seat ................... 132

Foot Brake ................................................ 440

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .......... 424

Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 40

Front Seats................................................ 125

Adjusting ................................................ 125

Fuel ..................................................... 18, 446

Economy................................................. 448

Gauge ...................................................... 79

Instant Fuel Economy ................................ 81

Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 69

Range ....................................................... 82

Recommendation.................................... 446

Refueling ................................................ 446

Fuel Economy ........................................... 448

2013 Accord Coupe

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

INDEX

Index

QRG

Index

Home

549

Fuel Fill Cap ........................................ 18, 447

Message ................................................. 521

Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 18, 447

Fuses ......................................................... 524

Inspecting and Changing ........................ 526

Locations ........................................ 524, 525

Gasoline (Fuel)

Economy................................................. 448

Gauge ...................................................... 79

Information............................................. 446

Instant Fuel Economy ................................ 81

Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 69

Refueling ................................................ 446

Gauges........................................................ 79

Gear Shift Lever Positions

Automatic Transmission .......................... 413

Automatic Transmission (CVT)................. 409

Manual Transmission .............................. 418

Glass (care) ............................................... 501

Glove Box ................................................. 135

Halogen Bulbs .................................. 475, 478

Handling the Unexpected ....................... 503

HandsFreeLink® (HFL) ...................... 313, 350

Auto Answer .................................. 329, 365

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and

Call History .................................... 331, 367

Automatic Transferring.................... 329, 365

Displaying Messages........................ 345, 384

Editing User Name................................... 364

HFL Buttons..................................... 313, 350

HFL Menus ...................................... 316, 352

HFL Status Display ........................... 315, 351

Limitations for Manual Operation .... 315, 351

Making a Call .................................. 335, 376

Options During a Call ...................... 342, 381

Phone Setup.................................... 321, 356

Phonebook Phonetic Modification ........... 371

Receiving a Call ............................... 341, 380

Receiving a Text Message/E-mail...... 343, 382

Ring Tone........................................ 330, 366

Selecting a Mail Account ................. 344, 383

Speed Dial ....................................... 332, 368

To Create a Security PIN .................. 328, 363

To Set Up a Text Message/

E-mail Options ............................... 326, 361

Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio................... 237

Hazard Warning Button............................... 2

Head Restraints......................................... 128

Headlights................................................. 113

Aiming .................................................... 475

Automatic Operation............................... 114

Dimming ......................................... 113, 116

Operating................................................ 113

Heaters (Seat) ........................................... 141

HFL (HandsFreeLink®)....................... 313, 350

High Beam Indicator .................................. 72

Hill Start Assist System ..................... 402, 406

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver............ 311

Identification Numbers

Engine and Transmission ......................... 534

Vehicle Identification............................... 534

Ignition Switch ......................................... 108

Illumination Control

Knob....................................................... 118

Immobilizer System .................................. 101

Indicator.................................................... 72

Indicators .................................................... 66

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)..................... 69

Brake System (Amber) ............................... 66

Brake System (Red).................................... 66

Charging System............................... 67, 520

CRUISE CONTROL ............................. 75, 422

CRUISE MAIN.................................... 75, 421

Door and Trunk Open ............................... 70

ECON Mode...................................... 75, 420

EPS (Electric Power Steering)

System ............................................ 71, 522

Fog Light................................................... 72

Forward Collision Warning (FCW).............. 73

High Beam ................................................ 72

Immobilizer System ................................... 72

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)................. 74

Light Control............................................. 76

2013 Accord Coupe

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

INDEX

Index

QRG

Index

Home

550

Lights On................................................... 72

Low Fuel.................................................... 69

Low Oil Pressure ................................ 67, 520

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ............. 71, 435, 437

Maintenance Minder ......................... 75, 455

Malfunction Indicator Lamp............... 67, 521

Parking Brake and Brake System ........ 66, 522

Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 31, 69

Security System Alarm ............................... 72

Smart Entry System.................................... 75

Starter System ........................................... 76

Supplemental Restraint System ............ 47, 70

Transmission.............................................. 69

Turn Signal and Hazard Warning ............... 71

VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist)

System............................................. 70, 431

VSA® OFF .......................................... 70, 432

Washer Level ............................................. 75

Information............................................... 529

Information Display.................................... 80

Instant Fuel Economy ................................. 81

Instrument Panel ........................................ 65

Brightness Control................................... 118

Interface Dial ............................................ 210

Interior Lights ........................................... 133

Interior Rearview Mirror .......................... 123

Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench)......................... 508

Jump Starting............................................ 514

Key Number Tag......................................... 87

Keyless Lockout Prevention ....................... 93

Keys ............................................................. 86

Lockout Prevention.................................... 93

Master Keys .............................................. 86

Number Tag .............................................. 87

Remote Transmitter................................... 89

Types and Functions.................................. 86

Valet Key............................................. 87, 99

Won’t Turn ............................................... 21

Kickdown

(Automatic Transmission/CVT)............... 408

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ............. 428

LaneWatchTM .......................................... 433

Language (HFL) ................................ 315, 351

LATCH (Child Seats).................................... 55

Lights................................................. 113, 475

Automatic ............................................... 114

Bulb Replacement ................................... 475

Daytime Running Lights........................... 116

Fog Lights ............................................... 115

High Beam Indicator.................................. 72

Interior .................................................... 133

Light Switches ......................................... 113

Lights On Indicator.................................... 72

Turn Signals ............................................ 113

Load Limits................................................ 395

Locking/Unlocking ..................................... 86

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................... 96

From Inside ............................................... 94

From Outside ............................................ 89

Keys.......................................................... 86

Using a Key............................................... 93

Lockout Prevention System ....................... 93

Low Battery Charge ................................. 520

Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 69

Low Oil Pressure Indicator................. 67, 520

Low Smart Entry Remote

Signal Strength......................................... 88

Lower Anchors ........................................... 55

Lubricant Specifications Chart ........ 530, 532

Luggage (Maximum Load Limit)............. 395

Maintenance ............................................ 451

Battery.................................................... 494

Brake/Clutch Fluid................................... 473

Cleaning ................................................. 498

Climate Control System .......................... 497

Coolant .................................................. 469

Maintenance Minder

............................ 455

Oil .......................................................... 464

Precautions ............................................. 452

Radiator.................................................. 470

Remote Transmitter ................................ 495

Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 475

Safety ..................................................... 453

2013 Accord Coupe

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

INDEX

Index

QRG

Index

Home

551

Service Items........................................... 457

Tires........................................................ 485

Transmission Fluid................................... 471

Under the Hood...................................... 459

Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............. 67, 521

Manual Transmission ............................... 417

Map Lights................................................ 134

Maximum Load Limit............................... 395

Meters, Gauges .......................................... 79

Mirrors ...................................................... 123

Adjusting................................................ 123

Door ....................................................... 124

Exterior ................................................... 124

Interior Rearview..................................... 123

Modifications (and Accessories).............. 449

Moonroof ................................................. 107

MP3................... 164, 172, 195, 205, 234, 258

Multi-View Rear Camera ......................... 444

Numbers (Identification) ......................... 534

Odometer ................................................... 81

Oil (Engine) .............................................. 463

Adding ................................................... 466

Checking ................................................ 464

Displaying Oil Life ................................... 455

Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 67, 520

Recommended Engine Oil........................ 463

Viscosity .................................................. 463

Opening/Closing

Hood....................................................... 461

Moonroof................................................ 107

Power Windows ...................................... 104

Trunk ........................................................ 97

Outside Temperature Display .................... 82

Overheating.............................................. 518

Paddle Shifters

(7-Speed Manual Shift Mode)................ 411

Paddle Shifters

(Sequential Shift Mode) ......................... 415

Pandora®................................... 171, 203, 256

Panic Mode ............................................... 103

Parking ...................................................... 443

Parking Brake ........................................... 439

Parking Brake and Brake System

Indicator ............................................ 66, 522

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 48

Passing Indicators ..................................... 113

Power Windows........................................ 104

Precautions While Driving ....................... 407

Rain......................................................... 407

Pregnant Women ....................................... 35

Puncture (Tire) .......................................... 505

Radiator .................................................... 470

Radio (AM/FM) ......................... 161, 188, 227

Radio (XM®)...................................... 192, 231

Radio Data System (RDS) ......... 162, 190, 229

Range.......................................................... 82

RDS (Radio Data System) ......... 162, 190, 229

Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing)....... 537

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror

Button ..................................................... 119

Rear Seat (Folding Down)........................ 132

Rearview Camera ..................................... 445

Rearview Mirror ....................................... 123

Refueling .................................................. 446

Fuel Gauge................................................ 79

Gasoline.................................. 446, 530, 532

Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 69

Regulations............................... 437, 488, 535

Remote Transmitter ................................... 89

Replacement

Battery .................................................... 495

Bulbs....................................................... 475

Fuses............................................... 524, 525

Tires........................................................ 491

Wiper Blade Rubber ................................ 483

Reporting Safety Defects......................... 536

Resetting a Trip Meter............................... 81

Safe Driving ................................................ 25

2013 Accord Coupe

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

INDEX

Index

QRG

Index

Home

552

Safety Check................................................ 29

Safety Labels ............................................... 63

Safety Message ........................................... 24

Seat Belts..................................................... 30

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners.................. 32

Checking................................................... 36

Fastening................................................... 33

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder

Seat Belt .................................................. 57

Pregnant Women ...................................... 35

Reminder................................................... 31

Warning Indicator................................ 31, 69

Seat Heaters.............................................. 141

Seats .......................................................... 125

Adjusting................................................. 125

Front Seats .............................................. 125

Rear Seats................................................ 132

Seat Heaters ............................................ 141

Security System ......................................... 101

Immobilizer System Indicator ..................... 72

Security System Alarm Indicator................. 72

Select Lever ......................... 16, 409, 413, 417

Operation.......................... 16, 410, 414, 417

Releasing................................................. 517

Won’t Move ............................................ 517

Select/Reset Knob ....................................... 80

Selecting a Child Seat................................. 54

Selector Knob (Audio)...................... 154, 177

Sequential Shift Mode.............................. 415

Operation................................................ 416

Setting the Clock ........................................ 84

Shift Lever........................... 16, 409, 413, 417

Shift Position Indicator .............. 68, 410, 414

Shifting (Transmission)............. 409, 413, 417

Side Airbags................................................ 44

Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 46

Smart Entry with Push Button Start

System ....................................................... 91

Snow Tires................................................. 493

Spare Tire.................................. 505, 531, 533

Spark Plugs ....................................... 530, 532

Specifications............................................ 530

Specified Fuel ........................... 446, 530, 532

Speedometer .............................................. 79

SRS Airbags (Airbags)................................. 40

Starting the Engine.......................... 401, 403

Does Not Start......................................... 511

Engine Switch Buzzer .............................. 108

Jump Starting.......................................... 514

Steering Wheel......................................... 122

Adjusting ................................................ 122

Stopping ................................................... 443

Summer Tires ............................................ 493

Sunglasses Holder..................................... 140

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........ 40

Switches

(Around the Steering Wheel) ........ 2, 3, 108

SYNC Mode............................................... 144

Tachometer................................................. 79

Temperature

Outside Temperature Display .................... 82

Temperature Sensor .......................... 82, 145

Time (Setting)............................................. 84

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)..................................................... 435

Indicator ........................................... 71, 523

Tires .......................................................... 485

Air Pressure............................. 486, 531, 533

Checking and Maintaining ...................... 485

Inspection ............................................... 485

Labeling.................................................. 486

Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 505

Regulations............................................. 488

Rotation.................................................. 492

Spare Tire ............................... 505, 531, 533

Summer.................................................. 493

Tire Chains.............................................. 493

Wear Indicators....................................... 490

Winter .................................................... 493

Tools ......................................................... 504

Towing a Trailer....................................... 397

Equipment and Accessories..................... 398

Load Limits ............................................. 397

Towing Your Vehicle ............................... 400

Emergency.............................................. 527

TPMS

(Tire Pressure Monitoring System) ........ 435

Indicator ........................................... 71, 523

Transmission............................. 409, 413, 417

Automatic............................................... 413

2013 Accord Coupe

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

INDEX

Index

QRG

Index

Home

553

Automatic (CVT) ..................................... 409

Fluid ............................................... 471, 472

Manual ................................................... 417

Number .................................................. 534

Shift Lever Position Indicator ..... 68, 410, 414

Trip Meter .................................................. 81

Troubleshooting ...................................... 503

Blown Fuse ..................................... 524, 525

Brake Pedal Vibrates ................................. 21

Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door ......... 22

Emergency Towing ................................. 527

Engine Won’t Start ................................. 511

Noise When Braking ................................. 22

Overheating............................................ 518

Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 505

Select Lever Won’t Move ........................ 517

Warning Indicators.................................... 66

Trunk .......................................................... 97

Lid ............................................................ 97

Light Bulb ....................................... 530, 532

Main Switch.............................................. 99

Turn Signals.............................................. 113

Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 71

Unlocking the Doors.................................. 89

Unlocking the Front Doors

from the Inside......................................... 11

USB Flash Drives ....................................... 272

USB Port.................................................... 149

Using the Smart Entry with Push Button

Start System .............................................. 91

Valet Key............................................... 87, 99

Vanity Mirrors............................................... 5

Vehicle Identification Number ................ 534

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®).................. 431

Off Button............................................... 432

Off Indicator.............................................. 70

System Indicator ........................................ 70

Ventilation ................................................ 142

Viscosity (Oil) ............................ 463, 531, 533

VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist).................. 431

Warning and Information Messages......... 77

Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 520

Warning Labels........................................... 63

Warranties (Warranty Manual provided

separately)............................................... 539

Watts ................................................. 530, 532

Wear Indicators (Tire)............................... 490

Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 508

Window Washers...................................... 117

Adding/Refilling Fluid............................... 474

Switch ..................................................... 117

Windows (Opening and Closing)............. 104

Windshield................................................ 117

Cleaning ................................................. 501

Defrosting/Defogging.............................. 143

Washer Fluid ........................................... 474

Wiper Blades........................................... 483

Wipers and Washers................................ 117

Winter Tires .............................................. 493

Snow Tires .............................................. 493

Tire Chains.............................................. 493

Wipers and Washers................................. 117

Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 483

WMA................. 164, 172, 195, 205, 234, 258

Worn Tires ................................................ 485

XM® Radio ........................................ 192, 231

2013 Accord Coupe

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

INDEX

Index

QRG

Index

Home

Honda 2013 Accord Coupe Owners Manual